800-0002-TR32 Traverse Install and Config

Turin Networks Inc.
Traverse System
Documentation
Installation and Commissioning

Guide
Release TR3.2.x
Publication Date: October 2008
Document Number: 800-0002-TR32 Rev. B
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the installation instructions may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
Canadian Compliance
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respects toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Japanese Compliance
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by
Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio
disturbance may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take corrective actions.
International Declaration of Conformity

We, Turin Networks, Inc. declare under our sole responsibility that the Traverse platform (models: Traverse
2000, Traverse 1600, and Traverse 600) to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following
standards:
EMC Standards
EN55022 EN55024 CISPR-22
Safety Standards
EN60950 CSA 22.2 No. 60950, ASINZS 3260
IEC 60950 Third Edition. Compliant with all CB scheme member country deviations.
Following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC of the Council of the European Union.
Copyright © 2008 Turin Networks, Inc.
All rights reserved. This document contains proprietary and confidential information of Turin Networks,
Inc., and may not be used, reproduced, or distributed except as authorized by Turin Networks. No part of this
publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as
translation, transformation or adaptation) without written permission from Turin Networks, Inc.
Turin Networks reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content from time to time
without obligation on the part of Turin Networks to provide notification of such revision or change. Turin
Networks may make improvements or changes in the product(s) described in this manual at any time.
Turin Networks Trademarks
Turin Networks, the Turin Networks logo, Traverse, TraverseEdge, TransAccess, TransNav, and Creating
The Broadband Edge are trademarks of Turin Networks, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and other
countries. All other trademarks, service marks, product names, or brand names mentioned in this document
are the property of their respective owners.
Government Use
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212
(Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software), as applicable.
T RAVERSE I NSTALLATION AND C OMMISSIONING G UIDE
Contents
About this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Section 1 Installation Overview

Chapter 1
Installation and Commissioning Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2
Traverse System Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Section 2 Network Interface Specifications

Chapter 1
Fiber Optic Interface Cabling Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chapter 2
ECM Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Chapter 3
DS1 and E1 Interface Cabling Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Chapter 4
DS3 and E3 Interface Cabling Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Chapter 5
Ethernet (Electrical) Interface Cabling Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Section 3 Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface Specifications

Chapter 1
Alarm Interface Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Chapter 2
Timing Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Chapter 3
Management Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Section 4 Power Interface Specifications

Chapter 1
Power Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Section 5 Cable Management Specifications

Chapter 1
Cable Management Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Section 6 Precautions and Common Procedures

Chapter 1
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Chapter 2
Removing and Replacing Back Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Chapter 3
Inserting and Removing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page i

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide
Chapter 4
Insert Fan Module and Air Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Section 7 Hardware Installation Procedures

Chapter 1
Traverse System Rack Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Chapter 2
Traverse System Hardware Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Chapter 3
Traverse 2000 Installation into a 19-inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Section 8 Network Interface Cabling Procedures

Chapter 1
Network Interface Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Chapter 2
Fiber Optic Cabling Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Chapter 3
DS1 and E1 Cabling Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Chapter 4
DS3 and E3 Cabling Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Chapter 5
Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Section 9 Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling Procedures

Chapter 1
Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Chapter 2
Alarm Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Chapter 3
Timing Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Chapter 4
Management Interface Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Section 10 Power Installation and Cabling Procedures

Chapter 1
Power System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Chapter 2
Power System Hardware Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Chapter 3
Battery and Battery Return Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Chapter 4
Battery and Battery Return Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Section 11 Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures

Chapter 1
Node Start-up and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Section 12 Appendices
Appendix A
Card Placement Planning and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Page ii Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Appendix B
Installation and Commissioning Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Appendix C
TransAccess Mux Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page iii

Page iv Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Installation and Commissioning [TR3.2.x]
Document Description
About this Document
Introduction This description contains the following documentation topics:

• Traverse System Product Documentation, page 1
• TraverseEdge System Product Documentation, page 1
• TransNav Management System Product Documentation, page 1
• Operations Documentation, page 1
• Information Mapping, page 1
• If You Need Help, page 1
• Calling for Repairs, page 1
Refer to “What’s New in the Documentation?” to review the new and changed features
for this release.
Traverse The Traverse® system product documentation set includes the documents described in
System the table below.
Product Table 1 Traverse System Product Documentation
Documentation
Document Description Target Audience
Traverse Product This document provides a detailed overview of the Anyone who wants to
Overview Traverse system. It also includes engineering and understand the Traverse
planning information. system and its
applications.
Traverse This document provides required equipment, tools, Installers, field, and
Installation and and step-by-step procedures for: network engineers
Configuration • Hardware installation
• Power cabling
• Network cabling
• Node power up
• Node start-up
Traverse This document provides step-by-step procedures for Network engineers,

Provisioning provisioning a network of Traverse nodes using the provisioning, and
TransNav management system. See the TransNav network operations
Management System Product Documentation. center (NOC)
personnel
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page v

TraverseEdge System Product Documentation
TraverseEdge The TraverseEdge™ 100 User Guide includes the sections described in the table below.
System
Product Table 2 TraverseEdge 100 System Product Documentation
Documentation
Section Description Target Audience
Product Overview This section provides a detailed overview of the Anyone who wants to
TraverseEdge system. understand the
TraverseEdge system
and its applications
Description and This section includes engineering and planning Field and network
Specifications information. engineers
Installation and This document identifies required equipment and Installers, field, and
Configuration tools and provides step-by-step procedures for: network engineers
• Hardware installation
• Power cabling
• Network cabling
• Node power up
• Node start-up
Provisioning the This section provides step-by-step procedures for Network engineers,
Network provisioning a TraverseEdge network using the provisioning, and
TransNav management system. Also see the network operations
TransNav Management System Product center (NOC)
Documentation. personnel
Configuring This section provides step-by-step procedures for Network engineers,

Equipment configuring card and interface parameters of a provisioning, and
TraverseEdge using the TransNav management network operations
system. Also see the TransNav Management center (NOC)
System Product Documentation. personnel
Creating TDM This section provides step-by-step procedures for Network engineers,
Services provisioning a TraverseEdge network using the provisioning, and
TransNav management system. Also see the network operations
TransNav Management System Product center (NOC)
Documentation. personnel
Creating Ethernet This section provides step-by-step procedures for Network engineers,
Services provisioning a TraverseEdge network using the provisioning, and
TransNav management system. See the TransNav network operations
Management System Product Documentation. center (NOC)
personnel
Appendices This section provides installation and provisioning Installers and anyone
checklists, compliance information, and acronym who wants reference
descriptions. information.
Page vi Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

TransNav Management System Product Documentation
TransNav The TransNav™ management system product documentation set includes the
Management documents described in the table below.
System
Product Table 3 TransNav Management System Product Documentation
Documentation
TransNav This document provides a detailed overview of the Anyone who wants to
Management TransNav management system. understand the
System Product TransNav management
Overview system
This document includes hardware and software
requirements for the management system. It also
includes network management planning information.
TransNav This document describes the management server Field and network
Management component of the management system and provides engineers,
System Server procedures and troubleshooting information for the provisioning, and
Guide server. network operations
center (NOC)
TransNav This document describes the graphical user interface personnel
Management including installation instructions and logon
System GUI procedures.
Guide
This document describes every menu, window, and

screen a user sees in the graphical user interface.
TransNav This document includes a quick reference to the

Management command line interface (CLI). Also included are
System CLI comprehensive lists of both the node-level and
Guide domain-level CLI commands.
TransNav This document describes the syntax of the TL1

Management language in the TransNav environment.
System TL1
Guide
This document also defines all input commands and
expected responses for retrieval commands as well as
autonomous messages that the system outputs due to
internal system events.
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page vii

Operations Documentation
Operations The document below provides operations and maintenance information for Turin’s
Documentation TransNav managed products.
Table 4 Operations Documentation
Node Operations This document identifies required equipment and Field and network
and Maintenance tools. It also provides step-by-step procedures for: engineers
• Alarms and recommended actions
• Performance monitoring
• Equipment LED and status
• Diagnostics
• Test access (SONET network only)
• Routine maintenance
• Node software upgrades
• Node hardware upgrades
Information Traverse, TransNav, and TraverseEdge 100 system documentation uses the Information
Mapping Mapping format which presents information in small units or blocks. The beginning of
an information block is identified by a subject label in the left margin; the end is
identified by a horizontal line. Subject labels allow the reader to scan the document and
find a specific subject. Its objective is to make information easy for the reader to
access, use, and remember.
Each procedure lists the equipment and tools and provides step-by-step instructions
required to perform each task. Graphics are integrated into the procedures whenever
possible.
If You Need If you need assistance while working with Traverse products, contact the Turin
Help Networks Technical Assistance Center (TAC):
• Inside the U.S., toll-free: 1-866-TURINET (1-866-887-4638)
• Outside the U.S.: 916-348-2105
• Online: www.turinnetworks.com/html/support_overview.htm
TAC is available 6:00AM to 6:00PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday (business
hours). When the TAC is closed, emergency service only is available on a callback
basis. E-mail support (24-hour response) is also available through:
support@turinnetworks.com.
Calling for If repair is necessary, call the Turin Repair Facility at 1-866-TURINET (866-887-4638)
Repairs for a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number before sending the unit. The RMA
number must be prominently displayed on all equipment cartons. The Repair Facility is
open from 6:00AM to 6:00PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday.
When calling from outside the United States, use the appropriate international access
code, and then call 916-348-2105 to contact the Repair Facility.
Page viii Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Calling for Repairs
When shipping equipment for repair, follow these steps:

1. Pack the unit securely.
2. Enclose a note describing the exact problem.
3. Enclose a copy of the invoice that verifies the warranty status.
4. Ship the unit PREPAID to the following address:
Turin Networks, Inc.
Turin Repair Facility
Attn: RMA # ________
1415 North McDowell Blvd.
Petaluma, CA 94954 USA
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page ix

Calling for Repairs
Page x Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

S ECTION 1 I NSTALLATION O VERVIEW
Contents
Chapter 1
Installation and Commissioning Overview
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Traverse Installation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Installation Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Traverse Shelf Interface Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Chapter 2
Traverse System Configuration Examples
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Traverse System Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Example Traverse Shelf Card Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Traverse 1600 Rack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-2 Example Traverse 1600 Shelf Card Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
List of Tables
Table 1-1 Installation Process and References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page xv

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 1 Installation Overview
Page xvi Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

SECTION 1INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
Chapter 1
Installation and Commissioning Overview
Introduction This chapter includes the following topics:

• Traverse Installation Process, page 1-1
• Installation Checklists, page 1-2
• Traverse Shelf Interface Specifications, page 1-2
Traverse Use these steps as a guideline to installing and commissioning a Traverse system
Installation
Important: Do not install Traverse cards (modules) until all installation
Process
and cabling procedures are complete.
Table 1-1 Installation Process and References
Step Procedure Reference
1 Read the precautions before Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,

attempting to install the shelf. Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1
2 Familiarize yourself with common Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,

procedures such as inserting and page 6-9
removing cards and back cover.
3 Install the hardware, e.g., the Section 7—Hardware Installation Procedures,

optional power distribution and Chapter 1—“Traverse System Rack Installation
alarm panel (PDAP) and the Overview,” page 7-1
Traverse shelf. Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling
Procedures, Chapter 2—“Power System Hardware
Installation,” page 10-3
4 Install network cabling. Section 8—Network Interface Cabling Procedures,

page 8-3
5 Install alarm cabling. Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling

Procedures, Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,”
page 9-3
6 Install timing cabling. Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling

Procedures, Chapter 3—“Timing Interface Cabling,”
page 9-27
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page 1-1

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 1: Installation Overview
Installation Checklists
Table 1-1 Installation Process and References (continued)
7 Bring power cabling from the power Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling
source (e.g., PDAP) to the back of Procedures, page 10-1
the shelf. Turn on power to the
shelf.
8 Insert the active GCM card and Section 3—Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface
install a cable between the RS-232 Specifications, Chapter 3—“Management Interface
DCE interface on the card and a PC Specifications,” GCM Ethernet and RS-232 DCE
or laptop. Set up basic parameters, Interface, page 3-14
using the CLI interface. Section 11—Node Start-up and Commissioning
Procedures, Chapter 1—“Node Start-up and
Commissioning,” page 11-1
9 Install other management interfaces Section 3—Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface
as needed (DCN and DTE). Specifications, Chapter 3—“Management Interface
Specifications,” page 3-13
Installation See Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” page 12-21 for a
Checklists quick reference on installation procedures.
Traverse Shelf Traverse shelf interface specifications are in the following sections:
Interface • Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, page 2-i
Specifications • Section 3—Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface Specifications, page 3-i
• Section 4—Power Interface Specifications, page 4-i
• Section 5—Cable Management Specifications, page 5-i
Page 1-2 Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

SECTION 1INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
Chapter 2
Traverse System Configuration Examples

• Traverse System Configuration Example, page 1-4
• Example Traverse Shelf Card Layout, page 1-5

Traverse System Configuration Example
Traverse A single rack configuration can contain up to four Traverse shelves, fan tray holders,
System air ramps, and a fuse panel. Other hardware that may be in the same or an adjacent rack
Configuration is as follows:
Example • 10/100BaseT patch panel
• DS1 patch panel
• DS3 patch panel
• E1 patch panel
• E3 patch panel
• Fiber optic patch panel
• TransAccess 100 STS-1/T1 Mux and required power distribution unit (PDU)1
• Other third-party equipment as required
SD
Fuse Panel
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
Figure 1-1 Traverse 1600 Rack Configuration
1
Refer to the TransAccess 100 STS-1/T1 Mux and PDU customer documentation for more information.

Chapter 2 Traverse System Configuration Examples
Example Traverse Shelf Card Layout
Example The following graphic provides an example of card placement for a Traverse 1600 shelf
Traverse Shelf carrying multiple services and bandwidths. Included in this example are:
Card Layout (6) DS3/EC-1, (2) OC-3/STM-1, (2) OC-12/STM-4, (2) OC-48/STM-16, (2) VT/TU
5G Switch, and (2) GCM cards.
VT/TU GCMA
DS3/ OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 5GSwitch and B
Slot #s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P1 P1
Figure 1-2 Example Traverse 1600 Shelf Card Layout

Example Traverse Shelf Card Layout

S ECTION 2 N ETWORK I NTERFACE S PECIFICATIONS
Contents
Chapter 1
Fiber Optic Interface Cabling Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Card MPX Connectors and Fiber Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Fiber Optic Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Fiber Optic and Ethernet Combo Card Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
GbE-10 SCM, Fiber Assignments, and SFPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Connector Module Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
SFP Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
SFP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
General SCM Housing to Optical Fiber Port Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Optical GbE Port Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
General MPX Connector to Optical Fiber Port Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
DCS Application MPX Optical Connector Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Chapter 2
ECM Interface Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Electrical Connector Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Electrical Connector Card Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
ECM Placement at the Traverse Main Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-Slot ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
3-Slot ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
ECM and Card Placement Planning Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Chapter 3
DS1 and E1 Interface Cabling Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
DS1 and E1 ECMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
DS1/E1 ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
E1 ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
DS1 and E1 ECM Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Traverse 2000 DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Traverse 1600 DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Traverse 600 DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
DS1/E1 ECM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
1:1 protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
1:2 protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Unprotected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 2 Network Interface Specifications
DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and
Cable Color Codes (VT Mapped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and
Cable Color Codes (DS3 Mapped— G.747) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
E1 ECM Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Chapter 4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
DS3/E3 ECM Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Traverse 2000 DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Traverse 1600 DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Traverse 600 DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
DS3/E3 ECM Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2-Slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
3-Slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
3-Slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Chapter 5
Ethernet (Electrical) Interface Cabling Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
NGE and EoPDH Card Protection Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
NGE and EoPDH Card Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Ethernet Protection ECM Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Ethernet Protection ECM for Electrical 1:1 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Port Mapping Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Port to ECM Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
ECM Pinout and Cable Color Code for Electrical NGE and EoPDH Ports . . . 2-46
Ethernet Protection ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH Cards . . . . . . . . 2-50
10/100BaseT ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Fiber Optic Card (viewed from the right side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-2 2-Slot SCM on a Traverse 1600 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-3 GbE-10 SFP Connector Module (SCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-4 GbE Optical Coupler/Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-5 Electrical Connector Cards (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-6 2-Slot ECM on a Traverse 1600 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-7 2-Slot ECM on a Traverse 600 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-8 3-Slot ECM on a Traverse 1600 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Figure 2-9 3-Slot ECM on a Traverse 600 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Figure 2-10 DS1/E1 ECM—1:1 Protection Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Figure 2-12 DS1/E1 ECM—Unprotected Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Figure 2-13 3-Slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Figure 2-14 2-Slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Figure 2-15 3-Slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Figure 2-16 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Figure 2-17 Ethernet Protection ECM—1:1 Protection Connectors . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Figure 2-18 Ethernet Protection ECM—Unprotected Connectors . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Figure 2-19 10/100BaseT ECM with Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
List of Tables
Table 2-1 Traverse MPX Housing Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Table 2-2 10-port GbE SFP Module Connector Module Type . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Table 2-3 10-port GbE Card SFP Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2-4 GbE Port Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-5 Fiber Optic Port Assignment and SCM Housing Position . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-6 Fiber Optic Port Assignment and MPX Connector and
Housing Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table 2-7 DCS Application MPX Optical Connector Scheme (SONET only) 2-13
Table 2-8 Electrical Connector Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Table 2-9 ECM and Card Placement Planning Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Table 2-10 Traverse 2000 DS1 and E1 Cabling Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Table 2-11 Traverse 1600 DS1 and E1 Cabling Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Table 2-12 Traverse 600 DS1 and E1 Cabling Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Table 2-13 DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and
Cable Color Codes (VT Mapped, DS1 and E1 Cabling) . . . . . . . . 2-31
Cable Color Codes (DS3 Mapped—G.747, E1 Cabling Only) . . . 2-32
Table 2-15 Traverse 2000 DS3 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Table 2-16 Traverse 1600 DS3 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Table 2-17 Traverse 600 DS3 Card Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Table 2-18 Ethernet Interface and Ethernet Protection ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One) . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Table 2-19 Ethernet Electrical Interface and Ethernet Protection ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two) . . . . . . . . . 2-48


SECTION 2NETWORK INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 1
Fiber Optic Interface Cabling Specifications
Introduction The Traverse shelf provides MPX optical fiber connectors to support high-capacity,
high-density, and easy-operation fiber connection for optical interface cards: Ethernet
and SONET/SDH. Each slot has receptacles for up to two MPX ribbon fiber connectors
to support single mode and multi-mode fiber optic cable. Each Traverse backplane
MPX connector housing supports from 1 to 12 fiber pairs, for a maximum fiber count
of 48 per slot. There is a white stripe reference mark along one edge of the backplane
housing and card MPX connector. The white stripe orients the number one fiber
position.
The Traverse shelf also provides a small form-factor pluggable (SFP) connector
module (SCM) to support high-density and easy-operation fiber connection for the
10-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE-10) card.
This chapter includes the following topics:
• Card MPX Connectors and Fiber Position, page 2-2
• Fiber Optic Backplane, page 2-3
• Fiber Optic and Ethernet Combo Card Patch Panels, page 2-3
• GbE-10 SCM, Fiber Assignments, and SFPs, page 2-4
– Connector Module Type, page 2-4
– SFP Types, page 2-5
– SFP Specifications, page 2-6
• Optical GbE Port Protection, page 2-8
• General MPX Connector to Optical Fiber Port Assignment, page 2-9
• DCS Application MPX Optical Connector Scheme, page 2-13
For cabling procedures, see Section 8—Network Interface Cabling Procedures,
Chapter 2—“Fiber Optic Cabling Procedures,” page 8-3.
For electrical cabling specifications, see Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical) Interface
Cabling Specifications,” page 2-43.

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 2: Network Interface Specifications
Card MPX Connectors and Fiber Position
Card MPX The following cards have two male MPX connectors on the top back edge of the card:
Connectors • 2-port GbE SX plus 2-port GbE CWDM (40 km) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
and Fiber Combo (NGE)
Position • 2-port GbE LX plus 8-port 100BaseFX Combo (Legacy)
• 2-port OC-12/STM-4 on a GCM
• 2-port OC-48/STM-16
• 8-port STM-1/OC-3
• 8-port GbE LX (Legacy)
The following 1-, 2-, and 4-port cards have one male MPX connector:
• 1-port 10GbE
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (NGE)
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (NGE)
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (NGE Plus)
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (NGE Plus)
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (EoPDH)
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (EoPDH)
• 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (Legacy)
• 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (Legacy)
• 4-port GbE CWDM (40 km) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (NGE)
• 4-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (NGE)
• 4-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (NGE)
• 4-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX/CEP Combo (NGE Plus)
• 4-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX/CEP Combo (NGE Plus)
• 4-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX/CEP Combo (EoPDH)
• 4-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX/CEP Combo (EoPDH)

Chapter 1 Fiber Optic Interface Cabling Specifications
Fiber Optic and Ethernet Combo Card Patch Panels
The following graphic orients the card housing with the MPX cable connectors:
Module housing
A (upper)
B (lower)
A Connector A (upper)
B
White
Stripe
MPX connectors with a
white stripe reference
mark for fiber position 1
White
Stripe
Connector B (lower)
Figure 2-1 Fiber Optic Card (viewed from the right side)
Fiber Optic The Traverse fiber optic backplane contains duplex backplane housings for the card
Backplane MPX connectors. The fiber optic backplane housings are marked with a white stripe
reference marker to properly orient the MPX connectors. The table below describes the
number of duplex housings and GCM housing slot numbers.
Table 2-1 Traverse MPX Housing Specifications
# of Duplex GCM Housing

Platform
Housings Slot Numbers
Traverse 2000 20 19, 20

Traverse 1600 16 15, 16
Traverse 600 6 5, 6
Fiber Optic and A fiber optic patch panel may be used to provide access and standard connectors (SC,
Ethernet FC, ST, LC, or D4) for termination of fiber optic cables from the Optical Distribution
Combo Card Frame (ODF) and from the Traverse fiber optic backplane. Fiber optic cable with a
Patch Panels MPX female connector on one end must be used to make the connection at the Traverse
fiber optic backplane. An MPX connector on the other end of the fiber optic cable is
optional. Fiber optic cable with fan out for termination to single fiber connectors (SC,
FC, ST, LC, or D4) is another option.

GbE-10 SCM, Fiber Assignments, and SFPs
For Ethernet Combo cards, Turin provides an optional snap-in faceplate patch panel for
termination of fiber optic cables (4-port SC duplex adapter module for SM/MM) and
Category 5 cables (RJ-45 modular jack) for flexibility and better identification of pairs
terminated at the intermediate patch panel. (Turin model number
PANEL-4SC-18CAT5E-COMBO).
GbE-10 SCM, The Traverse shelf also provides a small form-factor pluggable (SFP) connector
Fiber module (SCM) to support high-density and easy-operation fiber connection for the
Assignments, 10-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE-10) card.
and SFPs The GbE-10 card must be ordered with a 10-port SFP connector module (SCM).
Connector Module Type

The Traverse supports this connector module type:
Table 2-2 10-port GbE SFP Module Connector Module Type
Model Number Module Description
CONNECTOR-10P-SFP 2-slot-wide, 10-Port SFP connector module (SCM) for 10-port
1GbE card (TRA-10P-1GE-SFP)
The 2-slot SCM occupies the width of two slots, as shown below. For example, the
SCM for slots 1 and 2 plugs into the 2 mm connectors for slot number 2 (n+1=2). The
SCM plugs into any even slot, and the lowest slot in the card pair is the protecting slot.
In the figure of the Traverse shelf below, all of the even main backplane 2 mm
connectors are chosen and shown in dark gray. The outline of the 2-slot SCM for slots 1
and 2 is shown in light gray.
n+1 n
2-slot SCM
Slot n+1=2
connectors
Figure 2-2 2-Slot SCM on a Traverse 1600 Backplane

The SCM backplane device provides for the physical connection of the GbE-10 links to
the Traverse. The SCM supports pluggable SFPs. It has ten SFP receptacles, into which
the operator can insert (Turin recommended) SFPs.
Optical cabling
Angled SCM View

Electrical cabling
Figure 2-3 GbE-10 SFP Connector Module (SCM)
SFP Types
The 10-port GbE (GbE-10) card provides up to ten 802.3z-compliant optical or
electrical GbE ports of customer-installable Small Form Factor Pluggable optics (SFPs)
using an SFP connector module (SCM). The SFPs can be in any mix of pluggable
SFP-based 1000Base-SX, -LX, or -ZX optical or 1000Base-TX electrical interfaces.
The Traverse supports these customer-installable SFP types:
Table 2-3 10-port GbE Card SFP Types
Model Number SFP Description
SFP-1000BASE-SX850 1000Base-SX SFP, MMF, 850nm (customer installable)
SFP-1000BASE-LX1310 1000Base-LX SFP, SMF, 1310nm (customer installable)
SFP-1000BASE-ZX1550 1000Base-ZX SFP, SMF, 1550nm (customer installable)
SPF-1000BASE-TX 1000Base-TX SFP, Copper, RJ-45 connector (customer installable)

SFP Specifications
This table lists the specifications for the optical and electrical GbE port interfaces:
Table 2-4 GbE Port Interface Specifications

Specification
Parameter GbE SX GbE LX GbE ZX GbE TX
(SFP-1000BASE-SX850) (SFP-1000BASE-LX1330) (SFP-1000BASE-ZX1550) (SFP-1000BASE-TX)
Port data rate 1 Gbps
Connector SFP LC SFP RJ-45
(SCM required) (SCM required)
Maximum 9,600 byte Jumbo Frames (default 1,522 bytes)
frame size
Media type Multi-mode fiber (SX) Single mode fiber (LX and ZX) 4 pairs, Twisted Pair
Category 5 UTP
Objective 0.34 mi 6.21 mi 49.71 mi 328 ft
Distance1, 2 0.55 km 10 km 80 km 100 m
Nominal 850 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
wavelength
Transmitter –10.5 to –4 dBm –10 to –3 dBm -1 to -5 dBm
output power3
n/a
Receiver level1 –16 to –3 dBm –18 to –3 dBm -22 to -3 dBm
2 23 –1 PRBS, BER=10 -10
Guaranteed link 5.5 dB 8 dB 21
budget1
Laser control Manual and automatic n/a
1
Per IEEE 802.3-2005 for Ethernet and assumes a fiber loss of 0.4 dB/km for 1330 m, pr 0.25 dB/km for 1550 nm (including splices,
connectors, etc.). Per GR-253-CORE, Issue 3, for SONET/SDH and assumes a fiber loss of 0.55 dB/km for 1310 nm or 0.275 dB/km
for 1550 nm (including splices, connectors, etc.).
2
Turin recommends customers to take actual fiber readings, as these values are based on standards qualification.
3
These values account for the connector loss from connection to the optical interface and the worst case optical path penalty.

General SCM Housing to Optical Fiber Port Assignment

The following diagram details the SFP LC connector fiber port assignments and SCM
housing position. It describes the cables and which fibers are used for the various cards.
Depending on the cable type, use either the fiber position number or multi-color code
scheme and the receive (RX) and transmit (TX) indicators to clarify the optical fiber
assignment.
Table 2-5 Fiber Optic Port Assignment and SCM Housing Position
Fiber
Assignment
Fiber to MPX
Card Related to Ports Orientation to SCM Housing Position
Cable
and SFP Duplex
LC Position
1-port optics 1 Each, 2 Fiber

• 1 port each per (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4)
Port #1 Ports 1 & 2
10-port GbE
1 2
RX TX
TX RX Top of Top of
(Fiber: 1-Blue, SFP SFP
TX RX
2-Orange)
Port 1 Port 2

Optical GbE Port Protection
Optical GbE With an optical coupler/splitter cable, protection extends to the optical (GbE or 10GbE)
Port Protection ports on NGE, NGE Plus, GbE-10, 10GbE, or EoPDHcards in a 1:1 equipment
protection group. Use the optical splitter/coupler to bridge the signal from both the
working and protecting card (of like type) to provide 1:1 optical equipment protection
for these GbE ports.
There is one optical link from the customer premise equipment (CPE) to the
coupler/splitter, connecting the CPE to the working card. The splitter sends a copy of
the optical signal to both the working and protecting cards in the equipment protection
group. The coupler receives a signal from both of the cards, combines them, and sends
the composite signal—effectively the signal from the working (active) card—to the
CPE.
On the working card of the protection group, the optical transmitters are up (laser on),
while on the protecting (standby) card, the optical transmitters are forced down (laser
off). Upon an equipment protection switch, when the card transitions from working to
protecting or vice versa, its optical ports are automatically brought down or up, as
appropriate.
When there is a protection switch from one card in an 1:1 equipment protection group
to the other card, services on the optical ports restore as soon as those on the electrical
Ethernet ports. Alarms may be raised briefly during the switch while the the optical
transmitters are down until they are automatically brought back up.
Optical port protection does not protect against fiber cuts.
Figure 2-4 GbE Optical Coupler/Splitter
For protection group creation instructions, see the Traverse Provisioning Guide,
Section 3—Creating Protection Groups, Chapter 4—“Creating Equipment Protection
Groups,” page 3-21.

General MPX The following diagram details the MPX connector fiber port assignments and MPX connector housing position. It describes
Release TR3.2.x
Connector to the cables and which fibers are used for the various cards. Depending on the cable type, use either the fiber position number or
Optical Fiber multi-color code scheme and the receive (RX) and transmit (TX) indicators to clarify the optical fiber assignment. The MPX
Port housings and connectors are marked with a white stripe reference marker to properly orient the MPX connectors.
Assignment Important: (SONET network only.) For DCS application 2-port OC-48/STM-16 fiber optic connection options, see DCS
Application MPX Optical Connector Scheme, page 2-13.
Housing Position
MPX
Connector
and
Fiber to MPX Housing
Card Fiber Assignment Related to Ports
Cable Position
(A–upper
Turin Networks
&
B–lower)
General MPX Connector to Optical Fiber Port Assignment


• 1-port OC-48/STM-16 (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1
• 1-port OC-192/STM-64 1 2
• 1-port 10GbE MPX
RX TX
• GCM with 1-port
OC-48/STM-16 (Fiber: 1-Blue, 2-Orange)
• GCM with 1-port
OC-12/STM-4)
2-port OC-N/STM-N 2 Each, 2 Fiber

• 2-port OC-48/STM-16 (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1 Port #2 port 2 MPX
• GCM with 2-port
1 2 1 2
OC-12/STM-4
RX TX RX TX port 1 MPX
(Fiber: 1-Blue, 2-Orange)

Page 2-9
Page 2-10

Housing Position (continued)
MPX
Connector
and
Cable Position
(A–upper
&
B–lower)
2-port optic 1 Each, 4 Fiber

(on Combo cards) (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1 Port #2
• 2-port GbE LX plus 8-port
100BaseFX Combo [Legacy] 2 3 1 4
MPX
RX TX RX TX
• 2-port GbE [LX or SX] plus
16-port 10/100BaseTX (Fiber: 2-Orange, 3-Green, 1-Blue, 4-Brown)
Turin Networks
Combo [Legacy]
GbE TX plus 1 Each, 4 Fiber Note: Ports 3 and 4 for LX or SX

2-port optics (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4)
Port #3 Port #4
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port
GbE [LX or SX] plus 2 3 1 4 MPX
10/100BaseTX Combo RX TX RX TX
[NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH]
(Fiber: 2-Orange, 3-Green, 1-Blue, 4-Brown)
2-port plus 2-port optics 2 Each, 4 Fiber Note: Ports 1 and 2 for CWDM
• 2-port GbE SX plus 2-port (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1 Port #2 CWDM MPX
GbE CWDM plus 16-port
2 3 1 4
10/100BaseTX Combo
RX TX RX TX SW MPX
[NGE]
Note: Ports 3 and 4 for SX
Port #3 Port #4
Release TR3.2.x
2 3 1 4
RX TX RX TX

Release TR3.2.x
MPX
Connector
and
Cable Position
(A–upper
&
B–lower)

• 4-port OC-3/STM-1 (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4
• 4-port OC-12/STM-4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8
• 4-port GbE (LX or SX) plus MPX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
16-port 10/100BaseTX
(Fiber: 4-Brown, 5-Slate, 3-Green, 6-White, 2-Orange, 7-Red, 1-Blue, 8-Black)
Turin Networks
Combo [NGE, NGE Plus,

EoPDH]

• 4-port GbE CWDM 40 km
plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Combo [NGE]

(on Combo cards) (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4 Port #5 Port #6 Port #7 Port #8 MPX
• 2-port GbE LX plus 8-port 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16
100BaseFX Combo [Legacy] RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
(Fiber: 1&9-Blue, 2&10-Orange, 3&11-Green, 4&12-Brown, 5&13-Slate,

6&14-White, 7&15-Red, 8&16-Black)
Page 2-11
Page 2-12

MPX
Connector
and
Cable Position
(A–upper
&
B–lower)

• 8-port OC-3/STM-1 (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4 Port #5 Port #6 Port #7 Port #8 RX
MPX
(a)
• 8-port STM-1/OC-3 1a 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b 4a 4b 5a 5b 6a 6b 7a 7b 8a 8b
• 8-port GbE LX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
TX
MPX
(b)
(Fiber: 1a&b-Blue, 2a&2b-Orange, 3a&b-Green, 4a&b-Brown, 5a&b-Slate,
6a&b-White, 7a&b-Red, 8a&b-Black)
Turin Networks

• 16-port OC-3/STM-1 (SC/FC/ST/LC/D4) Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4 Port #5 Port #6 Port #7 Port #8 RX
MPX
(a)
1a 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b 4a 4b 5a 5b 6a 6b 7a 7b 8a 8b
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX TX
(b)
MPX
Port #9 Port #10 Port #11 Port #12 Port #13 Port #14 Port #15 Port #16
9a 9b 10a 10b 11a 11b 12a 12b 13a 13b 14a 14b 15a 15b 16a 16b
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
(Fiber:
1a&b-Blue, 2a&2b-Orange, 3a&b-Green, 4a&b-Brown, 5a&b-Slate,
6a&b-White, 7a&b-Red, 8a&b-Black,
9a&b-Blue, 10a&2b-Orange, 11a&b-Green, 12a&b-Brown, 13a&b-Slate,
14a&b-White, 15a&b-Red, 16a&b-Black)
Release TR3.2.x
DCS Application MPX Optical Connector Scheme
DCS (SONET network only.) A multi-shelf Traverse DCS application consists of a DCS-384
Application matrix shelf and one or more DCS-IO shelves.
MPX Optical The following diagram details two possible MPX optical connector schemes for a
Connector multi-shelf Traverse DCS application. The MPX housings and connectors are marked
Scheme with a white stripe reference marker to properly orient the MPX connectors.
Table 2-7 DCS Application MPX Optical Connector Scheme (SONET only)
MPX MPX
Connector Connector
DCS-384 Matrix Fiber DCS IO Shelf Fiber
and and
Shelf Card Cable Card Cable
Housing Housing
Position Position
2-port OC-48 2 Each, 2-port OC-48 2 Each,

port 2 MPX 2 Fibers port 2 MPX 2 Fibers
port 1 MPX port 1 MPX
1-port OC-48 1 Each,

2 Fibers
MPX
port 2 MPX 2 Each,
2-port OC-48 2 Fibers
port 1 MPX 1-port OC-48 1 Each,
2 Fibers
MPX

DCS Application MPX Optical Connector Scheme

Chapter 2
ECM Interface Specifications
Introduction The Traverse shelf uses electrical connector modules (ECMs) to provide
easy-operation connection for copper and coax interface modules using
industry-standard cables and connectors.
• Electrical Connector Modules, page 2-16
• Electrical Connector Card Interface Specifications, page 2-17
• ECM Placement at the Traverse Main Backplane, page 2-18
• ECM and Card Placement Planning Guidelines, page 2-20

Electrical The Traverse shelf uses electrical connector cards (ECM) to provide easy-operation network connections for copper and coax
Page 2-16
Electrical Connector Modules

Connector interface cards using industry-standard cables and connectors. There are nine types of ECMs used for copper and coax cabling
Modules at the Traverse main backplane:
• 2-slot-wide DS1/E1 (Telco 64)
• 2-slot-wide DS3/E3 (12-port BNC)
• 2-slot-wide Ethernet Protection (Ethernet—GbE TX, and 10/100BaseTX) (Telco 50)
• 2-slot-wide 10/100BaseT (Ethernet—10/100BaseTX) (Telco 50)
• 3-slot-wide DS3/E3 (24-port BNC)
• 3-slot-wide DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB)
• 3-slot-wide E1 (42-port Mini-SMB)
Turin Networks
Figure 2-5 Electrical Connector Cards (Front View)

Release TR3.2.x
Chapter 2 ECM Interface Specifications
Electrical Connector Card Interface Specifications
Electrical The following table provides the number of port connections per ECM across
Connector protection schemes, ECM connectors, and cable specifications for each type of ECM.
Card Interface The total number of port connections per ECM is based on like cards placed adjacently
Specifications in the shelf.
Important: This chapter includes information specific to only Release

TR3.2 and subsequent Ethernet equipment, unless otherwise noted. For
information about pre-Release TR2.1.x Legacy Ethernet cards, refer to the
Traverse Release 2.0 documentation on the Turin website at
www.turinnetworks.com. User registration is required. To register for the
Turin Infocenter, contact your sales account team.
Table 2-8 Electrical Connector Card Specifications
Total # of Port Connections per ECM

ECM Type Type of ECM
1:2 1:1 Cable Description
(Card Type) Connectors
Equipment Equipment Unprotected
Protection Protection
DS1/E1 56 28 56
(28-port DS1) (4) female Copper 32-pair cable, 24 AWG,
Telco 64 with 180º male Telco 64
DS1/E1 42 21 42 (CHAMP) connector
(21-port E1)
E1, 3-slot, Mini-SMB 42 21 42 (84) female Coax, AT&T 735A equivalent,

(21-port E1) 75 ohm with male Mini-SMB
Mini-SMB connector
DS3/E3, 2-slot N/A 12 12 (24) female Coax, AT&T 734A or 735A

(12-port DS3/E3) 75 ohm BNC equivalent, with male BNC
connector
DS3/E3, 3-slot, BNC 24 12 24 (48) female Coax, AT&T 734A or 735A

(12-port DS3/E3) 75 ohm BNC equivalent, with male BNC
connector
DS3/E3, 3-slot, 48 24 48 (96) female Coax, AT&T 735A equivalent,

Mini-SMB 75 ohm with male Mini-SMB
(24-port DS3/E3; Mini-SMB connector
UTMX-24;
UTMX-481)
Ethernet N/A 16–18 16–18 (2) female Copper, 25-pair category 5

Protection Telco 50 cable, with 180º male Telco 50
(NGE, NGE Plus, (Centronics) connector
EoPDH)
10/100BaseT N/A N/A 32–36 (4) female Copper, 25-pair category 5

(NGE, NGE Plus, Telco 50 cable, with 180º male Telco 50
EoPDH) (Centronics) connector
1
Of the 48 ports on the UTMX-48 module, the first 24 ports (1 through 24) can be used as electrical or optical (STS1-TMX) ports.
Ports 25 through 48 are optical only.

ECM Placement at the Traverse Main Backplane
ECM ECMs plug into the main backplane 2 mm connectors of any corresponding odd or
Placement at even slot. The n-slot ECM occupies the width of n slots on the main backplane.
the Traverse • 2-Slot ECM, page 2-18
Main • 3-Slot ECM, page 2-19
Backplane
2-Slot ECM The 2-slot ECM occupies the width of two slots, as shown below. For example, the
ECM for slots 1 and 2 plugs into the 2 mm connectors for slot number 1 (n=1). The
ECM can plug into any odd or even slot, and the lowest slot in the pair is the protecting
slot. In the figures of the Traverse shelf below, all of the odd main backplane 2 mm
connectors are chosen and shown in dark gray. The outline of the 2-slot ECM for slots
1 and 2 is shown in light gray.
n+1 n
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
connectors
Figure 2-6 2-Slot ECM on a Traverse 1600 Backplane

n+1 n
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
connectors

3-Slot ECM
3-Slot ECM The 3-slot ECM occupies the width of three slots as shown below. For example, the
ECM for slots 1, 2, and 3 plugs into the 2 mm connectors for the center slot (n+1=2).
The ECM can plug into any odd or even slot. In the Traverse shelf figures shown
below, the main backplane 2 mm connectors chosen are shown in dark gray. The
outline of the 3-slot ECM for slots 1, 2, and 3 is shown in light gray.
n+2 n+1 n
3-slot ECM
Slot n+1=2
connectors
n+2 n+1 n
3-slot ECM
Slot n+1=2
connectors

ECM and Card Placement Planning Guidelines
ECM and Card Since ECMs are two, three, and four slots in width and different protection schemes
Placement exist, the following guidelines apply for card placement planning and cabling:
Planning Table 2-9 ECM and Card Placement Planning Guidelines
Guidelines
Guideline
Protection ECM Type Card
(Front-shelf Perspective)
1:2 2-slot DS1/E1 • DS1 Place like cards in any three adjacent
• E1 slots (i.e., n, n+1, and n+2). The
protection group can start in any odd or
3-slot DS3/E3 • DS3/EC-1
even slot. The card in the center slot
Transmux
(n+1) is the protecting card for the
• 12- or 24-port
working cards in the two adjacent slots.
DS3/E3/EC-1CC
• UTMX-24
• UTMX-48
3-slot E1 E1
1:1 2-slot DS1/E1 • DS1 Place like cards in any two adjacent slots
• E1 (n and n+1). The protection group can
start in any odd or even slot. Either card
2-slot DS3/E3 • DS3/EC-1 CC
(n or n+1) can be the protecting or
• DS3/EC-1
working card in the protection group.
Transmux
• E3 CC
• 12-port
DS3/E3/EC-1 CC
3-slot DS3/E3 • DS3/EC-1 CC Place like cards in any two adjacent
• DS3/EC-1 slots. The protection group can start in
Transmux any odd or even slot. Either the
• E3 CC left-adjacent (n) or right-adjacent (n+2)
• 12- or 24-port card from the protecting card (n+1) is
DS3/E3/EC-1 CC the working card. The remaining
• UTMX-24 adjacent slot is open in this
configuration. Either leave the slot open
• UTMX-48
for a future upgrade to 1:2 protection or
3-slot E1 E1 place an optic card in the open slot.

Table 2-9 ECM and Card Placement Planning Guidelines (continued)
Guideline
2-slot • 4-port GbE [SX | Place like cards in any two adjacent
Ethernet LX | CWDM] slots. The protection group can start in
Protection plus 16-port any odd or even slot. Either card (n or
10/100BaseTX n+1) can be the protecting or working
[CEP [\EoPDH]] card in the protection group.
• 2-port GbE TX
plus 2-port GbE
[SX | LX] plus
16-port
10/100BaseTX
[CEP [\EoPDH]]
Unprotected 2-slot DS1/E1 • DS1 Place two like copper-interface cards in
• E1 adjacent slots (n and n+1). Connect the
cables to the ECM for direct access to
10/100BaseT Any 10/100BaseTX
these cards.
inclusive
3-slot DS3/E3 • DS3/EC-1 Place two like copper-interface cards in
Transmux the center- (n+1) and right-most (n+2)
• 12- or 24-port slots and an optical card in the left-most
DS3/E3/EC-1 CC (n) slot. Connect the copper-interface
• UTMX-24 cables to the ECM accordingly.
• UTMX-48
3-slot E1 E1
Any 2-slot • DS1 Place a card in one slot and an optical
ECM • DS3/EC-1 CC card (OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, or
(optional) • DS3/EC-1 OC-48/STM-16) in the other slot.
Transmux Connect the copper-interface cables to
• E1 the ECM accordingly.
• E3 CC
• Ethernet

Table 2-9 ECM and Card Placement Planning Guidelines (continued)
Guideline
1:N without n/a DS3 Transmux (SONET network only) Where N = 1 to
ECM 12 in a Traverse 2000. The Traverse
supports DS3 Transmux equipment
protection groups for high-density
optical transmux applications
(STS1-TMX mode). One card protects
all remaining adjacent cards.
• UTMX-24 (SONET network only) Where N = 1 to
• UTMX-48 4 in a Traverse 2000. The Traverse
supports UTMX equipment protection
groups for high-density optical transmux
applications (STS1-TMX mode). One
card protects all remaining adjacent
cards.
VT/TU 5G Switch (SONET network only) Where N = 1 to
9 in a Traverse 2000. The Traverse
supports VT/TU 5G Switch card
equipment protection groups. One card
protects all remaining adjacent cards.
(SDH network only) Where N = 1. The
Traverse supports VT/TU 5G Switch
card equipment protection groups. One
card protects all remaining adjacent
cards.

Chapter 3
Introduction The Traverse main backplane supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection switching and
cabling for 28-port DS1 and 12-port E1 cards using either the DS1/E1 or E1 electrical
connector module (ECM).
• DS1 and E1 ECMs, page 2-23
• DS1 and E1 ECM Placement, page 2-24
• DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-24
• DS1/E1 ECM Mapping, page 2-29
• DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes, page 2-31
• E1 ECM Mapping, page 2-33
Chapter 3—“DS1 and E1 Cabling Procedures,” page 8-15.
For general ECM information, see Section 2—Network Interface Specifications,
Chapter 2—“ECM Interface Specifications,” page 2-15.
DS1 and E1 The following ECMs are available for DS1 and E1 card cabling:
ECMs DS1/E1 ECM. Offers DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) cabling using
industry-standard twisted-pair copper cable with Telco 64 connectors or a Turin Telco
64 cable assembly. The DS1/E1 ECM has four Telco 64 connectors on the front and
two 2 mm type B connectors on the back.
E1 ECM. Offers E1 (75 ohm) cabling using industry-standard coax cable (AT&T
735A equivalent). The E1 ECM has male Mini-SMB connectors on the front and two
2 mm type B connectors on the back.

DS1 and E1 ECM Placement
DS1 and E1 The DS1/E1 and E1 ECMs plug into the main backplane 2 mm connectors of any valid
ECM odd or even slot. The 2-slot DS1/E1 ECM design provides direct cable access to one
Placement (n+1) or two (either n and n+1 or n and n+2) cards (depending on the protection cabling
scheme used) and occupies the width of two slots on the main backplane. The 3-slot E1
ECM design provides direct cable access to two cards (either n and n+1 or n and n+2,
depending on the protection scheme) and occupies the width of three slots (n, n+1, and
n+2) on the main backplane. Plug the ECM into the right-most (n) or center (n+1)
2 mm connectors for 2-slot ECMs, depending on the protection scheme, and the center
(n+1) 2 mm connectors for 3-slot ECMs, as seen from the rear view of the shelf.
For a graphical representation, Section 2—Network Interface Specifications,
Chapter 2—“ECM Interface Specifications,” ECM Placement at the Traverse Main
Backplane, page 2-18.
DS1 and E1 DS1 and E1 card cabling schemes are as follows:

Card Cabling • Traverse 2000 DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-24
Schemes • Traverse 1600 DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-26
• Traverse 600 DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-28
Traverse 2000 The Traverse 2000 main backplane design supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection
DS1 and E1 and unprotected cabling schemes. Both 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection groups can
Card Cabling start in any odd or even slot.
Schemes Refer to Section 12—Appendices, Appendix A—“Card Placement Planning and
Guidelines,” page 12-1 for further card placement guidelines and restrictions.
Note: The Traverse main backplane supports DS1 and E1 protected and unprotected
slots and ports simultaneously.
Table 2-10 Traverse 2000 DS1 and E1 Cabling Scheme
Total # of
Maximum Total # of Comments
Cabling ECM Type ECM
Card Type Protection Working (Front Shelf
Scheme (Connector) Slots
Groups Ports Perspective)
(In Use)
DS1 (28-port) 1:2 protection 2-slot DS1/E1 5 280 15 The center card (n+1) protects
(Telco 64) left-adjacent (n) and
right-adjacent (n+2) cards.
1:1 protection 8 224 16 Either the left-adjacent (n) or

right-adjacent (n+2) card from
the protecting card (n+1) is the
working card.
Unprotected N/A 448 16 The DS1/E1 ECM provides

direct cable access to both cards
(n and n+1).

Chapter 3 DS1 and E1 Interface Cabling Specifications
Traverse 2000 DS1 and E1 Card Cabling Schemes
Table 2-10 Traverse 2000 DS1 and E1 Cabling Scheme (continued)
Total # of
Maximum Total # of Comments
Cabling ECM Type ECM
Card Type Protection Working (Front Shelf
Scheme (Connector) Slots
Groups Ports Perspective)
(In Use)
E1 (21-port) 1:2 protection 2-slot DS1/E1 5 210 15 The center card (n+1) protects
(Telco 64) the left-adjacent (n) and
right-adjacent (n+2) cards.
3-slot E1
(Mini-SMB)
1:1 protection 2-slot DS1/E1 8 168 16 Either the left-adjacent (n) or

(Telco 64) right-adjacent (n+2) card from
the protecting (n+1) card is the
working card.
3-slot E1 5 105 10 Either the left-adjacent (n) or

(Mini-SMB) right-adjacent (n+2) card from
the protecting card is the
working card. The remaining
adjacent slot is open in this
configuration. Do one of the
following:
• Leave open slot for future
upgrade to 1:2 protection.
• Place an optic card in the
open slot.
Unprotected 2-slot DS1/E1 N/A 336 16 DS1/E1 ECM provides direct

(Telco 64) cable access to both cards (n and
n+1).
3-slot E1 210 10 E1 ECMs provide direct cable

(Mini-SMB) access to only the center (n+1)
and left-most (n) cards, so place
an optic card in the right-most
(n+2) card position.

Traverse 1600 The Traverse main backplane design supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection and
DS1 and E1 unprotected cabling schemes. Both 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection groups can start in
Card Cabling any odd or even slot.
Note: The Traverse main backplanes support DS1 and E1 protected and unprotected
Total # Total #
Maximum Comments
Cabling ECM of of ECM
Card Type Protection (Front Shelf
Scheme Type Working Slots
Groups Perspective)
Ports (In Use)
DS1 (28-port) 1:2 protection 2-slot 4 224 12 The center card (n+1) protects
DS1/E1 left-adjacent (n) and
(Telco 64) right-adjacent (n+2) cards.

working card.
Unprotected N/A 336 12 DS1/E1 ECM provides direct

cable access to both cards (n and
n+1).
E1 (21-port) 1:2 protection 2-slot 4 168 12 The center card (n+1) protects
DS1/E1 the left-adjacent (n) and
3-slot E1
(Mini-SMB)
1:1 protection 2-slot 6 126 12 Either the left-adjacent (n) or

DS1/E1 right-adjacent (n+2) card from
(Telco 64) the protecting (n+1) card is the
working card.

(Mini-SMB) right-adjacent (n+2) card from
the protecting card is the
following:
open slot.

Total # Total #
Maximum Comments
Groups Perspective)
Ports (In Use)
E1 (21-port) Unprotected 2-slot N/A 252 12 DS1/E1 ECM provides direct

(continued) DS1/E1 cable access to both cards (n and
(Telco 64) n+1).
3-slot E1 168 8 E1 ECMs provide direct cable

(Mini-SMB) access to only the center (n+1)
and left-most (n) cards, so place

Traverse 600 The Traverse main backplane design supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection and
DS1 and E1 unprotected cabling schemes. Both 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection groups can start in
Card Cabling any odd or even slot.
Note: The Traverse main backplanes support DS1 and E1 protected and unprotected
Total # Total #
Maximum Comments
Groups Perspective)
Ports (In Use)
DS1 (28-port) 1:2 protection 2-slot 1 56 3 The center card (n+1) protects
DS1/E1 left-adjacent (n) and

working card.
Unprotected N/A 112 4 DS1/E1 ECM provides direct

cable access to both cards (n and
n+1).
E1 (21-port) 1:2 protection 2-slot 1 42 3 The center card (n+1) protects

DS1/E1 the left-adjacent (n) and
3-slot E1 1 42 3
(Mini-SM
B)
1:1 protection 2-slot 2 42 4 Either the left-adjacent (n) or

DS1/E1 right-adjacent (n+2) card from
(Telco 64) the protecting (n+1) card is the
working card.

(Mini-SM right-adjacent (n+2) card from
B) the protecting card is the
following:
open slot.

DS1/E1 ECM Mapping
Total # Total #
Maximum Comments
Groups Perspective)
Ports (In Use)
E1 (21-port) Unprotected 2-slot N/A 84 4 DS1/E1 ECM provides direct

(continued) DS1/E1 cable access to both cards (n and
(Telco 64) n+1).
3-slot E1 N/A 42 2 E1 ECMs provide direct cable

(Mini-SM access to only the center (n+1)
B) and left-most (n) cards, so place
DS1/E1 ECM The DS1/E1 ECM supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection and unprotected cabling
Mapping schemes. The 2-slot DS1/E1 ECM provides direct cable access to one (n+1) or two (n
and n+1 or n and n+2) cards (depending on the protection scheme) and occupies the
width of two slots on the main backplane.
1:1 protection
The following graphic shows the DS1/E1 ECM for 1:1 equipment protection cabling.
Input (I) Connector for
DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+1
Top 2 (I and O)
Output (O) Connector for Connectors are used
DS1 Ports 1–28 for 1:1 Protection
or E1 Ports 1-21 Cabling
of Slot n+1
Note: Plug the DS1/E1

ECM into Slot n 2 mm
main backplane
connectors
Figure 2-10 DS1/E1 ECM—1:1 Protection Connectors

DS1/E1 ECM Mapping
1:2 protection
The following graphic shows the DS1/E1 ECM for 1:2 equipment protection cabling.

DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+2
Output (O) Connector for

DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+2
Top and Bottom

4 (2-I and 2-O)
Connectors are used for
1:2 Protection Cabling

DS1 Ports 1–28
E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n

Note: Plug the DS1/E1 DS1 Ports 1–28
ECM into Slot n+1 E1 Ports 1-21
2 mm main backplane of Slot n
connectors
Unprotected
The following graphic shows the DS1/E1 ECM for unprotected cabling.

DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+1

DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+1
Top and Bottom

4 (2-I and 2-O)
Unprotected Cabling

DS1 Ports 1–28
E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n

Note: Plug the DS1/E1 DS1 Ports 1–28
ECM into Slot n 2 mm E1 Ports 1-21
main backplane of Slot n
connectors
Figure 2-12 DS1/E1 ECM—Unprotected Connectors

DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes (VT Mapped)
DS1/E1 ECM DS1/E1 ECM connector pinouts and cable color codes are as follows:
Connector • DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes (VT Mapped),
Pinouts and page 2-31
Cable Color • DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes (DS3 Mapped—
Codes G.747), page 2-32
DS1/E1 ECM The following table provides standard VT mapped DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 connector
Connector pinouts and DS1 and E1 cable color codes for cable one (Input) and two (Output)
Pinouts and required for each working card.
Cable Color There are four Telco 64 connectors on an ECM. The top two connectors are used for
Codes (VT 1:1 protection cabling. All four connectors are used for 1:2 protection and unprotected
Mapped) cabling. Refer to DS1/E1 ECM Mapping for DS1/E1 ECM layout.

Cable Color Codes (VT Mapped, DS1 and E1 Cabling)
Tip Ring
DS1 and E1 Cards Telco 64 Cable Telco 64 Cable
Pins 33–60 Color Code Pins 1–28 Color Code
Port 1/Channel 1/Pair 1 33 White/Blue 1 Blue/White
Port 2/ Channel 2/Pair 2 34 White/Orange 2 Orange/White
Port 3/ Channel 3/Pair 3 35 White/Green 3 Green/White
Port 4/ Channel 4/Pair 4 36 White/Brown 4 Brown/White
Port 5/Channel 5/Pair 5 37 White/Slate 5 Slate/White
Port 6/Channel 6/Pair 6 38 Red/Blue 6 Blue/Red
Port 7/Channel 7/Pair 7 39 Red/Orange 7 Orange/Red
Port 8/Channel 8/Pair 8 40 Red/Green 8 Green/Red
Port 9/Channel 9/Pair 9 41 Red/Brown 9 Brown/Red
Port 10/Channel 10/Pair 10 42 Red/Slate 10 Slate/Red
Port 11/Channel 11/Pair 11 43 Black/Blue 11 Blue/Black
Port 12/Channel 12/Pair 12 44 Black/Orange 12 Orange/Black
Port 13/Channel 13/Pair 13 45 Black/Green 13 Green/Black
Port 14/Channel 14/Pair 14 46 Black/Brown 14 Brown/Black
Port 15/Channel 15/Pair 15 47 Black/Slate 15 Slate/Black
Port 16/Channel 16/Pair 16 48 Yellow/Blue 16 Blue/Yellow
Port 17/Channel 17/Pair 17 49 Yellow/Orange 17 Orange/Yellow
Port 18/Channel 18/Pair 17 50 Yellow/Green 18 Green/Yellow
Port 19/Channel 19/Pair 19 51 Yellow/Brown 19 Brown/Yellow
Port 20/Channel 20/Pair 20 52 Yellow/Slate 20 Slate/Yellow
Port 21/Channel 21/Pair 21 53 Violet/Blue 21 Blue/Violet
DS1 Only (below)
Port 22/Channel 22/Pair 22 54 Violet/Orange 22 Orange/Violet
Port 23/Channel 23/Pair 23 55 Violet/Green 23 Green/Violet
Port 24/Channel 24/Pair 24 56 Violet/Brown 24 Brown/Violet
Port 25/Channel 25/Pair 25 57 Violet/Slate 25 Slate/Violet

DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes (DS3 Mapped— G.747)

Cable Color Codes (VT Mapped, DS1 and E1 Cabling) (continued)
Tip Ring
DS1 and E1 Cards
Telco 64 Cable Telco 64 Cable
Port 27/Channel 27/Pair 27 59 White/Orange 27 Orange/White
Port 28/Channel 28/Pair 28 60 White/Green 28 Green/White
DS1/E1 ECM (SDH network only) The following table provides DS3 mapped (ITU-T G.747) DS1/E1
Connector ECM Telco 64 connector pinouts and E1 cable color codes for cable one (Input) and
Pinouts and two (Output) required for each card.
Cable Color There are four Telco 64 connectors on an ECM. The top two connectors are used for
Codes (DS3 1:1 protection cabling. All four connectors are used for 1:2 protection and unprotected
Mapped— cabling. Refer to DS1/E1 ECM Mapping for DS1/E1 ECM layout.
G.747)
Cable Color Codes (DS3 Mapped—G.747, E1 Cabling Only)
Tip Ring
E1 Cards Telco 64 Cable Telco 64 Cable
Port 2/ Channel 2/Pair 2 34 White/Orange 2 Orange/White
Port 3/ Channel 3/Pair 3 35 White/Green 3 Green/White
Port 4/ Channel 4/Pair 4 37 White/Slate 5 Slate/White
Port 5/Channel 5/Pair 5 38 Red/Blue 6 Blue/Red
Port 6/Channel 6/Pair 6 39 Red/Orange 7 Orange/Red
Port 7/Channel 7/Pair 7 41 Red/Brown 9 Brown/Red
Port 8/Channel 8/Pair 8 42 Red/Slate 10 Slate/Red
Port 9/Channel 9/Pair 9 43 Black/Blue 11 Blue/Black
Port 10/Channel 10/Pair 10 45 Black/Green 13 Green/Black
Port 11/Channel 11/Pair 11 46 Black/Brown 14 Brown/Black
Port 12/Channel 12/Pair 12 47 Black/Slate 15 Slate/Black
Port 13/Channel 13/Pair 13 49 Yellow/Orange 17 Orange/Yellow
Port 14/Channel 14/Pair 14 50 Yellow/Green 18 Green/Yellow
Port 15/Channel 15/Pair 15 51 Yellow/Brown 19 Brown/Yellow
Port 16/Channel 16/Pair 16 53 Violet/Blue 21 Blue/Violet
Port 17/Channel 17/Pair 17 54 Violet/Orange 22 Orange/Violet
Port 18/Channel 18/Pair 17 55 Violet/Green 23 Green/Violet
Port 19/Channel 19/Pair 19 57 Violet/Slate 25 Slate/Violet
Port 21/Channel 21/Pair 21 59 White/Orange 27 Orange/White

E1 ECM Mapping
E1 ECM The 3-slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM provides direct cable access to two cards (n
Mapping and n+2) and occupies the width of three adjacent slots (n, n+1, and n+2) on the main
backplane. The following graphic shows the 3-slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM and
input (I) and output (O) Mini-SMB connector locations to support two 24-port
DS3/E3/EC-1 cards and 1:2 protection.
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Ports 1–21 of Slot n+2
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Ports 1–21 of Slot n
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Figure 2-13 3-Slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping

E1 ECM Mapping

Chapter 4
Introduction The Traverse main backplane supports cabling and 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection
switching for 12-port DS3/EC-1 Transmux, 24-port DS3/EC-1 Universal Transmux
(UTMX-24), 24-port DS3/EC-1 Universal Transmux (UTMX-48), and 12- or 24-port
DS3/E3/EC-1 CC cards using DS3/E3 electrical connector modules (ECM). This
protection is available for systems commissioned as ADM or DCS-IO.
Important: The Traverse system supports 1:2 equipment protection only

for the above listed cards. 1:2 equipment protection for legacy or a mix of
the legacy and new cards is unavailable.
In addition to the electrical equipment protection, the DS3/EC-1 Transmux card

supports 1:N equipment protection for high-density optical transmux applications
(STS1-TMX mode), where N=1 to 12 in a Traverse 2000. One card protects all
remaining adjacent cards. This application has no ECM requirement. (SONET network
only.)
For UTMX-24 and UTMX-48 cards, the Traverse also supports 1:4 equipment
protection when all the facilities (both physical and logical) are configured in
STS1-TMX mode. This protection is available for systems commissioned as DCS-IO.
One card protects up to four associated working cards. This application has no ECM
requirement. (SONET network only.)
• DS3/E3 ECM Placement, page 2-36
• DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-36
• DS3/E3 ECM Mapping, page 2-40
Chapter 4—“DS3 and E3 Cabling Procedures,” page 8-27.
For general ECM information, see Section 2—Network Interface Specifications,
Chapter 2—“ECM Interface Specifications,” page 2-15.

DS3/E3 ECM Placement
DS3/E3 ECM DS3/E3 ECMs allow DS3 and E3 cabling using industry-standard coax cable (AT&T
Placement 734A or 735A equivalent, depending on the card type) with male 75 ohm BNC or
Mini-SMB connectors on the front and two 2 mm type B connectors on the back.
The DS3/E3 ECM plugs into the main backplane 2 mm connectors of any valid odd or
even slot. The 2-slot DS3/E3 ECM design provides direct cable access to one card
(n+1) and occupies the width of two slots (n and n+1) on the main backplane. The
3-slot DS3/E3 ECM design provides direct cable access to two cards (either n and n+1
or n and n+2, depending on the protection scheme) and occupies the width of three slots
(n, n+1, and n+2) on the main backplane. Plug the ECM into the right-most (n) 2 mm
connectors for 2-slot ECMs, depending on the protection scheme, and the center (n+1)
2 mm connectors for 3-slot ECMs, as seen from the rear view of the shelf.
DS3/E3 Card DS3/E3 card cabling schemes are as follows:

Cabling • Traverse 2000 DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-36
Schemes • Traverse 1600 DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-38
• Traverse 600 DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes, page 2-39
DS3/E3 Card and unprotected cabling schemes. Both 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection groups can
Cabling start in any odd or even slot.
Schemes

Traverse 2000 DS3/E3 Card Cabling Schemes
Refer to Section 12—Appendices, Appendix A—“Card Placement Planning and

Table 2-15 Traverse 2000 DS3 Card Cabling Schemes
Maximum Total # of Total #

Cabling ECM Protection Working of ECM Comments
Card Type
Scheme Type Groups Ports Slots (Front Shelf Perspective)
(PG) (electrical) (In Use)
12-port 1:2 protection 3-slot 5 120 15 The center card protects left- (n) and
DS3/E3/EC-1, DS3/E3 right-adjacent (n+2) cards.
12-port (24-port
DS3/EC-1 1:1 protection BNC) 60 10 Either the left-adjacent (n) or
Transmux right-adjacent (n+2) slot from the
protection slot is the working slot. The
remaining adjacent slot is open in this
configuration. Do one of the following:
• Leave open slot for future upgrade to
1:2 protection.
• Place an optic card in the open slot.
2-slot 8 96 16 Either the left-adjacent (n) or

DS3/E3 right-adjacent (n+2) slot from the
(12-port protection slot is the working slot.
BNC)
Unprotected 3-slot N/A 120 10 3-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

DS3/E3 cable access to only the center (n+1) and
(24-port right-most (n+2) cards so place an optic
BNC) card in the left (n) slot.
2-slot 96 8 2-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

DS3/E3 cable access to only the right-most (n+1)
(12-port card so place an optic card in the
BNC) left-most (n) slot.
24-port 1:2 protection 3-slot 5 240 15 The center (n+1) card protects the left-
DS3/E3/EC-1, DS3/E3 (n) and right-adjacent (n+2) cards.
UTMX-24, (48-port
UTMX-48 1:1 protection Mini- 120 10 Either the left- (n) or right-adjacent
SMB) (n+2) slot from the protection slot is the
working slot. The remaining adjacent
slot is open in this configuration. Do one
of the following:
1:2 protection.
Unprotected N/A 240 3-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

cable access to only the center (n+1) and
right-most (n+2) cards, so place an optic
card in the left (n) slot.


Card Type
12-port 1:2 protection 3-slot 4 96 12 The center (n+1) card protects left- (n)
DS3/E3/EC-1, DS3/E3 and right-adjacent (n+2) cards.
12-port (24-port
DS3/EC-1 1:1 protection BNC) 48 8 Either the left-adjacent (n) or
Transmux right-adjacent (n+2) slot from the
protection slot is the working slot. The
remaining adjacent slot is open in this
configuration. Do one of the following:
1:2 protection.
2-slot 6 72 12 Either the left- (n) or right-adjacent

DS3/E3 (n+2) slot from the protection slot is the
(12-port working slot.
BNC)

(24-port right-most (n+2) cards, so place an optic

(12-port card, so place an optic card in the
UTMX-24, (48-port
of the following:
1:2 protection.



Card Type
12-port (24-port
DS3/EC-1 1:1 protection BNC) 12 2 Either the left- (n) or right-adjacent
Transmux (n+2) slot from the protection slot is the
of the following:
1:2 protection.
2-slot 2 24 4 Either the left- (n) or right-adjacent

DS3/E3 (n+2) slot from the protection slot is the
(12-port working slot.
BNC)

(24-port right-most (n+2) cards, so place an optic

(12-port card, so place an optic card in the
UTMX-24, (48-port
of the following:
1:2 protection.


DS3/E3 ECM Mapping
DS3/E3 ECM Connector mapping for the three DS3/E3 ECM types is as follows:
Mapping • 2-Slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM Mapping, page 2-40
• 3-Slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM Mapping, page 2-41
• 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping, page 2-42
2-Slot DS3/E3 The 2-slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM provides direct cable access to one card (n+1)
(12-port BNC) and occupies the width of two slots (n and n+1) on the main backplane. The following
ECM Mapping graphic shows the 2-slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM and input (I) and output (O)
BNC connector locations to support one 12-port DS3/E3/EC-1 or 12-port DS3/EC-1
Transmux card and 1:1 protection.
Input (I) Output (O)

BNC Connectors for BNC Connectors for
Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1 Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1
Figure 2-14 2-Slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM Mapping

3-Slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM Mapping
3-Slot DS3/E3 The 3-slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM provides direct cable access to two cards (n
(24-port BNC) and n+2) and occupies the width of three slots (n, n+1, and n+2) on the main backplane.
ECM Mapping The following graphic shows the 3-slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM and input (I) and
output (O) BNC connector locations to support two 12-port DS3/E3/EC-1 cards and
1:2 protection.
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Figure 2-15 3-Slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM Mapping

3-Slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping
3-Slot DS3/E3 The 3-slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM provides direct cable access to two cards
(48-port (n and n+2) and occupies the width of three adjacent slots (n, n+1, and n+2) on the
Mini-SMB) main backplane. The following graphic shows the 3-slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB)
ECM Mapping ECM and input (I) and output (O) Mini-SMB connector locations to support two
24-port DS3/E3/EC-1, UTMX-24, and UTMX-48 (24 electrical port) cards and 1:2
protection.
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Figure 2-16 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping

Chapter 5
Ethernet (Electrical) Interface Cabling
Specifications
Introduction The Traverse system supports electrical interface cabling for protected and unprotected
next-generation Ethernet (NGE) Carrier Ethernet Protection (CEP) NGE Plus, and
Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) cards.
Important: For optical Ethernet specifications, cabling, and protection

(for EoPDH, NGE, NGE Plus, 10GbE, and GbE-10 cards), see
Chapter 1—“Fiber Optic Interface Cabling Specifications,” page 2-1.
Note: The term NGE is used to refer to both the NGE and NGE Plus cards in this
document, unless otherwise noted.
• NGE and EoPDH Card Protection Description, page 2-44
• NGE and EoPDH Card Types, page 2-44
• Ethernet Protection ECM Placement, page 2-45
• Ethernet Protection ECM for Electrical 1:1 Protection, page 2-45
• ECM Pinout and Cable Color Code for Electrical NGE and EoPDH Ports,
page 2-46
• Ethernet Protection ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH Cards, page 2-50
• 10/100BaseT ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH Cards, page 2-51
For electrical Ethernet cabling procedures, see Section 8—Network Interface Cabling
Procedures, Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures,” page 8-37.
For general electrical connector card (ECM) information, see Section 2—Network
Interface Specifications, Chapter 2—“ECM Interface Specifications,” page 2-15.


NGE and EoPDH Card Protection Description
NGE and The Traverse system supports electrical interface cabling for protected and unprotected
EoPDH Card NGE, NGE Plus, and EoPDH cards.
Protection Note: For specifications about 1:1 optical equipment protection, see
Description Chapter 1—“Fiber Optic Interface Cabling Specifications,” Optical GbE Port
Protection, page 2-8.
Electrical protection is available for like cards and on both electrical Gigabit (GbE TX)
and Fast Ethernet (10/100BaseTX) port interfaces.
• 1:1 electrical equipment protection for the NGE, NGE Plus, and EoPDH cards
using the 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM
• Unprotected electrical equipment scheme for the NGE, NGE Plus, and EoPDH
cards using either the 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM or the 2-slot (legacy)
10/100BaseTX (GbE-TX and 10/100BaseTX) ECM
• Carrier Ethernet Protection (CEP) is available for the NGE Plus and EoPDH cards
using the 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM. CEP is a unique type of protection
switching. A CEP Pair (CEPP) is a logical pairing of two NGE Plus or EoPDH
cards operating as one Ethernet switch to aggregate the traffic from twice the
number of physical ports (40 physical Ethernet ports) as that of a single card.
While a CEPP can use all of the physical Ethernet ports of two cards, it uses the 64
EOS ports of the working card only for transport.
NGE Plus or EoPDH cards in a CEPP protection group cannot simultaneously be
in a 1:1 equipment protection group; these protection groups are mutually
exclusive. NGE Plus or EoPDH cards not in a CEPP function exactly as an NGE
card.
Turin recommends adjacent card configuration for the CEPP, although the cards
can be non-adjacent. To create CEPP protection groups, see the Traverse
Provisioning Guide, Section 3—Creating Protection Groups,
Chapter 1—“Overview of Protection Groups,” page 3-2.
NGE and Turin Networks offers these single-slot GbE/FE interface combination cards:
EoPDH Card
NGE
Types
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE LX or SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
• 2-port GbE SX plus 2-port GbE CWDM (40 km) plus 16-port
10/100BaseT
• 4-port GbE LX or SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
• 4-port GbE CWDM (40 km) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
NGE Plus
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE LX or SX plus 16-port 10/100TX with
Carrier Ethernet Protection (CEP)
• 4-port GbE LX or SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX with CEP
EoPDH
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE LX or SX plus 16-port 10/100TX with
Carrier Ethernet Protection (CEP) and EoPDH
• 4-port GbE LX or SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX with CEP and EoPDH

Chapter 5 Ethernet (Electrical) Interface Cabling Specifications
Ethernet Protection ECM for Electrical 1:1 Protection
Ethernet The Ethernet Protection ECM allows NGE, NGE Plus, and EoPDH electrical port
Protection cabling using Category 5 twisted-pair copper cable with Telco 50 connectors. The
ECM ECM has two Telco 50 connectors on the front and two 2 mm type B connectors on the
Placement back.
The Ethernet Protection ECM plugs into the main backplane two 2 mm connectors of
any valid odd or even slot. The 2-slot design provides direct cable access to one card
(n+1 of the pair) and occupies the width of two slots (n and n+1) on the backplane. Plug
the ECM into the 2 mm connectors of the right-most slot (n) as seen from the rear view
of the shelf.
Ethernet The Ethernet Protection ECM supports the 1:1 electrical equipment protection cabling
Protection for the NGE, NGE Plus, or EoPDH card GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX interface ports.1
ECM for The 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM provides direct cable access to one card (n+1) and
Electrical 1:1 occupies the width of two slots (n and n+1) on the main backplane.
Protection
Port Mapping Scheme
Port mapping schemes vary depending on the Ethernet card type:
• 4-port GbE (LX, SX, or CWDM) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
• 4-port GbE (LX or SX) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX with CEP
• 4-port GbE (LX or SX) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX with CEP and EoPDH
• 2-port GbE SX plus 2-port GbE CWDM (40 km) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Ports 1 through 4 on these cards are optical ports. Ports 5 through 20 are 10/100
electrical interface ports. Connect the 16 electrical interface ports as follows:
– Ports 5 through 8 connect to the first Telco 50 connector (ECM PORTS 9–12)
– Ports 9 through 20 connect to the second Telco 50 connector (ECM PORTS
13–24)
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE (LX or SX) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE (LX or SX) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX with CEP
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE (LX or SX) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX with CEP
and EoPDH
Ports 3 and 4 on these cards are optical ports. Ports 1and 2 are GbE TX electrical
interface ports. Ports 5 through 20 are 10/100 electrical interface ports. Connect
the 2 GbE TX and 16 10/100 electrical interface ports as follows:
– Ports 1and 2 connect to the first Telco 50 connector (ECM PORTS 1–2)
– Ports 5 through 8 connect to the first Telco 50 connector (ECM PORTS 9–12)
– Ports 9 through 20 connect to the second Telco 50 connector (ECM PORTS
13–24)
1
For NGE card optical port cabling information, refer to Chapter 1—“Fiber Optic Interface Cabling
Specifications,” page 2-1.

ECM Pinout and Cable Color Code for Electrical NGE and EoPDH Ports
Port to ECM Mapping

The following graphic shows the Ethernet Protection ECM for the electrical 2-port
GbE TX-based and 16-port 10/100BaseTX-based combo NGE, NGE Plus, or EoPDH
cards along with Telco 50 Connector 1 (Ports 1-2 and 9-12) and Telco 50 Connector 2
(Ports 13 through 24) for slots n and n+1.
Connector 1
ECM Ports 1-2
(for GbE TX) and
ECM Ports 9-12
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n+1)
Top 2 Connectors are
Connector 2 used for 1:1 Protection
ECM Ports 13-24 Cabling
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n+1)
Note: Plug the ECM

into Slot n 2 mm main
backplane connectors
Figure 2-17 Ethernet Protection ECM—1:1 Protection Connectors

T
ECM Pinout The following tables (Tables 2-18 and 2-19) provide Ethernet ECM Telco 50 connector
and Cable and patch panel pinouts, and color codes for cable one and two required for the
Color Code for electrical ports on NGE, NGE Plus, or EoPDH cards.
Electrical NGE There are two Telco 50 connectors on the ECM. Refer to Ethernet Protection ECM
and EoPDH for Electrical 1:1 Protection, page 2-45 for ECM layout.
Ports
Important: Each NGE, NGE Plus, or EoPDH card contains optical ports
as well as electrical interface ports. Therefore, card port numbers (#s) and
patch panel port numbers are not straight across. These tables provide
signal and mapping information—card port numbers, ECM and Patch
Panel port numbers, Telco 50 pin numbers, cable color code, RJ-45 pin
numbers.
Note: The RJ45 pinout matches the EIA/TIA-568A standard.


Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One)
Cable One
ECM Telco 50
NGE Card Port # Connector and Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 RJ-45 Signal
(Type) Patch Panel Pin # Color Code Pin # Color Code (n=card port #)
Port #
26 White/Blue 1 White/Green BID_A+_P1

1 Blue/White 2 Green/White BID_A–_P1
28 White/Green 3 White/Orange BID_B+_P1
Port 1 3 Green/White 6 Orange/White BID_B–_P1
Port 1
(GbE BaseT) 30 White/Slate 4 Blue/White BID_C+_P1
5 Slate/White 5 White/Blue BID_C–_P1
32 Red/Orange 7 White/Brown BID_D+_P1
7 Orange/Red 8 Brown/White BID_D–_P1
34 Red/Brown 1 White/Green BID_A+_P2
9 Brown/Red 2 Green/White BID_A–_P2
36 Black/Blue 3 White/Orange BID_B+_P2
Port 2 11 Blue/Black 6 Orange/White BID_B–_P2
Port 2
(GbE BaseT) 38 Black/Green 4 Blue/White BID_C+_P2
13 Green/Black 5 White/Blue BID_C–_P2
40 Black/Slate 7 White/Brown BID_D+_P2
15 Slate/Black 8 Brown/White BID_D–_P2
27 White/Orange 1 White/Green TX+_n
2 Orange/White 2 Green/White TX–_n
Unused Unused
35 Red/Slate 3 White/Orange RX+_n
10 Slate/Red 6 Orange/White RX–_n
31 Red/Blue 1 White/Green TX+_n
6 Blue/Red 2 Green/White TX–_n
Unused Unused
37 Black/Orange 3 White/Orange RX+_n
12 Orange/Black 6 Orange/White RX–_n
29 White/Brown 1 White/Green TX+_n
4 Brown/White 2 Green/White TX–_n
Unused Unused
39 Black/Brown 3 White/Orange RX+_n
14 Brown/Black 6 Orange/White RX–_n
33 Red/Green 1 White/Green TX+_n
8 Green/Red 2 Green/White TX–_n
Unused Unused
41 Yellow/Blue 3 White/Orange RX+_n
16 Blue/Yellow 6 Orange/White RX–_n


Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One) (continued)
Cable One
ECM Telco 50
NGE Card Port # Connector and Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 RJ-45 Signal
(Type) Patch Panel Pin # Color Code Pin # Color Code (n=card port #)
Port #
42 Yellow/Orange 1 White/Green TX+_P5

Port 5 17 Orange/Yellow 2 Green/White TX–_P5
Port 9
(10/100) 43 Yellow/Green 3 White/Orange RX+_P5
18 Green/Yellow 6 Orange/White RX–_P5
44 Yellow/Brown 1 White/Green TX+_P6
Port 6 19 Brown/Yellow 2 Green/White TX–_P6
Port 10
(10/100) 45 Yellow/Slate 3 White/Orange RX+_P6
20 Slate/Yellow 6 Orange/White RX–_P6
46 Violet/Blue 1 White/Green TX+_P7
Port 7 21 Blue/Violet 2 Green/White TX–_P7
Port 11
(10/100) 47 Violet/Orange 3 White/Orange RX+_P7
22 Orange/Violet 6 Orange/White RX–_P7
48 Violet/Green 1 White/Green TX+_P8
Port 8 23 Green/Violet 2 Green/White TX–_P8
Port 12
(10/100) 49 Violet/Brown 3 White/Orange RX+_P8
24 Brown/Violet 6 Orange/White RX–_P8

Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two)
Cable Two
ECM Telco 50
10/100
BaseTX Connector and Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 RJ-45
Signal
Card Patch Panel Pin # Color Code Pin # Color Code
Port
26 White/Blue 1 White/Green TX+_P9

Port 9 1 Blue/White 2 Green/White TX–_P9
Port 13
(10/100) 27 White/Orange 3 White/Orange RX+_P9
2 Orange/White 6 Orange/White RX–_P9
28 White/Green 1 White/Green TX+_P10
Port 10 3 Green/White 2 Green/White TX–_P10
Port 14
(10/100) 29 White/Brown 3 White/Orange RX+_P10
4 Brown/White 6 Orange/White RX–_P10


Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two) (continued)
Cable Two
10/100 ECM Telco 50

BaseTX Connector and Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 RJ-45 Signal
Port
30 White/Slate 1 White/Green TX+_P11

Port 11 5 Slate/White 2 Green/White TX–_P11
Port 15
(10/100) 31 Red/Blue 3 White/Orange RX+_P11
6 Blue/Red 6 Orange/White RX–_P11
32 Red/Orange 1 White/Green TX+_P12
Port 12 7 Orange/Red 2 Green/White TX–_P12
Port 16
(10/100) 33 Red/Green 3 White/Orange RX+_P12
8 Green/Red 6 Orange/White RX–_P12
34 Red/Brown 1 White/Green TX+_P13
Port 13 9 Brown/Red 2 Green/White TX–_P13
Port 17
(10/100) 35 Red/Slate 3 White/Orange RX+_P13
10 Slate/Red 6 Orange/White RX–_P13
36 Black/Blue 1 White/Green TX+_P14
Port 14 11 Blue/Black 2 Green/White TX–_P14
Port 18
(10/100) 37 Black/Orange 3 White/Orange RX+_P14
12 Orange/Black 6 Orange/White RX–_P14
38 Black/Green 1 White/Green TX+_P15
Port 15 13 Green/Black 2 Green/White TX–_P15
Port 19
(10/100) 39 Black/Brown 3 White/Orange RX+_P15
14 Brown/Black 6 Orange/White RX–_P15
40 Black/Slate 1 White/Green TX+_P16
Port 16 15 Slate/Black 2 Green/White TX–_P16
Port 20
(10/100) 41 Yellow/Blue 3 White/Orange RX+_P16
16 Blue/Yellow 6 Orange/White RX–_P16
42 Yellow/Orange 1 White/Green TX+_P17
Port 17 17 Orange/Yellow 2 Green/White TX–_P17
Port 21
(10/100) 43 Yellow/Green 3 White/Orange RX+_P17
18 Green/Yellow 6 Orange/White RX–_P17
44 Yellow/Brown 1 White/Green TX+_P18
Port 18 19 Brown/Yellow 2 Green/White TX–_P18
Port 22
(10/100) 45 Yellow/Slate 3 White/Orange RX+_P18
20 Slate/Yellow 6 Orange/White RX–_P18
46 Violet/Blue 1 White/Green TX+_P19
Port 19 21 Blue/Violet 2 Green/White TX–_P19
Port 23
(10/100) 47 Violet/Orange 3 White/Orange RX+_P19
22 Orange/Violet 6 Orange/White RX–_P19

Ethernet Protection ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH Cards

Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two) (continued)
Cable Two
10/100 ECM Telco 50

BaseTX Connector and Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 RJ-45 Signal
Port
48 Violet/Green 1 White/Green TX+_P20

Port 20 23 Green/Violet 2 Green/White TX–_P20
Port 24
(10/100) 49 Violet/Brown 3 White/Orange RX+_P20
24 Brown/Violet 6 Orange/White RX–_P20
Ethernet The Ethernet Protection ECM also supports an unprotected scheme for NGE, NGE
Protection Plus, or EoPDH card GbE-TX and 10/100BaseTX ports. Although, Turin recommends
ECM for you use the 10/100BaseT ECM (10/100BaseT ECM for Unprotected NGE and
Unprotected EoPDH Cards, page 2-51) for greater port capacity. The 2-slot Ethernet Protection
NGE and ECM provides direct cable access to one card (n+1) and occupies the width of two slots
(n and n+1) on the main backplane. See Port Mapping Scheme, page 2-45 and ECM
EoPDH Cards
Pinout and Cable Color Code for Electrical NGE and EoPDH Ports, page 2-46.
This graphic shows the Ethernet Protection ECM for the electrical 2-port GbE
TX-based and 16-port 10/100BaseTX-based combo cards along with Telco 50
connector 1 (Ports 1-2 and 9-12) and Telco 50 connector 2 (Ports 13 through 24) for
slot n+1.
Connector 1
ECM Ports 1-2
(for GbE TX) and
ECM Ports 9-12
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n+1)
Connector 2
ECM Ports 13-24
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n+1)
Note: Plug the ECM

into Slot n 2 mm main
backplane connectors
Figure 2-18 Ethernet Protection ECM—Unprotected Connectors

10/100BaseT ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH Cards
10/100BaseT The 10/100BaseT ECM supports an unprotected scheme for the NGE, NGE Plus, or
ECM for EoPDH card GbE-TX and 10/100BaseTX ports. See Port Mapping Scheme,
Unprotected page 2-45 and ECM Pinout and Cable Color Code for Electrical NGE and EoPDH
NGE and Ports, page 2-46.
EoPDH Cards The following graphic shows the 10/100BaseT ECM for NGE, NGE Plus, or EoPDH
cards with Telco 50 connector 1 (Ports 1 through 2 and 9 through 12) and Telco 50
connector 2 (Ports 13 through 24) for slots n and n+1.
Connector 1
ECM Ports 1-2
(for GbE TX) and
ECM Ports 9-12
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n+1)
Connector 2
ECM Ports 13-24
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n+1)
Top and Bottom

Unprotected Cabling
Connector 1
ECM Ports 1-2
(for GbE TX) and
ECM Ports 9-12
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n)
Connector 2
ECM Ports 13-24
(for 10/100 TX)
(Slot n)
Figure 2-19 10/100BaseT ECM with Ethernet

10/100BaseT ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH Cards

S ECTION 3 A LARM , T IMING , AND M ANAGEMENT
I NTERFACE S PECIFICATIONS
Contents
Chapter 1
Alarm Interface Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Alarm Interface Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Normally-open Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Fail-safe Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS) Protocol Interface. . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Environmental Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Alarm Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Environmental Alarm Input Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Chapter 2
Timing Interface Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Timing Interface Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Timing Interface Input and Output Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Timing Interface Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Preset Timing Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
T1 and CC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
E1 and 2MHz Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Optional Balun Timing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Chapter 3
Management Interface Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
GCM Ethernet and RS-232 DCE Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Backplane DCN Ethernet and RS-232 DTE Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Backplane DCN Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Backplane RS-232 DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
List of Figures
Figure 3-1 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-2 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM Connector . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-4 Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 3 Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface
Specifications
Figure 3-5 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-6 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-7 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3—T1 and CC . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-8 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3—E1 and 2MHz . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-9 Standalone 75/120 ohm Balun Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-10 Traverse System Backplane Cover with 75/120 ohm Baluns . . . . 3-11
List of Tables
Table 3-1 Visual and Audible System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-2 Fail-safe and Alarm Cut Off Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-4 Timing Clock Reference per Traverse Node Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Table 3-5 T1 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Table 3-6 Composite Clock Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Table 3-7 GCM Ethernet (RJ-45) Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Table 3-8 GCM RS-232 DCE (DB-9) Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Table 3-9 DCN Ethernet Interface (RJ-45) Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Table 3-10 RS-232 Interface DTE (RJ-45) Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

SECTION 3ALARM, TIMING, AND MANAGEMENT INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 1
Alarm Interface Specifications

• Alarm Interface Description, page 3-1
• Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts, page 3-2
• Alarm Output Contacts, page 3-4
• Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM, page 3-5
• Environmental Alarm Input Contacts, page 3-6
Alarm Interface The General Control Module (GCM) card generates Traverse system alarm signals and
Description provides the common (COM), normally-open (NO) and normally-closed1 contacts
through individual relays. The Traverse system supports standard system critical,
major, minor; visual and audible alarms. Access to system alarm contacts is provided
via wire-wrap posts located on the Traverse 1600, Traverse 2000, and Traverse 600
main backplanes.2
Normally-open Contacts
System alarms operate by default using the COM and NO contacts. When an alarm
state occurs, the circuit between the COM and NO contacts is closed generating a
visual or audible alarm. Alarm contacts are bridged between the active and standby
GCMs. A single GCM is capable of generating and maintaining system alarms if the
standby GCM is out of service.
Fail-safe Alarm
All system alarms are masked and a fail-safe alarm is generated if both GCMs go
out-of-service. The fail-safe alarm is the only normally-closed alarm. The fail-safe
alarm is generated when GCMs are installed and operational, and then go into an
out-of-service state. The fail-safe alarm is also generated when both GCMs are
physically removed from the Traverse shelf.
1
Normally-closed contacts are not currently supported.
2
Refer to pre-Release 1.3[E] Traverse system documentation, Traverse 1600 Alarm, Timing and Ethernet
Cabling if your Traverse 1600 main backplane is the original Traverse 1600 main backplane design with
6-position terminal blocks for the alarm and timing interface.

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 3: Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface Specifications
Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts
Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS) Protocol Interface

The Traverse backplane has a TBOS interface which will support connection to remote
telemetry units in a future release.
Environmental Alarms
The Traverse backplane provides hardware support for sixteen environmental alarm
inputs. The environmental telemetry inputs and outputs are supported by the optional
Environmental Alarm Module (EAM) located on the main backplane. The EAM
provides additional system-management functions to accommodate customer-defined
alarm input/output requirements. The module is field replaceable and can be replaced
without disconnecting the alarm wiring.
Alarm Output The Traverse main backplane provide access to system alarm contacts via 0.045-inch
Wire-Wrap (1.1 mm) square wire-wrap posts on 0.200-inch (0.5 mm) centers. The following
Posts graphic shows where these wire-wrap posts are located on the Traverse main
backplane.
Traverse 2000 Rear View Traverse 600 Rear View
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
System
Alarm
Wire-Wrap
Posts
Figure 3-1 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

Chapter 1 Alarm Interface Specifications
Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides Traverse main backplane system alarm labeling and
wire-wrap post numbers. The wire-wrap posts shown in gray are used for alarm
cabling.
Note: Traverse 600 does not include ACO RTN posts.
Note: REMVIS and REMAUD are not operational.
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
13 14 15 16 17 18
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Figure 3-2 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

Alarm Output Contacts
Alarm Output The following table provides the visual and audible alarm contacts supported by the
Contacts Traverse main backplane and the wire-wrap posts for normally-open (NO) relays3.
Table 3-1 Visual and Audible System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms Audible Alarms
Critical Normally-Open Critical Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
Post 1 Post 2 n/a Post 4 Post 5 n/a
Major Normally-Open Major Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
Minor Normally-Open Minor Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
Remote Normally-Open Remote Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
The following table provides the fail-safe and alarm cut off contacts supported by the
Traverse main backplane and the wire-wrap posts for normally-closed (NC) and
common (COM) relays.
Note: Traverse 600 does not include ACO RTN posts.
Table 3-2 Fail-safe and Alarm Cut Off Wire-Wrap Posts
FAIL-SAFE Normally-Closed Alarm Cut Off (ACO) Input
NO COM NC COM ACO
n/a Post 26 Post 27 Post 28 Post 29
Important: Each set of system alarms provides common (COM),

normally-open (NO) and normally-closed (NC) contacts. All alarms,
except the fail-safe alarm, are connected using the NO and COM contacts.
Connect the fail-safe alarm using NC and COM contacts.
3
Support for normally-closed contacts is planned for a future release.

Chapter 1 Alarm Interface Specifications
Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM
Environmental The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes provide access to
Alarm environmental alarm contacts via 0.045-inch (1.1 mm) square wire-wrap posts on
Wire-Wrap 0.200-inch (0.5 mm) centers. Reporting of environmental alarm inputs and outputs
Posts and EAM requires an Environmental Alarm Module (EAM) plugged into the EAM connector.
The following graphic shows where these wire-wrap posts and the EAM connector are
located on the Traverse main backplane. If the EAM is not plugged into the main
backplane refer to the Node Operations and Maintenance Guide, Section 6—Routine
Maintenance, Chapter 1—“Routine Maintenance,” Environmental Alarm Module
Replacement (Traverse only), page 6-20 for placement instructions.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Environmental
Alarm
Wire-Wrap
Posts
Environmental
Alarm Module
(EAM)
Connector
Figure 3-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM Connector
The following graphic provides Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplane
environmental alarm labeling and wire-wrap post numbers.4 The wire-wrap posts
shown in gray are used for environmental alarm input cabling.
ENV IN ENV OUT
RTN NO C
1 9 1
2 10 2
3 11 3
4 12 4
5 13 5
6 14 6
7 15 7
8 16 8
TBOS
+ TX - + RX -
Figure 3-4 Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
4
The TBOS protocol and ENV OUT (environmental output) interfaces are planned for a future release.

Environmental Alarm Input Contacts
Environmental The following table provides the environmental alarm contacts supported by the
Alarm Input Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes. Posts 1 through 16 are supported
Contacts for environmental alarm input cabling.
Table 3-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Environmental Environmental
Input Alarms Output Alarms
# RTN # NO C
Post 1 Post 9 Post 1
TBOS
TX RX
+ - + -
Post 1 Post 2 Post 3 Post 4

Chapter 2
Timing Interface Specifications

• Timing Interface Description, page 3-7
• Timing Interface Input and Output Wire-Wrap Posts, page 3-8
• Timing Interface Contacts, page 3-9
• Preset Timing Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3, page 3-10
• Optional Balun Timing Connection, page 3-11
Timing The Traverse system supports DS1 (T1), E1, 64 KHz Composite Clock, and 2MHz
Interface Building Integrated Timing Supply—BITS (Stand-Alone Synchronization
Description Equipment—SASE)1 clock references. The General Control Module (GCM) cards
timing subsystem provides system and line timing to all cards. The timing subsystem
can recover line timing from four interfaces across multiple cards (one timing interface
per card).
Table 3-4 Timing Clock Reference per Traverse Node Type
ANSI ITU
Timing Clock
Reference
ADM DCS ADM
64 KHz composite x
DS1 (T1) x x
2 MHz x x x
E1 x
1
BITS (SASE) clock is also referred to as a Timing Signal Generator (TSG) in the central office.

Timing Interface Input and Output Wire-Wrap Posts
Timing The Traverse main backplane provides access to timing interface contacts via
Interface Input 0.200-inch (0.5 mm) spaced, 0.045-inch (1.1 mm) square wire-wrap posts. The
and Output following graphic shows where these wire-wrap posts are located on the Traverse main
Wire-Wrap backplane.
Posts 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Timing Interface
Wire-Wrap
Posts
Figure 3-5 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides Traverse main backplane timing interface labeling and
wire-wrap post numbers.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
+ 5 6 - 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
OUT OUT
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 3-6 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling

Chapter 2 Timing Interface Specifications
Timing Interface Contacts
Timing The following table provides T12 timing interface contacts supported by the Traverse
Interface main backplane.
Contacts
Table 3-5 T1 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
T1 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
Post Post
Description Description
# #
1 T1/E1_INA+ 2 T1/E1_INA-
3 T1/E1_INB+ 4 T1/E1_INB-
5 Shield 6 Shield
7 T1/E1_OUTA+ 8 T1/E1_OUTA-
9 T1/E1_OUTB+ 10 T1/E1_OUTB-
The following table provides Composite Clock (CC2M) timing interface contacts
supported by the main backplane.
Table 3-6 Composite Clock Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
Composite Clock Timing Wire-Wrap Posts
Post Post
Description Description
# #
1 CC2M_INA+ 2 CC2M_INA-
3 CC2M_INB+ 4 CC2M_INB-
5 Shield 6 Shield
7 CC2M_OUTA+ 8 CC2M_OUTA-
9 CC2M_OUTB+ 10 CC2M_OUTB-
2
DS1 timing inputs are labeled T1 on the Traverse main backplane and are referred to as T1 throughout
the following procedures.

Preset Timing Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3
Preset Timing Preset timing J2 and J3 header jumper settings for primary and secondary timing input
Jumpers on signals are shown in the diagrams below:
Headers J2 T1 and CC Jumpers
and J3
T1/E1_IN CC2M_IN
T1_INA Pins 1, 2 1 2 1 2 CC_INA Pins 1, 2 (primary)

(primary) 3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6
T1_INB Pins 7, 8 7 8 7 8 CC_INB Pins 7, 8 (secondary)
(secondary) 9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2 J3
J2 J3
Figure 3-7 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3—T1 and CC

E1 and 2MHz Jumpers
T1/E1_IN CC2M_IN
1 2 1 2 2M_INA Pins 3, 4 (primary)
E1_INA Pins 3, 4 3 4 3 4
(primary)
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8 2M_INB Pins 9, 10 (secondary)
E1_INB Pins 9, 10 9 10 9 10
(secondary) 11 12 11 12
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2 J3
J2 J3
Figure 3-8 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3—E1 and 2MHz

Chapter 2 Timing Interface Specifications
Optional Balun Timing Connection
Optional Balun (SDH network only) You can run coax cable from the central office SASE E1 timing
Timing source to the Traverse shelf and use standalone 75/120 ohm baluns (user-supplied) or
Connection an optional Traverse system backplane cover with 75/120 ohm baluns (and shielded
twisted-pair wire) for connection to the main backplane wire-wrap posts.
Figure 3-9 Standalone 75/120 ohm Balun Connection
See Figure 1-30
(Rear View) (Front View)
Figure 3-10 Traverse System Backplane Cover with 75/120 ohm Baluns

Optional Balun Timing Connection

Chapter 3
Management Interface Specifications
Introduction Both the general control module (GCM) card and the Traverse backplane support
Ethernet and RS-232 management interfaces as follows:
• GCM Ethernet and RS-232 DCE Interface, page 3-14
• Backplane DCN Ethernet and RS-232 DTE Interface, page 3-15

GCM Ethernet and RS-232 DCE Interface
GCM Ethernet GCM Ethernet and RS-232 DCE interfaces are located on the GCM faceplate. The
and RS-232 following tables provide pinouts for these interfaces.
DCE Interface
Table 3-7 GCM Ethernet (RJ-45) Pinouts
10/100BaseT Ethernet
RJ-45 Connector Pin Wire Color Description

1 Gray ETH_TX+
2 Brown ETH_TX-
3 Yellow ETH_RX+
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 Green NC
5 Red NC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 Black ETH_RX-
7 Orange NC
8 Blue NC
Table 3-8 GCM RS-232 DCE (DB-9) Pinouts
RS-232
DB-9 Connector Pin Description

1 NC
2 TXD
3 RXD
5 4 3 2 1 4 NC
5 SGND
9 8 7 6 6 NC
7 NC
8 NC
9 NC

Chapter 3 Management Interface Specifications
Backplane DCN Ethernet and RS-232 DTE Interface
Backplane The backplane DCN Ethernet and RS-232 DTE interfaces are supported by shielded
DCN Ethernet vertical 8-pin RJ-45 connectors on the main backplane.
and RS-232 Backplane DCN Ethernet. The Traverse system provides a data communications
DTE Interface network (DCN) to connect a Traverse node to the TransNav Management System and
to other remote management devices. The DCN Ethernet interface is located on the
Traverse main backplane. Only the active GCM has a physical connection to the DCN
Ethernet RJ-45 connector. Ethernet signals are bridged to both the working and protect
General Control Module (GCM) cards for communication to Traverse nodes. This
enables the TransNav Management System to always talk to the working GCM, even
after a protection switch.
A network of Traverse nodes can be managed over the service provider’s DCN as long
as one Traverse node is directly connected to that network through the DCN Ethernet
interface. This node is referred to as the Traverse Management Gateway Node (MGN).
Traverse nodes that have no direct connection to a DCN can communicate with the
TransNav system indirectly, through the Traverse Management Gateway node via the
data communications channel (DCC) of an OC-12 or OC-48 card interface.
The backplane DCN Ethernet interface also allows telnet access directly to any
Traverse node in the network through the DCC.
The DCN Ethernet interface is a data terminal equipment (DTE) interface type,
supports both 10BaseT and 100BaseT, supports half- and full-duplex modes, and is
compliant to IEEE 802.3 signal definition for an 8-pin RJ-45 connector. Pinouts for the
DCN Ethernet interface are provided in the following table.
Note: Although this interface is set to auto-negotiate between 10/100BaseT and half-
and full-duplex modes, Turin recommends a 100BaseT with half-duplex configuration.
Table 3-9 DCN Ethernet Interface (RJ-45) Pinouts
10/100BaseT DCN Ethernet Interface
RJ-45 Connector Pin Wire Color Description
1 Gray ETH_TX+
2 Brown ETH_TX-
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 Yellow ETH_RX+
4 Green NC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Red NC
6 Black ETH_RX-
7 Orange NC
8 Blue NC

Backplane DCN Ethernet and RS-232 DTE Interface
Backplane RS-232 DTE. The RS-23 2DTE interface may be used to connect with an
external modem (DB-25) or PC laptop (DB-9) using a RJ-45 to DB-25 or RJ-45 to
DB-9 adapter. The RS-232 interface is compliant to EIA/TIA–561 signal definition for
RS-232 DTE device on an 8-pin RJ-45 connector. This interface provides serial
communication to the active GCM in the Traverse shelf. Pinouts for the RS-232
interface, including DB-9 and DB-25, are provided in the following table.
Table 3-10 RS-232 Interface DTE (RJ-45) Pinouts
RS-232 DTE DB Pinouts
Wire
RJ-45 Connector Pin Description DB-9 Pin DB-25 Pin
Color
1 Blue DCR 6 6
2 Orange DCD 1 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 Black DTR 4 20
4 Red GND 5 7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Green RXD 3 3
6 Yellow TXD 2 2
7 Brown CTS 8 5
8 White RTS 7 4

S ECTION 4 P OWER I NTERFACE S PECIFICATIONS
Contents
Chapter 1
Power Interface Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Power System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
PDAP-4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
PDAP-15A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
PDAP-2S (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Fan Tray Holder Power Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
List of Figures
Figure 4-1 PDAP-4S Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-2 PDAP-4S Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-3 PDAP-15A Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-4 PDAP-15A Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-5 PDAP-2S Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-6 PDAP-2S Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-7 Fan Tray Holder Interface Connector and Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 4 Power Interface Specifications

SECTION 4P OWER INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 1
Power Interface Specifications
Introduction This chapter includes the following specifications:

• Power System Interface, page 4-1
• Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) Description, page 4-2
• Fan Tray Holder Power Interface, page 4-5
Power System Redundant central office battery and battery return connects to a fuse panel. A fuse
Interface panel can distribute battery and battery return to up to four Traverse shelves and
typically up to five pieces of auxiliary equipment in a rack.
Fuse panels have two DC power inputs (Battery ‘A’ and Battery ‘B’). Each of these
inputs is capable of supplying power to the Traverse system during central office
maintenance operations. The recommended gauge wire for power cabling is #8 AWG
(9mm2) for Turin’s PDAP-4S or #12 AWG (3.3 mm2) for Turin’s PDAP-15A.
For Traverse power terminal locations, refer to any one of the Traverse rear view
graphics in Traverse Product Overview Guide, Section 2—Platform Descriptions.
Important: Carefully plan your power supply capacity. The Turin

PDAP-4S with standard 40 amp fuses at -40 VDC provides 1600 watts.
Turin recommends using higher amperage fuses if your power
requirements go above a minimum of 1400 watts. If you fail to make
sufficient plans to meet the power requirements of your specific
configuration, and the power draw goes above the maximum capacity of
your power supply design, it can cause a circuit breaker to trip, resulting in
a loss of traffic.
For power consumption values, refer to Traverse Product Overview Guide,

Section 5—Planning and Engineering, Chapter 1—“Traverse Specifications,” Power
Consumption, page 5-5.

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 4: Power Interface Specifications
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) Description
Power The Traverse system is powered by central office battery (–48 VDC). Redundant
Distribution central office (CO) battery and battery return is connected to the Power Distribution
and Alarm and Alarm Panel (PDAP). Isolate DC power returns from frame ground (DC-I).
Panel (PDAP) • PDAP-4S, page 4-2.
Description • PDAP-15A, page 4-3
• PDAP-2S (Legacy), page 4-4
The PDAP provides the following:
• Terminates redundant –48 VDC central office battery
• Terminates central office battery return
• Distributes redundant battery and battery return
• Provides power protection for Traverse shelves and auxiliary equipment
• Visually display input power, fuse power, and critical, major, and minor bay alarms
PDAP-4S The PDAP-4S distributes battery and battery return to up to four Traverse 1600 or
Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. It provides power protection with 40 amp TPA fuses
for up to four Traverse shelves and GMT fuses (from 0.25 amps to 15 amps per fuse)
for up to 5 pieces of auxiliary equipment. Power, fuse and visual alarm input
connections are made at the back of the PDAP-4S.1 Audible, remote visual and audible,
fail-safe and environmental alarm connections are made at the Traverse main
backplane. Optional visual alarm external switch connections are available on the
PDAP-4S.
The following illustrations show the front and rear views of the PDAP-4S.
TPA Fuses GMT Fuses Alarm LEDs Flange
Figure 4-1 PDAP-4S Front View
1
Optional PDAP-4S TPA fuses are available up to a 50 amp maximum.

Chapter 1 Power Interface Specifications
PDAP-15A
Battery and Battery Battery and Battery

Return “B” Supply Return “A” Supply
Battery and Battery Return
Distribution Terminal Blocks
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Chassis Ground Chassis Ground

Figure 4-2 PDAP-4S Rear View
PDAP-15A The PDAP-15A distributes battery and battery return to Traverse 600 shelves. The
PDAP-15A provides GMT fuses (from 0.25 amps to 15 amps per fuse) for up to ten
pieces of auxiliary equipment. The PDAP’s field replaceable fuses are accessible
without having to remove the front panel. Turin recommends a 5 amp fuse per power
feeder for the Traverse 600.
The PDAP-15A provides visual alarm status indicators for input power, fuse power,
and critical, major, and minor bay alarms.
The PDAP-15A can be installed in a 19-inch (483 mm) or 23-inch (584 mm) telco rack.
The following illustrations show the front and rear views of the PDAP-15A.
GMT Fuses
Alarm LEDs
Figure 4-3 PDAP-15A Front View
Battery and Battery Battery and Battery Return Battery and Battery
Return “B” Supply Distribution Terminal Blocks Return “A” Supply
Chassis Ground
Figure 4-4 PDAP-15A Rear View

PDAP-2S (Legacy)
PDAP-2S The legacy PDAP-2S distributes battery and battery return to up to two Traverse 1600
(Legacy) or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. It provides power protection with 40 ampere (amp)
circuit breakers for up to two Traverse shelves and GMT fuses (from 0.25 amps to
10 amps per fuse) for up to 10 pieces of auxiliary equipment.2 Fuse and visual alarm
input connections are made at the back of the PDAP-2S. Audible, remote visual and
audible, fail-safe and environmental alarm connections are made at the Traverse main
backplane.
The PDAP-2S layout is shown in the following figures.
Circuit Breakers GMT Fuses Alarm LEDs Flange
Battery Supply
NEG VDC Input
Battery Distribution
Battery Return Supply
and Distribution
Chassis Ground
Figure 4-6 PDAP-2S Rear View
2
Optional PDAP-2S circuit breakers are available up to a 50 amp maximum.

Chapter 1 Power Interface Specifications
Fan Tray Holder Power Interface
Fan Tray Power is distributed to the fan tray holder via the Traverse main backplane.
Holder Power Pinouts for the fan tray holder interface connector are provided in the following table.
Interface
Fan Tray Interface
Pin# Description
1 Battsupply_A
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 2 Battreturn
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 GND
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
7 FanI2C_Reset
8 FanAlarm_Int
9 NC
10 Battsupply_B
11 Battreturn
12 GND
13 NC
14 Fan_Present
15 Fan_Override
16 Fan_SDA
17 Fan_SCL
18 GND
Figure 4-7 Fan Tray Holder Interface Connector and Pinouts

Fan Tray Holder Power Interface

S ECTION 5 C ABLE M ANAGEMENT S PECIFICATIONS
Contents
Chapter 1
Cable Management Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Cable Routing Ports–Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Fiber Optic Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Traverse MPX Fiber Optic Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Traverse SCM Fiber Optic Cable Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Copper/Coax Cable Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Copper and Coax Cable Routing . . . . . . . 5-4
Traverse 600 Copper and Coax Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Ferrite Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
List of Figures
Figure 5-1 Traverse Backplane Cable Routing—Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Figure 5-2 Fiber Cable Management Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-3 Traverse 600 Shelf Horizontal Installation—Fiber Cable Routing 5-3
Figure 5-4 GbE-10 SFP Connector Module (SCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-5 Traverse 1600 Shelf with Cable Management Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Figure 5-6 Traverse Shelves with Copper/Coax Cable Management Bars . . 5-5
Figure 5-7 Traverse 600 Shelf Vertical Installation—Cable Routing . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-8 Traverse 600 Shelf Horizontal Installation—Cable Routing . . . . . 5-6
List of Tables
Table 5-1 Traverse Cabling Ferrite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 5 Cable Management Specifications

SECTION 5CABLE MANAGEMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 1
Cable Management Specifications

• Cable Routing Ports–Left Side, page 5-1
• Fiber Optic Cable Management, page 5-2
• Copper/Coax Cable Management, page 5-4
• Ferrite Requirements, page 5-6
Cable Routing There are cable ports on the left side of the Traverse shelf when viewed from the back.
Ports–Left Side The following cables are routed through these ports (see the graphic below):
• 10/100BaseT Ethernet
• Alarm
• Battery and battery return distribution
• RS-232 modem
• Timing interface
Battery "B" Battery Return "A" Battery "A"
Distribution and "B" Distribution Visual Alarm Distribution
To Timing Interface Cabling
Fuse Panel
B A
DCN Ethernet and Battery Return "A" and "B"

RS-232 Cables Distribution
Battery "A" Battery "B"
Distribution Distribution
Figure 5-1 Traverse Backplane Cable Routing—Left Side

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 5: Cable Management Specifications
Fiber Optic Cable Management
Fiber Optic An fiber cable management tray (for MPX-specific cables) is integrated into the fiber
Cable optic backplane cover for routing fiber optic cables. Cable management bars (for
Management copper, coax, and SCM fiber cables) are customer-installable on the rear of the shelf.
Fiber optic cable routing is as follows:
• Traverse MPX Fiber Optic Cable Routing, page 5-2
• Traverse SCM Fiber Optic Cable Routing, page 5-3
Traverse MPX Fiber optic cables route into the left or right along the bottom of the fiber optic cable
Fiber Optic management tray mount across the back of the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf.
Cable Routing The following graphic shows the Traverse shelf backplane cover, fiber cable
management tray, captive fasteners, and cable routing options.
Captive
Fasteners
Cover
Fiber Cable Fiber optic cable

Management Tray is routed out to the
left or right side
Fiber optic cable

is routed out to the
left or right side
Figure 5-2 Fiber Cable Management Tray

Chapter 1 Cable Management Specifications
Traverse SCM Fiber Optic Cable Routing
Fiber optic cables route out the bottom of the Traverse 600 shelf for horizontal central
office rack installation.
Route fiber optic cables out the bottom and

to the right or left
Figure 5-3 Traverse 600 Shelf Horizontal Installation—Fiber Cable Routing
Traverse SCM Fiber optic cables route down from the SCM and over the cable management bar
Fiber Optic mounted on the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 system to route out to the right or left
Cable Routing side of the shelf (from the rear view), and continue routing up the rack to intermediate
patch panels. See Figure 5-6 Traverse Shelves with Copper/Coax Cable Management
Bars, page 5-5 for an example of SCM fiber optic and copper/coax cable management.
Important: Always wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

(ESD) wrist strap when making cable connections to the fiber optic
backplane.
Important: Fiber optic cable is very fragile. Be careful when handling

and routing the cable. Do not make any bends or coils in the cable less
than 1½ inches (3.8 mm) in diameter. Kinks or sharp bends in the cable
can cause signal distortion.
The SCM backplane device provides for the physical connection of the GbE-10 links to
the Traverse. The SCM supports pluggable SFPs. It has ten SFP receptacles, into which
the operator can insert (Turin recommended) SFPs.
Optical cabling
Electrical cabling
Figure 5-4 GbE-10 SFP Connector Module (SCM)

Copper/Coax Cable Management
Copper/Coax Copper and coax cable routing is as follows:

Cable • Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Copper and Coax Cable Routing, page 5-4
Management • Traverse 600 Copper and Coax Cable Routing, page 5-5
Traverse 1600 Copper and coax cables tie-wrap to the cable management bar(s), route out to the right
and Traverse or left side of the Traverse shelf (from the rear view), and continue routing up the rack
2000 Copper to intermediate patch panels. Two optional cable management bars are available with
and Coax each Traverse system. Mount one cable management bar (and optionally use a second
Cable Routing bar) for any copper cabling exiting the rear of the shelf. Mount two cable management
bars for strain relief with Mini-SMB ECM cabling.
The following graphic shows a Traverse 1600 shelf with cable management bar and
Ethernet, DS1/E1, and DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECMs. There is an opening with a protruding
cover in the left-most cover to route DCN Ethernet and RS-232 cables.
Ethernet DS1/E1 DS3/E3
ECM ECM ECM
Left-most
back cover
DCN
Ethernet and
RS-232
cable
opening
Cable
management
Route Coax bars
and Copper
cables to the
right or left
side
Figure 5-5 Traverse 1600 Shelf with Cable Management Bar

Chapter 1 Cable Management Specifications
Traverse 600 Copper and Coax Cable Routing
The following image shows Traverse shelves with two cable management bars each,
Mini-SMB cabling, and ECMs. There is an opening with a protruding cover in the
left-most cover to route DCN Ethernet and RS-232 cables.
Cable
DCN management bars
Ethernet and with tie-wrapped
RS-232 cables
cable
opening
ECMs with
Left-most Mini-SMB
back cover connectors
Cable
Coax and copper cables management bars
routed to the left side with tie-wrapped
cables
Figure 5-6 Traverse Shelves with Copper/Coax Cable Management Bars
Traverse 600 Copper and coax cables route to the out the bottom of the Traverse 600 shelf for
Copper and horizontal central office rack installation and to the right of the Traverse 600 shelf for
Coax Cable vertical cabinet installation. Also note there is a small opening with a protruding cover
Routing in the left-most cover to allow routing of DCN Ethernet and RS-232 cables.
DCN Ethernet and

RS-232 cable opening
Route coax and copper
cables to the right side
Figure 5-7 Traverse 600 Shelf Vertical Installation—Cable Routing

Ferrite Requirements
DCN Ethernet and

RS-232 cable opening
Route coax and copper cables out the

bottom and to the right or left
Figure 5-8 Traverse 600 Shelf Horizontal Installation—Cable Routing
Ferrite (SDH network only) Clamp-on ferrites (Turin part number 499-0135) are used with the
Requirements Traverse system cabling to meet European Telecommunications Standards Institute
(ETSI) Class A Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) suppression standards.
Table 5-1 Traverse Cabling Ferrite Requirements

Cable Type Ferrite Requirement Description
10/100BaseTX One ferrite (1 turn) on each cable 152.4 mm from the 50-pin connector.
Alarm Two ferrites (1 turn) around the cable bundle, one 152.4 mm from the rack, the other
304.8 to 457.2 mm from the rack.
DCN Ethernet One ferrite (2 turns) on each cable 152.4 mm from the rack.
(RJ-45)
Note: One ferrite turn is a single pass through the ferrite hole.

S ECTION 6 P RECAUTIONS AND C OMMON
P ROCEDURES
Contents
Chapter 1
Precautions
Environmental Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hardware Installation Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Electrical Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fiber Optic Cabling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Card Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Electrostatic Discharge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
ESD Jack Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Chapter 2
Removing and Replacing Back Covers
Required Equipment and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Main Backplane Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Remove and Replace the Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Remove and Replace the Fiber Management Tray Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Remove and Replace the Traverse 600 Fiber Management Tray Cover . . . . 6-12
Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Chapter 3
Inserting and Removing Cards
Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Insert a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Remove a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Chapter 4
Insert Fan Module and Air Filters
Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Air Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Insert a Fan Tray Module (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Insert a Fan Tray Air Filter (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Springs (Legacy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 6 Precautions and Common Procedures
List of Figures
Figure 6-1 Front Inlet Fan Module ESD Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 6-2 Air Ramp with ESD Jack Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 6-3 Traverse 600 with ESD Jack Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-4 Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Main Backplane Covers . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-5 Traverse 600 Backplane Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-6 Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover with Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Figure 6-7 Traverse 600 Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Figure 6-8 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Figure 6-9 Traverse 600 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Figure 6-10 Optical Card MPX Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Figure 6-11 Card Locking Tabs in the Unlocked Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Figure 6-12 Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 Shelf with Guides . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Figure 6-13 Traverse 600 Shelf with Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Figure 6-14 Card Tabs in the Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Figure 6-15 Card Tabs in the Unlocked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Figure 6-16 Front Inlet Fan Card Captive Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Figure 6-17 Front Inlet Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Figure 6-18 Fan Assembly Front Cover - Traverse 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Figure 6-19 Traverse 600 Fan Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Figure 6-20 Traverse 600 Fan Assembly Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Figure 6-21 Fan Tray Holder Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Figure 6-22 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Figure 6-23 Traverse 2000 Fan Tray Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Figure 6-24 Air Filter with Springs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Figure 6-26 Air Filter with Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
List of Tables
Table 6-1 Remove and Replace the Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover. . 6-11
Table 6-2 Remove and Replace the Traverse 600 Fiber
Management Tray Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Table 6-3 Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 6-4 Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 6-5 Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-6 Insert a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Table 6-7 Remove a Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Table 6-8 Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Assembly . . . . . . 6-26
Table 6-9 Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air Filter . . . . . . . 6-27
Table 6-10 Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Table 6-11 Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Air Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Table 6-12 Insert a Fan Tray Card (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Table 6-13 Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Springs (Legacy). . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

Table 6-14 Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34


S ECTION 6PRECAUTIONS AND C OMMON PROCEDURES
Chapter 1
Precautions
Introduction This chapter is intended to provide all necessary precautions. Follow these precautions
to ensure personal safety and to avoid any equipment damage during installation,
configuration, or maintenance procedures. The precautions listed in this chapter relate
to the Traverse system, including: Traverse 1600, Traverse 2000, and Traverse 600
shelves unless otherwise noted.
• Environmental Precautions, page 6-2
• Hardware Installation Precautions, page 6-2
• Electrical Precautions, page 6-3
• Fiber Optic Cabling Precautions, page 6-4
• Card Precautions, page 6-5
• Electrostatic Discharge Protection, page 6-6
• ESD Jack Locations, page 6-7
Three types of precautionary statements are used in the documentation:
WARNING! May cause personal injury if the warning is not followed;

for example, this warning applies to electrical hazards.
WARNING! May cause personal injury if the warning is not followed;

for example, this warning applies to optical hazards.
Important: May cause equipment damage if the precaution is not

followed; for example, this note applies to electrostatic damage to
equipment.

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 6: Precautions and Common Procedures
Environmental Precautions
Environmental
Precautions Important: Traverse systems are designed to comply with
GR-1089-CORE, GR-63-CORE, and CE Mark requirements. Install and
operate the Traverse system in environments that do not expose wiring,
cabling, or connectors to the outside plant. Acceptable applications
include Central Office Environments (COEs), Electronic Equipment
Enclosures (EEEs), Controlled Environment Vaults (CEVs), huts, and
customer premises environment.
The Traverse systems are classified as being powered by Class A1
voltages per GR-1089-CORE.
The Traverse system design supports installation in locations with
restricted access.
Important: Always use caution while working in an environment with

rotating or moving equipment parts (e.g., fan modules).
Important: This symbol is on the product and means do not discard

Turin products into residential or commercial waste.
Most countries or regions have established methods and
procedures to collect and recycle electronic and electrical
waste. Contact your local authorities for established
procedures. If no local procedures are available, contact the
Turin Networks Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
Hardware
Installation Important: Always use thread-forming screws when installing a
Precautions Traverse shelf to ensure electrical continuity. This is especially critical
when installing equipment in a rack coated with a non-conductive coating.
Important: To ensure proper air flow, 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) of space is

required between the Fuse Panel and the first Traverse 1600 or Traverse
2000 shelf in a standard horizontal-mount installation.
Important: Traverse 2000 shelf installation into a 19-inch (483 mm)

wide telco rack is a standard-mount only—5 inch (127 mm) forward. A
flush-mount configuration is not currently available.

Chapter 1 Precautions
Electrical Precautions
Important: The fan tray holder, with fay tray module and fan filter, must
be installed either directly below the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf
in a standard horizontal installation or flush with the Traverse 2000 shelf
in a 19-inch rack installation (vertical) so that there is no gap between the
shelf and fan tray holder to ensure proper air flow.
Important: The Traverse shelf has a removable back cover to provide

access to the main and fiber optic backplane and fan tray holder connector.
The cover removes easily for cabling, but must be replaced during normal
operation to ensure proper air flow and electromagnetic interference
(EMI) protection.
Important: Carefully plan your power supply capacity. The Turin PDAP
with standard 40 amp fuses at -40 VDC provides 1600 watts. Turin
recommends using higher amperage fuses if your power requirements go
above a minimum of 1400 watts. If you fail to make sufficient plans to
meet the power requirements of your specific configuration and the power
draw goes above the maximum capacity of your power supply design, it
can cause a circuit breaker to trip, resulting in a loss of traffic.
Electrical
Precautions WARNING! Only power-certified personnel should install power
equipment and cabling.
WARNING! Do not install Traverse cards (modules) until all

installation and cabling procedures are complete and you verify the
correct polarity of your power installation.
WARNING! A common return jumper plate is pre-installed on the

shelf to help prevent system damage in the event of faulty wiring. If
you remove this jumper plate, you MUST check and verify polarity
before installing the battery and battery return cabling. Reverse
polarity from incorrect wiring can cause sparking and may result in
fire or other severe damage. Verify that the polarity is the same
(-48VDC) for both -48VDC_A and -48VDC_B battery cable
connections. Verify that the polarity is the same (RETURN) for both
RETURN_A and RETURN_B battery return cable connections.

Fiber Optic Cabling Precautions
WARNING! Do not connect central office battery and battery return

supply cables at the central office source until all cabling at the Fuse
Panel and Traverse shelf backplane is complete. Before connecting the
supply cables, go to the front of the PDAP and verify that all circuit
breakers are in the OFF position, TPA fuse holders are empty, and
that GMT fuse positions are empty or contain dummy fuses.
WARNING! The protective back covers are removed from the Fuse
Panel during cabling activities. Fuse Panel back covers must be
replaced after cabling is complete and before –48 VDC power supply
cables are connected to the central office source. The Fuse Panel
protective back covers must remain in place during normal operation
to protect against possible electric shock.

PDAP-4S with standard 40 amp fuses at -40 VDC provides 1600 watts.
configuration and the power draw goes above the maximum capacity of
a loss of traffic.
Important: The Traverse shelf design is compatible with the Common

Bonding Network (CBN).
Important: Always use a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

(ESD) wrist strap when connecting copper cables to the Fuse Panel, main
backplane, and fan tray holder. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack
provided on the Traverse front inlet fan module, standalone air ramp, or
other confirmed source of earth ground. Refer to ESD Jack Locations,
page 6-7.
Fiber Optic
Cabling WARNING! The Traverse system is a class 1 product that contains a
Precautions class IIIb laser and is intended for operation in a closed environment
with fiber attached. Do not look into the optical connector of the
transmitter with power applied. Laser output is invisible and eye
damage can result. Do not defeat safety features that prevent looking
into the optical connector.

Card Precautions
WARNING! The optical connector system used on the Traverse fiber

optic backplane is designed with a mechanical shutter mechanism that
blocks physical and visual access to the optical connector. Do not
defeat this safety feature designed to prevent eye damage.
WARNING! Follow all warning labels when working with optical

fibers. Always wear eye protection when working with optical fibers.
Never look directly into the end of a terminated or unterminated fiber
or connector as it may cause eye damage.
Important: To prevent possible damage to the fiber optic cables, do not

twist or cross one cable over another.
Important: To prevent possible damage to the fiber optic cables, do not

bend optical fibers in a radius less than 1½-inches (38.1 mm).

(ESD) wrist strap when connecting optical cables to the fiber optic
backplane. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the
Traverse front inlet fan module, standalone air ramp, or other confirmed
source of earth ground. Refer to ESD Jack Locations, page 6-7.
Card
Precautions Important: Always use a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) wrist strap when handling Traverse cards to prevent damage to the
circuitry. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the
Traverse front inlet fan module, standalone air ramp, or other confirmed
source of earth ground. Refer to ESD Jack Locations, page 6-7.
Important: Do not install Traverse cards (cards) until all installation and
cabling procedures are complete.
Important: Handle cards with care. Dropping a card can cause

component or other damage beyond repair or use.

Electrostatic Discharge Protection
Important: Handle cards by the edges and faceplate only. Do not touch
any card connectors or components.
Important: Observe all electrostatic sensitive device warnings and

precautions when handling Traverse cards.
Important: Insert the card into the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf
using the guides at the top and bottom of the card cage for proper
alignment. Make sure the card is vertical (in a standard installation) from
top to bottom and that the card stays in the guides from the front to the
back of the shelf.
Important: Insert the card in the Traverse 600 shelf using the guides for
proper alignment. If the Traverse 600 shelf is installed horizontally make
sure the card is horizontal, from left to right and that the card stays in the
guides.
Important: Cards should insert easily into the Traverse shelf, do not
force the card into position. If the card does not insert easily, slide it back
out and verify you are placing it in the correct position and inserting the
card into the correct guides (top and bottom for Traverse 1600 or Traverse
2000, side-to-side for Traverse 600).
Important: Do not place an electrical card (of another type) in the slot
directly to the left of any 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card:
• NGE
• NGE Plus
• Legacy Ethernet
Important: To ensure EMI protection and proper cooling, place one-slot

wide blank faceplates in any empty Traverse slots.
Electrostatic To avoid damage to Traverse integrated circuits, a properly grounded Electrostatic

Discharge Discharge (ESD) wrist strap must be worn during the following installation and
Protection maintenance activities:
• Handling Traverse cards.
• Connecting copper or optical cables to the fuse panel, Traverse main backplane,
fiber optic backplane, and fan tray module.

ESD Jack Locations
ESD Jack ESD jacks provide a ground for the ESD wrist strap and are located on the following
Locations Traverse units:
• Front inlet fan module; a component of the front inlet fan tray holder
• Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 standalone air ramp
• Traverse 600 fan tray panel
ESD Jack
Figure 6-1 Front Inlet Fan Module ESD Jack Location
Back
Front
ESD Jack
ESD Jack
Front
Back
Figure 6-2 Air Ramp with ESD Jack Locations

ESD Jack Locations
The Traverse 600 shelf has an ESD jack located on the fan tray panel.
ESD Jack
Figure 6-3 Traverse 600 with ESD Jack Location

Chapter 2
Removing and Replacing Back Covers
Introduction This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for removing back covers:
• Required Equipment and Tools, page 6-9
• Main Backplane Covers, page 6-9
• Remove and Replace the Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover, page 6-11
• Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover, page 6-13
• Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover, page 6-13
Refer to this chapter as required while completing the Traverse Installation and
Commissioning Guide procedures. Use the topic labels in the left margin to scan this
document for the tasks you need to review.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to complete these procedures:
Equipment and • Traverse shelf
Tools • PDAP
• Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap
• Large flat blade screwdriver for backplane covers
• Large Phillips screwdriver for fiber optic management tray cover
Main Electrical connector modules (ECM) are used for network interface cabling using
Backplane standard copper/coax cables and connectors. Three types of main backplane covers are
Covers used (alarm and timing cover, power cover, and blank covers) to protect the main
backplane where ECMs are not plugged in.
Covers are removed from the Traverse shelf during installation and cabling activities.
Covers must be replaced after cabling is complete to ensure air cooling from shelf to
shelf and electromagnetic interference (EMI) protection during normal operation.
Each cover is removed from the shelf chassis using a flat blade screwdriver to remove
the screws.

(ESD) wrist strap when removing back covers from the Traverse shelf as
there are static-sensitive components on the main backplane.

Main Backplane Covers
These covers are shown in the following graphics along with the electrical connector
modules.
Alarm and Timing

Cover
Blank Covers
Protruding Cover over

DCN Ethernet and
RS-232 RJ-45
Connectors
Electrical Connector
Modules
Power Cover
Figure 6-4 Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Main Backplane Covers
Alarm and Timing

Cover
Protruding Cover over

DCN Ethernet and
RS-232 RJ-45
Connectors
Electrical Connector
Modules
Power Cover
Figure 6-5 Traverse 600 Backplane Cover

Chapter 2 Removing and Replacing Back Covers
Remove and Replace the Fiber Management Tray Cover
Remove and The fiber optic management tray cover is removed during cabling activities. This cover
Replace the must be replaced after cabling is complete to protect fiber optic connections during
Fiber Optic normal operation.
Management
Tray Cover (ESD) wrist strap when removing Traverse back covers as there are
static-sensitive components on the backplane.
The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 procedure to remove and replace the fiber optic
management tray cover is similar. The Traverse 600 procedure is different.
• Remove and Replace the Fiber Management Tray Cover, page 6-11
• Remove and Replace the Traverse 600 Fiber Management Tray Cover,
page 6-12
Remove and
Replace the Important: Always wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge
Fiber (ESD) wrist strap when removing Traverse back covers as there are
Management static-sensitive components on the backplane.
Tray Cover Follow these instructions to remove and replace the fiber optic management tray cover
from a Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf.
Table 6-1 Remove and Replace the Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover
Step Procedure
1 Loosen the three captive fasteners at the top of the fiber optic management
tray cover using a Phillips screwdriver.
Captive Fasteners
Figure 6-6 Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover with Fasteners
2 Pull the cover straight back to remove.

3 To replace the fiber optic management tray cover, line up the fasteners
with the holes at the top of the chassis.

Remove and Replace the Traverse 600 Fiber Management Tray Cover
Table 6-1 Remove and Replace the Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover
Step Procedure
4 Push the cover straight forward and tighten the fasteners.

5 The Remove and Replace the Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover
procedure is complete.
Remove and Follow these instructions to remove and replace the fiber optic backplane cover from a
Replace the Traverse 600 shelf.
Traverse 600
Fiber Table 6-2 Remove and Replace the Traverse 600 Fiber
Management Management Tray Cover
Tray Cover
Step Procedure
1 Loosen the two captive fasteners at the top of the fiber optic management
tray cover.
Captive Fasteners
Fiber Optic
Management Tray
Cover
Figure 6-7 Traverse 600 Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover
2 Pull the cover straight back to remove.

3 To replace the fiber optic management tray cover, line up the fasteners on
top of the fiber optic management tray cover with the holes at the top of
the chassis.

Chapter 2 Removing and Replacing Back Covers
Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover
Table 6-2 Remove and Replace the Traverse 600 Fiber

Management Tray Cover
Step Procedure
4 Push the cover straight forward and tighten the fasteners.

5 The Remove and Replace the Traverse 600 Fiber Management Tray
Cover procedure is complete.
Remove the Follow these instructions to remove the PDAP protective back cover.
PDAP
Protective WARNING! The protective back cover is removed from the PDAP
Back Cover during power cabling activities. PDAP back covers must be replaced
after cabling is complete and before –48 VDC power supply cables are
connected to the central office source. The PDAP protective back
cover must remain in place during normal operation to protect
against possible electric shock.
Table 6-3 Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover
Step Procedure
1 Loosen (you need not remove) the two thumb screws securing the
protective cover onto the back panel.
2 Pull the protective cover straight out to remove.
3 The Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover procedure is complete.
Replace the Follow these instructions to replace the PDAP protective back cover.
PDAP
Protective Table 6-4 Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover
Back Cover
Step Procedure
1 Align the protective cover to the back panel with the two thumb screws.
2 Tighten the two thumb screws to secure the protective cover.
3 The Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover procedure is complete.

Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover

Chapter 3
Inserting and Removing Cards
Introduction This chapter provides basic step-by-step instructions for inserting and removing cards
in a Traverse shelf. Refer to this chapter as required while completing the Traverse
Installation and Commissioning Guide procedures.
• Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors, page 6-16
• Insert a Card, page 6-19
• Remove a Card, page 6-23
For a card placement example, refer first to Section 1—Installation Overview,
Chapter 2—“Traverse System Configuration Examples,” Example Traverse Shelf
Card Layout, page 1-5.
Exact placement of the cards into Traverse shelf slots is explained in
Section 12—Appendices, Appendix A—“Card Placement Planning and Guidelines,”
page 12-1.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to insert and remove cards:
Equipment and • Card
Tools • MPX cleaning materials to clean fiber optic cable and module MPX connectors:
– Isopropyl alcohol of at least 91% purity
– Lint-free wipes
– Lint-free cleaning swabs with urethane foam heads
– Pressurized optical duster (canned air)

Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors
Clean Cable It is critical that the cable and card MPX connectors are clean to ensure proper
and Card MPX operation. Turin recommends that you visually inspect the MPX connectors on both the
Connectors fiber optic cables and optical cards using fiber optic magnification equipment. Turin
also recommends that you clean the fiber optic cable and card MPX connectors using
the following procedure.
WARNING! The Traverse system is a class 1 product that contains a class

IIIb laser and is intended for operation in a closed environment with fiber
attached. Do not look into the optical connector of the transmitter with
power applied. Laser output is invisible and eye damage can result. Do not
defeat safety features that prevent looking into the optical connector.
WARNING! The optical connector system used on the Traverse fiber optic
backplane is designed with a mechanical shutter mechanism that blocks
physical and visual access to the optical connector. Do not defeat this safety
feature designed to prevent eye damage.
WARNING! Follow all warning labels when working with optical fibers.
Always wear eye protection when working with optical fibers. Never look
directly into the end of a terminated or unterminated fiber or connector, as
it may cause eye damage.

(ESD) wrist strap when handling and placing cards in the Traverse shelf.
Follow all warnings and instructions included in card packaging to prevent
electrostatic damage.
Important: Do not touch the end of the MPX connectors.

Chapter 3 Inserting and Removing Cards
Table 6-5 Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors
Step Procedure
1 Was the fiber optic cable pre-cabled?

• If yes, continue to Step 2.
• If no, continue to Step 3.
2 Remove the fiber optic cable MPX connector(s) from the fiber optic
backplane.
3 Clean the fiber optic cable MPX connector with 91% IPA alcohol, a
lint-free wipe, and a pressurized optical duster (canned air).
4 Align the “white reference marker” on the MPX connector with the white
stripe on the left side of the fiber optic backplane housing.
Note: For a Traverse 600 shelf type, see Figure 6-9 in Step 5.
Figure 6-8 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B
For specifications, refer to the Traverse Installation and Commissioning

Guide, Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 1—“Fiber
Optic Interface Cabling Specifications,” General MPX Connector to
Optical Fiber Port Assignment, page 2-9.

Table 6-5 Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Align the “white reference marker” on the MPX connector with the white
stripe on the left side of the Traverse 600 fiber optic backplane housing.
White Stripe
Reference Markers
Housing A
Housing B
OPS 00085
Figure 6-9 Traverse 600 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B
6 Gently push the MPX connector back into the correct fiber optic backplane
housing.
7 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each MPX connector.
8 Remove the dust cap from the optical card MPX connector(s).
Dust Cap on MPX
Connector
OPS 00083
Figure 6-10 Optical Card MPX Connector

Insert a Card
Table 6-5 Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors (continued)
Step Procedure
9 Clean the optical card MPX connector with 91% IPA alcohol, a lint-free
wipe, and a pressurized optical duster (canned air).
10 Continue to the next procedure, Insert a Card.
Insert a Card
(ESD) wrist strap when handling Traverse cards (cards). Plug the ESD
wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the Traverse front inlet fan card,
standalone air ramp, or other confirmed source of earth ground. Refer to
ESD Jack Locations, page 6-7.
‘
Important: Do not install Traverse cards until all installation and cabling
procedures are complete.
Important: Observe all electrostatic sensitive device warnings and

precautions when handling Traverse cards.
Important: Insert the card into the Traverse shelf using the guides at the
top and bottom of the card cage for proper alignment. Make sure the card
is vertical, from top to bottom, and that the card stays in the guides from
the front to the back of the shelf.
• NGE
• NGE Plus
• EoPDH
• Legacy Ethernet

Insert a Card
Important: Cards should insert easily into the Traverse shelf. Do not
force the card into position. If the card does not insert easily, slide it back
out, verify you are placing it in the correct position and inserting the card
into the correct guides top and bottom.
Important: Insert the card in the Traverse 600 shelf using the guides for
proper alignment. If the Traverse 600 shelf is installed horizontally make
sure the card is horizontal, from left to right, and that the card stays in the
guides.

Follow these steps to insert a card.
Table 6-6 Insert a Card
Step Procedure
1 Is this an optical card with MPX connectors?

• If yes, complete the Clean MPX Connectors procedure before
proceeding.
2 Flip the card locking tabs up. Hold the card with the tabs parallel to the top
and bottom of the card.
Guide Pins
Locking Tabs in Open

Position
OPS 00083
Figure 6-11 Card Locking Tabs in the Unlocked Position

Insert a Card
Table 6-6 Insert a Card (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Important: Each slot in the Traverse shelf has guides to properly align
the card into position for contact with the main and mesh backplanes. Use
these guides to ensure the card is properly aligned. This is easier to do if
you are eye level with the shelf. The card should insert easily into the
Traverse shelf. Do not force the card into position.
Insert the card in the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf using the
guides at the top and bottom of the card cage for proper alignment. Make
sure the card is vertical, from top to bottom, and that the card stays in the
guides from the front to the back of the shelf.
Card Cage Guides for

Card Alignment
Figure 6-12 Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 Shelf with Guides
Insert the card in the Traverse 600 shelf using the guides for proper
alignment. If the Traverse 600 shelf is installed horizontally as in the
following figure, make sure the card is horizontal (from left to right) and
that the card stays in the guides from the front to the back of the shelf.
Card Cage Guides for Card

Alignment
Figure 6-13 Traverse 600 Shelf with Guides

Insert a Card
Table 6-6 Insert a Card (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Push the center of the card faceplate until the locking tabs begin to close
and the locking tabs start to roll around the lip of the Traverse shelf. The
optical card makes an audible “click” indicating it is making contact with
the fiber optic backplane connectors.
5 Push the locking tabs down. The tabs must close around each end of the
card to lock the card in place.
Locking Tabs in
Closed Position
Figure 6-14 Card Tabs in the Locked Position
6 Press the tabs into their locked position to secure the card. The card is
locked into position when the top and bottom tabs are pressed down
completely and the locking tabs are secured in the lip of the Traverse shelf.
7 The Insert a Card procedure is complete.

Remove a Card
Remove a Card
Important: A properly grounded ESD wrist strap must be worn at all
times while handling Traverse cards to prevent damage to the circuitry.
Important: Handle cards by the edges and face plate only. Do not touch
Follow these instructions to remove a card from a slot in a shelf.
Table 6-7 Remove a Card
Step Procedure
1 Flip the locking tabs up to unlock the card.
Locking Tabs in
Open Position
OPS 00083
Figure 6-15 Card Tabs in the Unlocked Position
2 Hold the card with the tabs parallel to the top and bottom of the card and
pull it straight out of the slot.
3 The Remove a Card procedure is complete.

Remove a Card

Chapter 4
Insert Fan Module and Air Filters
Introduction This chapter includes step-by-step instructions to insert a fan module and air filter.
The Traverse system supports three fan assembly types. Refer to the correct fan module
and air filter procedure in this chapter depending on the fan assembly type.
• Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Assembly, page 6-26
• Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air Filter, page 6-27
• Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Assembly, page 6-28
• Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Air Filter, page 6-30
• Insert a Fan Tray Module (Legacy), page 6-31
• Insert a Fan Tray Air Filter (Legacy), page 6-33
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the fan and air filter:
Equipment and • Fan tray holder pre-installed (for Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000)
Tools • Fan module (Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000) or Fan assembly (Traverse 600)
• Air filter1
1
Fan tray air filters are available in 63% arrestance at 300 FPM—feet per minute (91.4 meters per
minute) and 80% arrestance at 300 FPM (91.4 meters per minute) depending on your installation
requirements.

Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Assembly
Insert a
Traverse 1600 Follow these instructions to insert the front inlet fan module for the Traverse 1600 or
and Traverse Traverse 2000 into the fan tray holder.
2000 Fan
Assembly Important: Wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
wrist strap when installing the fan module as it contains static-sensitive
components.
Table 6-8 Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Assembly
Step Procedure
1 Lift the front inlet fan card to be level with the front inlet fan tray holder.
Slide the fan card into the front of the fan tray holder and push it straight in
until the two connectors engage.
2 The front inlet fan card is in the correct position when it is flush with the
front of the fan tray holder.
Important: Do not force the fan card into position. If it does not plug in
easily, slide it back out. Check for any obstructions or a damaged
connector that might prevent it from sliding into position and verify it is in
the correct guides before attempting to insert it again.
3 Tighten the captive fasteners to secure it.
OPS 00088
Captive Fasteners
Figure 6-16 Front Inlet Fan Card Captive Fasteners
4 Continue to the next procedure, Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000
Fan Air Filter.

Chapter 4 Insert Fan Module and Air Filters
Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air Filter
Insert a The front inlet fan module requires a foam air filter that is placed at the top of the front
Traverse 1600 inlet fan tray holder after the fan module is installed.
and Traverse The front inlet fan tray air filters are available in 63% or 80% arrestance at 300 FPM—
2000 Fan Air feet per minute (91.4 meters per minute) depending on your installation requirements.
Filter
The following procedure provides step-by-step instructions on how to insert the front
inlet fan tray air filter.
Table 6-9 Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air Filter
Step Procedure
1 If you are replacing an old air filter, to avoid contamination to the

equipment, carefully pull the old air filter from the fan tray holder.
2 Install the new air filter. Grasp the air filter flexible pull tab.
OPS 00056
Pull Tab (top view)
Figure 6-17 Front Inlet Air Filter
3 Insert the air filter in the gap between the top of the front inlet fan card and
the top of the front inlet fan tray holder. Slide the air filter along the fan
tray holder guides until the filter is flush with the front of the fan tray
holder.
4 The Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air Filter procedure is
complete.

Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Assembly
Insert a The Traverse 600 fan assembly (module with integral fan tray) is bundled and shipped
Traverse 600 with the Traverse 600 system. Proceed with the following steps to install the fan
Fan Assembly assembly.
Important: Wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

wrist strap when installing the fan tray module as it contains static-sensitive
components.
Table 6-10 Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Assembly
Step Procedure
1 Loosen the two captive screws on the right-front cover of the Traverse 600
fan assembly to release it.
OPS 00089
Captive
Fasteners
Figure 6-18 Fan Assembly Front Cover - Traverse 600
2 Open the right-front fan assembly cover.

Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Assembly
Table 6-10 Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Assembly (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Hold the fan assembly vertically with the fan card facing left and lift it
level with the fan cage. Slide the fan assembly into the fan cage along the
guides and push it straight in until it connects to the back of the shelf.
Important: Do not force the fan tray card into position. If it does not plug
in easily, slide it back out. Check for any obstructions or a damaged
connector that might prevent it from sliding into position and verify it is
lined up in the correct guides.
Traverse 600
Shelf
Fan Assembly
OPS 00090
Figure 6-19 Traverse 600 Fan Assembly Installation
4 Continue to the next procedure, Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Air Filter.

Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Air Filter
Insert a The Traverse 600 fan assembly (fan module with integral fan tray) requires a foam air
Traverse 600 filter that is placed to the left of the fan assembly after the fan module is installed.
Fan Air Filter The Traverse 600 fan air filters are available in 63% or 80% arrestance at 300 FPM—
feet per minute (91.4 meters per minute) depending on your installation requirements.
The following procedure provides step-by-step instructions on how to insert the air
filter.
Table 6-11 Insert a Traverse 600 Fan Air Filter
Step Procedure

2 Install the new air filter. Grasp the air filter flexible pull tab.
Pull Tab (top view)

OPS 00057
Figure 6-20 Traverse 600 Fan Assembly Air Filter
3 Insert the air filter in the gap between the fan assembly and the left of the
fan cage. Slide the air filter along the guides until the filter is flush.
complete.

Insert a Fan Tray Module (Legacy)
Insert a Fan This topic applies to the original fan tray unit without an integrated air ramp (legacy,
Tray Module pre-Release 1.4) for the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf. Refer to Insert a
(Legacy) Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Assembly, page 6-26 if you are installing the
front inlet fan module into the redesigned front inlet fan tray holder with integrated air
ramp unit.
Follow these instructions to insert the fan tray module into the fan tray holder.
Important: Wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

wrist strap when installing the fan tray module as it contains
static-sensitive components.
Table 6-12 Insert a Fan Tray Card (Legacy)
Step Procedure
1 Loosen the captive fasteners on the fan tray holder front cover to release it.
OPS 00059
Captive Fasteners
Figure 6-21 Fan Tray Holder Front Cover
2 Lower the fan tray holder front cover.

Insert a Fan Tray Module (Legacy)
Table 6-12 Insert a Fan Tray Card (Legacy) (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Lift the fan tray card until it is level with the fan tray holder. Slide the fan
tray card into the fan tray holder along the guides. Push it straight in until it
connects to the fan tray holder.
Fan Tray Card Connector
Fan Tray Holder

Guides
Figure 6-22 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Card Installation
Fan Tray Card Connector
Fan Tray Holder

Guides
Figure 6-23 Traverse 2000 Fan Tray Card Installation
4 The fan tray card is in the correct position when it is slightly recessed from
the front of the fan tray holder.
Important: Do not force the fan tray card into position. If it does not plug
in easily, slide it back out. Check for any obstructions or a damaged
connector that may prevent it from sliding into position and verify it is in
the correct guides.
5 Continue to the next procedure, Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Springs
(Legacy) or Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy).

Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Springs (Legacy)
Insert a Fan There are two different designs of fan tray air filters. Both designs are available in 63%
Tray Air Filter or 80% arrestance at 300 FPM—feet per minute (91.4 meters per minute) depending
(Legacy) on your installation requirements.
• Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Springs (Legacy), page 6-33
• Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy), page 6-34
Install a Fan This topic applies to the air filters for the original fan tray unit without an integrated air
Tray Air Filter ramp (pre-Release 1.4). Refer to Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air
with Springs Filter, page 6-27 if you are installing the front inlet fan tray air filter into the
(Legacy) redesigned front inlet fan tray holder with integrated air ramp unit.
The fan tray module requires a foam air filter that is placed between the fan tray
module and the top of the fan tray holder after the fan tray module is installed.
Table 6-13 Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Springs (Legacy)
Step Procedure

2 Insert the new air filter. Rotate the air filter pull-tabs out.
Springs
OPS 00058
Pull Tabs
Figure 6-24 Air Filter with Springs
3 Hold the air filter with the metal window-pane side down and the springs
to the back.
4 Insert the air filter in the gap between the fan tray card and the top of the
fan tray holder. Slide the air filter along the fan tray holder guides until the
springs on the back edge are fully compressed.
5 With the springs fully compressed, lift the front edge of the air filter up and
over the retaining flanges and release it.
6 Rotate the pull-tabs so they are parallel to the front edge of the air filter.

Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy)
Table 6-13 Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Springs (Legacy) (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Lift the fan tray holder front cover into its closed position. Tighten the
captive fasteners to secure it.
OPS 00059
Captive Fasteners
Note: The front cover closes very easily when the fan tray card and air
filter are in position. If the cover does not close easily, check the fan tray
card to make sure it is recessed from the front of the fan tray holder.
complete.
Install a Fan The following procedure provides step-by-step instructions on how to install the fan
Tray Air Filter tray filter with a handle on the front edge.
with Handle
(Legacy) Table 6-14 Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy)
Step Procedure

2 Hold the air filter with the metal window-pane side down with the handle
facing to the front.
OPS 00060
Handle
Figure 6-26 Air Filter with Handle
3 Insert the air filter in the gap between the fan tray card and the top of the
fan tray holder.

Table 6-14 Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy) (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Slide the air filter along the fan tray holder guides. Lift up on the filter
handle as you are pushing the filter towards the back of the fan tray holder.
There is an audible “click” when the air filter is in position. The handle
drops down over the front of the fan tray card.
5 Lift the fan tray holder front cover into its closed position. Tighten the
captive fasteners to secure it.
OPS 00059
Captive Fasteners
Note: The front cover closes very easily when the fan tray card and air
filter are correctly in position. If the cover does not close easily, check the
fan tray card to make sure it is recessed from the front of the fan tray
holder.
6 The Install a Fan Tray Air Filter with Handle (Legacy) procedure is
complete.


S ECTION 7 H ARDWARE I NSTALLATION P ROCEDURES
S ECTION 7
Contents
Chapter 1
Traverse System Rack Installation Overview
Traverse Shelf Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Grounding the Shelf and Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Traverse System Rack Hardware Installation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Chapter 2
Traverse System Hardware Installation
Install the Rack Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Install the Traverse Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Flush Mount a Traverse Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Install the Air Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Chapter 3
Traverse 2000 Installation into a 19-inch Rack
Vertical Traverse 2000 Rack Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Install the Horizontal Rack Adapter Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
List of Figures
Figure 7-1 Traverse 1600 Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Figure 7-2 Traverse 1600 Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-3 Front Inlet Fan Tray Connection at the Main Backplane. . . . . . . . 7-11
Figure 7-4 Fan Tray Holder Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-5 Fan Tray Cable Connection at the Main Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-6 Fan Tray Holder without Fan Tray Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-7 Air Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Figure 7-8 Traverse 2000 Vertical 19-inch (483 mm) Rack Configuration . . . 7-18
Figure 7-9 Location of Break-off Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-10 Rotated Traverse Shelf Flange Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7-11 Fan Tray Power Connection at the Main Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 7 Hardware Installation Procedures
List of Tables
Table 7-1 Traverse System Rack Hardware Installation Process . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-2 Install the Rack Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Table 7-3 Install the Traverse Shelf, Standard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Table 7-4 Install the Traverse Shelf, Flush Mount Configuration. . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Table 7-5 Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Table 7-6 Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Table 7-7 Install the Air Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Table 7-8 Install the Horizontal Rack Adapter Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Table 7-9 Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack . . . . . . . 7-20
Table 7-10 Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

SECTION 7HARDWARE INSTALLATION P ROCEDURES
Chapter 1
Traverse System Rack Installation Overview
Introduction The Traverse system consists of the following (rack) hardware installation components:
• Traverse shelf
• Fan tray holder
• Fan tray module
• Air ramp (optional equipment, depending on installation need)

This chapter provides the following information, including an instruction guide to the
procedures for installing the Traverse system components into a 7-foot (2133.6 mm)
high, 19-inch or 23-inch (483 mm or 584 mm) wide telco rack.
• Traverse Shelf Back Covers, page 7-3
• Grounding the Shelf and Fan Tray Holder, page 7-3
• Traverse System Rack Hardware Installation Process, page 7-4
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the Traverse 1600 or Traverse
Equipment and 2000 shelf and front inlet fan tray holder with integrated air ramp into a rack:
Tools • Standard 7-foot (2133.6 mm) high, 19-inch or 23-inch (483 mm or 584 mm) wide
telco rack.
• Standard conductive plated rack adapters1 (mounted with thread-forming screws)
are required for installing 19-inch (483 mm) wide equipment into a 23-inch
(584 mm) wide rack.
– (SDH network only) Standard conductive plated rack adapters may be required
for installing the Traverse 1600 and other related equipment into ETSI-specific
racks.
1
Two 2-Rack Unit (RU) rack adapters are required for Traverse 1600 front inlet fan tray holder 23-inch
(600 mm) rack installation. Two 10-RU rack adapters are required for Traverse 1600 shelf 23-inch
(600 mm) rack installation. The PDAP, Traverse 1600 shelf, and front inlet fan tray holder can be
installed in a 23-inch (600 mm) rack using two 15-RU rack adapters instead of individual rack adapters
for each piece of equipment.

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 7: Hardware Installation Procedures
Required Equipment and Tools
• Two horizontal conductive-plated rack adapter brackets (mounted with

thread-forming screws) are required for vertical-mount installation of the Traverse
2000 system into a standard 7-foot (2133.6 mm) high, 19-inch (483 mm) wide
telco rack.
• Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf
• Fan tray holder
• Air ramp (already integrated with front-inlet fan tray holder type)
• Fourteen appropriate-sized (e.g., 12-24) thread-forming screws for securing and
grounding the rack equipment. Torque screws to 65 lbs/in.
• A 5/16-inch (8 mm) socket for all thread-forming screws
• Stepladder (optional)
• A second person to lift and position the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf. The
Traverse 1600 shelf weighs 15 pounds. (6.8 kg.) without cards. The Traverse 2000
shelf weighs 16 pounds (7.2 kg) without cards.
The following other hand tools are required for the remaining installation sections of
this manual. Refer to the remaining sections in this manual for further installation
details:
• Large flat blade screwdriver for backplane covers and electrical connector modules
(ECMs)
• Large Phillips screwdriver for the fiber optic maintenance tray cover
• Small flat blade screwdriver for network interface ECM Telco cable assemblies
• Various wire-wrap, crimping, punchdown, stripping, and cutting tools (as well as
connectors) for network interface cabling (copper and coax) at an intermediate
patch panel; for timing cabling (twisted-pair or balun—twisted-pair to coax); for
DCN Ethernet and external RS-232 interfaces; and for power cabling.
• A 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver) for Traverse shelf backplane power terminal
connections
• Volt Ohm Meter (VOM) for power cabling
• A 5/16-inch (8 mm) and 7/16-inch (11 mm) socket for PDAP-4S power cabling
• A Phillips screwdriver and 5/16-inch (8 mm) socket for PDAP-15A power cabling
• A 3/8-inch (9 mm) and 9/16-inch (14 mm) socket for PDAP-2S power cabling
• Wire brush for removing paint and non-conductive material on the rack.

Chapter 1 Traverse System Rack Installation Overview
Grounding the Shelf and Fan Tray Holder
Traverse Shelf The Traverse shelf has removable back covers to provide access to the fiber optic
Back Covers backplane, main backplane, and front inlet fan tray holder connector. The covers are
easily removed for cabling, but must be replaced during normal operation to ensure
proper air flow and electromagnetic interference (EMI) protection. Refer to
Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures, Chapter 2—“Removing and
Replacing Back Covers,” page 6-9.
Grounding the The Traverse shelf and fan tray holder are grounded to the rack using thread-forming
Shelf and Fan screws (minimum of three per side) and conductive plated rack adapters for Traverse
Tray Holder 1600 23-inch (584 mm) or Traverse 2000 19-inch (483 mm) rack installation. No
additional grounding procedures are required when installed in a properly grounded
telco rack.
Important: For NEBS compliance, remove paint and any other

non-conductive coatings on the surfaces between the mounting hardware
and the rack framework. Clean all surfaces and apply an antioxidant
before joining.
WARNING! The grounding terminals on the backplane are for power terminal
cables only and SHOULD NOT be used for chassis grounding.
For power terminal cables only! WARNING! DO NOT use for

cabinet or rack grounding

Traverse System Rack Hardware Installation Process
Traverse Depending on the Traverse system rack hardware installation requirements, there are
System Rack varying procedures to complete. The following process guides you through the
Hardware procedures and gives references to meet your installation requirements.
Installation
Important: Read through the instructions completely before installing
Process the rack equipment for proper order of installation.
Table 7-1 Traverse System Rack Hardware Installation Process

2 Install a power system (if not Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling
already done). Procedures, Chapter 2—“Power System Hardware
3 Install rack adapters as necessary. • Traverse 1600 in a 23-inch (584 mm) rack. Refer
The Traverse 1600 system requires to Chapter 2—“Traverse System Hardware
rack adapters for 23-inch (584 mm) Installation,” Install the Rack Adapters, page 7-8.
rack installation. The Traverse 2000 Repeat for each Traverse system component.
system requires rack adapters for or
19-inch (483 mm) (vertical) rack
• Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch (483 mm) rack. Refer
installation.
to Chapter 3—“Traverse 2000 Installation into a
19-inch Rack,” Install the Horizontal Rack
Adapter Brackets, page 7-19. Repeat for each
Traverse 2000 system component.
4 Is the Traverse shelf going to be Chapter 2—“Traverse System Hardware Installation,”

installed directly below another Install the Air Ramp, page 7-14
vendor’s equipment? Install a
standalone air ramp.
Note: This does not apply to the
(vertical-mount) Traverse 2000 in a
19-inch (483 mm) rack.
Note: In a Turin-only equipment
installation, the standalone air ramp
is not required, but optional.

Chapter 1 Traverse System Rack Installation Overview
Table 7-1 Traverse System Rack Hardware Installation Process (continued)
5 Install the Traverse system. • Refer to Chapter 2—“Traverse System Hardware

Installation,” Install the Traverse Shelf, page 7-9
or
• Are you installing a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch
(483 mm) rack? Refer to Chapter 3—“Traverse
2000 Installation into a 19-inch Rack,” Install the
Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack,
page 7-20
6 The Rack Hardware Installation Continue to Section 8—Network Interface Cabling

Process procedure is complete. Procedures, Chapter 1—“Network Interface Cabling
Overview,” page 8-1
Note: You may choose to first proceed to
Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling
Procedures, Chapter 3—“Battery and Battery Return
Distribution,” page 10-7. Once the power cabling is
complete, follow through all other remaining sections
of this manual beginning with Section 8—Network
Interface Cabling Procedures, Chapter 1—“Network
Interface Cabling Overview,” page 8-1.


SECTION 7HARDWARE INSTALLATION P ROCEDURES
Chapter 2
Traverse System Hardware Installation
Introduction For hardware installation overview and guidelines, refer first to Chapter 1—“Traverse
System Rack Installation Overview,” page 7-1.
This chapter provides the following procedures to complete a standard
horizontal-mount installation of a Traverse shelf and fan tray holder with integrated or
separate air ramp into a standard 7-foot (2133.6 mm) high, 19-inch or 23-inch (483 mm
or 584 mm) wide telco rack.
• Install the Rack Adapters, page 7-8
• Install the Traverse Shelf, page 7-9
• Flush Mount a Traverse Shelf, page 7-10
• Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder, page 7-11
• Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp, page 7-12
• Install the Air Ramp, page 7-14

Refer to Chapter 3—“Traverse 2000 Installation into a 19-inch Rack,” page 7-17 to
complete a vertical and standard 5 inch (127 mm) forward-mount installation of the
Traverse 2000 system into a standard 7-foot (2133.6 mm) high, 19-inch (483 mm) wide
telco rack.
The instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in central office
installations. In this case, scan the topic labels in the left margin for tasks to review or
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” page 12-21.

Install the Rack Adapters
Install the Rack Use standard rack adapters to install Traverse system components into a 23-inch
Adapters (584 mm) telco rack. Rack adapters come with thread-forming mounting screws and in
various lengths depending on your installation requirements.
Install the Traverse system in the central office bay and rack designated by your
engineering work order using a minimum of six 12-24 thread-forming screws.
Table 7-2 Install the Rack Adapters
Step Procedure
1 Install conductive plated rack adapters on both sides of the rack for the
relevant Traverse system component. Align and position the rack adapter
slots with the holes in the rack.
2 Place and tighten thread-forming screws through the rack adapter slots and
into the rack. Thread-forming screws are used to ground the rack adapters
and Traverse system component to the rack. Torque screws to 65 lbs/in.
3 Within the procedures shown in the next step, you will place and tighten
screws on each side of the Traverse system component to secure it to the
rack adapters and thus the rack.
4 The Install the Rack Adapters procedure is complete.
Continue to the installation procedure for the specific Traverse system
component.
• Install the Traverse Shelf, page 7-9
• Install the Air Ramp, page 7-14

Chapter 2 Traverse System Hardware Installation
Install the Traverse Shelf
Install the Install the Traverse shelf in the central office bay and rack designated by your
Traverse Shelf engineering work order using a minimum of six 12-24 thread-forming screws.
Important: Install the first Traverse shelf below the Fuse Panel in the
rack. A 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) space is required between the Fuse Panel and
the first Traverse shelf to allow for proper air flow.
Important: If the Traverse shelf is to be installed below another vendor’s
equipment, an air ramp must be installed above the Traverse shelf.
Note: Standard conductive plated rack adapters may be required for installation. If so,
refer to Install the Rack Adapters, page 7-8.
Table 7-3 Install the Traverse Shelf, Standard Configuration
Step Procedure
1 Lift the Traverse shelf to its assigned position in the rack.

2 Align the flange holes with the holes in the rack. Each shelf flange has
three 1-RU slots at the top, middle, and bottom for easy alignment.
3 Place thread-forming screws through at least one horizontal flange slot and
two others on each side of the shelf and into the rack to maintain
squareness.
Horizontal
Flange Slot
Mount with 3
fasteners per (Use at least
side (one being a 1 horizontal
horizontal slot). flange slot
plus 2 other
fastening
points)
Figure 7-1 Traverse 1600 Shelf
4 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws. Using a level, position the

shelf.
5 After positioning the shelf, tighten the screws to secure and ground the
shelf to the rack. Torque screws to 65 lbs/in.
6 The Install the Traverse Shelf, Standard Configuration procedure is
complete.
Continue to the next procedure. Which fan tray holder type?

Flush Mount a Traverse Shelf
Flush Mount a In a standard configuration, the mounting flanges are set so the chassis or fan tray
Traverse Shelf extends out five inches from the front edge of the rack. To flush-mount the Traverse
shelf, use the following instructions.
Table 7-4 Install the Traverse Shelf, Flush Mount Configuration
Step Procedure
1 Remove the mounting flanges from each side of the chassis or fan tray.
Save the screws for remounting the flanges.
2 Rotate the flanges so the mounting bracket is toward the front of the
chassis and fan tray.
Rotate the
flanges so the
mounting bracket
is at the front of
the shelf.
Figure 7-2 Traverse 1600 Shelf
3 Re-attach the flanges to each side of the chassis or fan using the screws
removed when the mounting flanges were removed from the chassis.
4 Lift the Traverse shelf to its assigned position in the rack.
5 Align the flange holes with the holes in the rack. Each shelf flange has
three 1-RU slots at the top, middle, and bottom for easy alignment.
6 Place thread-forming screws through at least one horizontal flange slot and
two others on each side of the shelf and into the rack to maintain
squareness.
7 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws. Using a level, position the
shelf.
shelf to the rack. Torque screws to 65 lbs/in.
9 The Install the Traverse Shelf, Standard Configuration procedure is
complete.
Continue to the next procedure. Which fan tray holder type?

Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder
Install the The front inlet fan tray holder (with integrated air ramp) is required to cool the Traverse
Front Inlet Fan shelf during normal operation. Follow these installation steps.
Tray Holder
Important: Install the front inlet fan tray holder directly below the
Traverse shelf so that no gap remains in order to ensure proper air flow.
Table 7-5 Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder
Step Procedure
1 It is easier to connect the front inlet fan tray holder power cable to the
Traverse backplane before installing the front inlet fan tray holder in the
rack. Grasp the power cable and bring it out the top of the front inlet fan
tray holder.
2 Bring the fan tray holder power cable with the 18-pin connector up to its
mating connector on the Traverse main backplane. Push up on the
connector until it locks into position. The tab on the connector locks it into
place.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Main Backplane
Fan Tray Holder
Connector
Front Inlet Fan

Tray Power
Cable
Front Inlet Fan Tray

Holder Internal
Connector
Figure 7-3 Front Inlet Fan Tray Connection at the Main Backplane
3 Lift and position the fan tray holder directly below the Traverse shelf so
that there is no gap between the shelf and the fan tray holder.
Note: The front inlet fan tray holder flange has two 1-RU slots.
4 Align the flange holes with the holes on the rack.
5 Place thread-forming screws through the flange slot on each side of the
front inlet fan tray holder and into the rack.

Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp
Table 7-5 Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the front inlet fan
tray holder.
7 Tighten the screws to secure and ground the front inlet fan tray holder to
the rack. Torque screws to 65 lbs/in.
8 Complete the following procedure in Section 6—Precautions and
Common Procedures, Chapter 4—“Insert Fan Module and Air Filters,”
Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Assembly, page 6-26 to
install the fan tray module and air filter.
9 The Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder procedure is complete.
Continue to Section 8—Network Interface Cabling Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Network Interface Cabling Overview,” page 8-1.
Install the Fan The fan tray holder with separate air ramp is required to cool the Traverse shelf during
Tray Holder normal operation. The fan tray holder must be installed directly below the Traverse
with Separate shelf. Follow these fan tray holder power cabling and installation steps.
Air Ramp Note: Standard conductive plated rack adapters may be required for installation. If so,
Table 7-6 Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp
Step Procedure
1 It is easier to connect the fan tray holder power cable to the Traverse
backplane before installing the fan tray holder in the rack.
2 Remove the back panel from the fan tray holder by loosening the two
thumbscrews. The power cable is connected to the inside of the fan tray
holder back panel.
Fan Tray Holder Back Panel
Front
Figure 7-4 Fan Tray Holder Back Panel

Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp
Table 7-6 Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp (continued)
Step Procedure
mating connector on the Traverse main backplane. Push up on the 18-pin
connector until it locks into position. The tab on the connector locks it into
place.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Main Backplane
Fan Tray Holder
Connector
Fan Tray Power

Cable
Fan Tray Holder
Back Panel Fan Tray Holder Connector
Figure 7-5 Fan Tray Cable Connection at the Main Backplane
4 Lift and position the fan tray holder directly below the Traverse shelf.
Note: The fan tray holder flange has one 1-RU slot.
6 Place thread-forming screws through the flange slot on each side of the fan
tray holder and into the rack.
Figure 7-6 Fan Tray Holder without Fan Tray Module

Install the Air Ramp
Table 7-6 Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the fan tray
holder.
8 Tighten the screws to secure and ground the fan tray holder to the rack.
Torque screws to 65 lbs/in.
9 Bring the fan tray holder power cable (connected to the fan tray holder
back panel) into position at the back of the fan tray holder. Line up the
male connector to the female connector on the fan tray holder while
tightening the back panel thumb screws.
10 The Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp procedure is
complete. Continue to the next procedure, Install the Front Inlet Fan
Tray Holder, page 7-11.
Install the Air Install the air ramp directly below the fan tray holder.
Ramp
Important: If installing a Traverse shelf below another vendor’s
equipment, install a standalone air ramp directly above the Traverse shelf.
Follow these air ramp installation steps.

Table 7-7 Install the Air Ramp
Step Procedure
1 Lift and position the air ramp. See the figure in Step 2 for a front view.
Note: The air ramp flange has one 1-RU slot.
3 Place thread-forming screws through the flanges on each side of the air
ramp and into the rack.
Back
Front
Figure 7-7 Air Ramp

Table 7-7 Install the Air Ramp (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the air ramp.
5 Tighten the screws to secure the air ramp to the rack. Torque screws to
65 lbs/in.
6 Was this a standalone air ramp installation?
• Yes. Go to the next step.
• No. Prior to the introduction of the Front Inlet Fan Tray Assembly
with a built-in air ramp, system installation required an air ramp to be
installed above each legacy fan tray module. If you are installing a
legacy fan tray module, complete the procedure in
Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures, Chapter 4—“Insert
Fan Module and Air Filters,” Insert a Fan Tray Module (Legacy),
page 6-31 to install the fan tray module and air filter.
7 The Install the Air Ramp procedure is complete.
Continue to Section 8—Network Interface Cabling Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Network Interface Cabling Overview,” page 8-1.


SECTION 7+HARDWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Chapter 3
Traverse 2000 Installation into a 19-inch Rack
Introduction For hardware installation overview and guidelines, refer first to Chapter 1—“Traverse
System Rack Installation Overview,” page 7-1.
This chapter provides the following information and procedures to complete a vertical-
and standard 5 inch (127 mm) forward-mount installation of the Traverse 2000 system
into a standard 7-foot (2133.6 mm) high, 19-inch (483 mm) wide telco rack.
• Vertical Traverse 2000 Rack Configuration, page 7-18
• Install the Horizontal Rack Adapter Brackets, page 7-19
• Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack, page 7-20
• Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack, page 7-22

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 7: +Hardware Installation Procedures
Vertical Traverse 2000 Rack Configuration
Vertical The following diagram shows the configuration and specifications of a vertical
Traverse 2000 Traverse 2000 rack mount assembly.
Rack
Important: Turin recommends installing a maximum of two Traverse
Configuration
2000 systems per rack.
Horizontal Mounting Bracket
Traverse 2000 Shelf
21.7250 in
(551.82 mm)
Fan Tray Holder
Horizontal Mounting Bracket
Front View Note: Install the shelf and fan

in a standard 5-inch (127 mm)
forward-mount from the rails.
Figure 7-8 Traverse 2000 Vertical 19-inch (483 mm) Rack Configuration

Chapter 3 Traverse 2000 Installation into a 19-inch Rack
Install the Horizontal Rack Adapter Brackets
Install the Use horizontal rack adapter brackets to install the vertical-mount Traverse 2000 shelf
Horizontal and fan tray holder into a 19-inch (483 mm) telco rack. Mount the horizontal bracket to
Rack Adapter the rack rails using two thread-forming screws per side.
Brackets
Important: Position the horizontal brackets so that there is
21.7250 inches (551.82 mm) of vertical space between the bottom of the
upper bracket and the top of the lower bracket to mount the Traverse 2000
system vertically.
Important: Each horizontal bracket has the word “left” on it to identify

the necessary left-side alignment as you face the front of the rack.
Table 7-8 Install the Horizontal Rack Adapter Brackets
Step Procedure
1 Lift the upper horizontal bracket to its assigned rack position and align the
bracket slots with the rack holes, maintaining squareness.
2 Place and tighten thread-forming screws through the bracket slots and into
the rack. Thread-forming screws are used to ground the rack adapters and
any Traverse system component to the rack.
3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the lower horizontal bracket.
4 The Install the Horizontal Rack Adapter Brackets procedure is complete.
Continue to the next procedure, Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder
in a 19-inch Rack, page 7-20.

Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack
Install the The front inlet fan tray holder (with integrated air ramp) is required to cool the Traverse
Front Inlet Fan shelf during normal operation. Follow these installation steps.
Tray Holder in
Important: Install the front inlet fan tray holder so that it will be flush
a 19-inch Rack
with the bottom of the Traverse shelf and so no gap remains, thus ensuring
proper air flow.
Table 7-9 Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack
Step Procedure
1 Remove the tabs on each side of the fan tray holder prior to installing the
fan tray holder in the rack. To remove, bend the tabs back and forth until
the tab breaks off.
Figure 7-9 Location of Break-off Tabs
2 Lift and rotate the fan tray holder to its assigned vertical and standard
5 inch (127 mm) forward-mount rack position.
Note: The bottom of the fan tray holder faces the right-front rack rail.
3 Align the fan tray holder flange holes with the holes in the horizontal rack
adapter brackets (on the right, facing the rack front).
4 Place a thread-forming screw through the center of the left 1-RU flange
slot on each end of the front inlet fan tray holder and into the rack.
Note: The front inlet fan tray holder flange has two 1-RU slots.
5 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the front inlet fan
tray holder.

Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack
Table 7-9 Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Tighten the screws to secure and ground the front inlet fan tray holder to
the rack.
7 The Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch Rack procedure is
complete.
Continue to the next procedure, Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch
Rack, page 7-22.

Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack
Install a Install the Traverse 2000 shelf in the central office bay and 19-inch (483 mm) rack
Traverse 2000 designated by your engineering work order using a minimum of six thread-forming
in a 19-inch screws.
Rack Important: Install the first Traverse shelf below the Fuse Panel.
Table 7-10 Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack
Step Procedure
1 Lift the Traverse 2000 shelf to its assigned rack vertical and standard
5 inch (127 mm) forward-mount position.
2 Align the shelf flange holes with the holes in the horizontal rack adapter
brackets (starting from the left, facing the rack front).
3 Place and partially tighten a thread-forming screw through the center
horizontal flange slot of the upper and lower shelf flanges. You will place
the remaining screws in a following step.
Mount with 3 fasteners per
flange (one being the
center horizontal flange
slot).
Figure 7-10 Rotated Traverse Shelf Flange Slots
4 Before completing the shelf installation, connect the power cable for the
front inlet fan tray holder to the Traverse backplane.
Grasp the power cable and bring it out the top of the front inlet fan tray
holder.

Table 7-10 Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack (continued)
Step Procedure
mating connector on the Traverse main backplane. Push in the connector
until it locks into position. The tab on the connector locks it into place.
Front Inlet Fan Main Backplane
Tray Power Fan Tray Holder
Cable Connector
6
1
Front Inlet Fan Tray
5
1
Holder Internal
4
1
Connector
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Figure 7-11 Fan Tray Power Connection at the Main Backplane
6 Is the Traverse shelf flush with the fan tray holder?

• No. Move the Traverse shelf flush with the fan tray holder.
Note: If space still remains between the fan tray and the Traverse shelf,
loosen the fan tray holder screws, move the fan try until it is flush with the
shelf, then retighten the screws.
7 Place the remaining two thread-forming screws on each end of the shelf
and into the horizontal rack adapter brackets, maintaining squareness.
8 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the shelf using a
level as necessary.
shelf to the rack.
10 The Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack procedure is complete.
Continue to and complete the procedures in Section 6—Precautions and
Common Procedures, Chapter 4—“Insert Fan Module and Air Filters,”
page 6-25 to install the fan tray module and air filter.


S ECTION 8 N ETWORK I NTERFACE C ABLING
P ROCEDURES
S ECTION 3NETWORK INTERFACE CABLING
Contents
Chapter 1
Network Interface Cabling Overview
Fiber Optic Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Electrical Connector Module Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cable Tags and Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Installation of Fiber Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Installation of Clear Heat Shrink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Chapter 2
Fiber Optic Cabling Procedures
MPX Fiber Optic Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Fiber Optic GbE-10 SCM Cabling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Inserting and Removing SFPs at the SCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Insert an SFP into the SCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Remove an SFP from the SCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Install Fiber Optic Cables at the SCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Fiber Optic Transmit and Receive Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 3
DS1 and E1 Cabling Procedures
Plug-in Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Cabling at the DS1/E1 ECM. . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Panel Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
E1 (75 ohm) Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
E1 (75 ohm) Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Chapter 4
Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
DS3 and E3 Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Chapter 5
Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 8 Network Interface Cabling Procedures
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Plug-in Ethernet Protection ECM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Ethernet Protection Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module. . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Unprotected 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . 8-45
List of Figures
Figure 8-1 Fiber Cable Management Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-2 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-3 Traverse 600 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Figure 8-4 Replace Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Figure 8-5 SFP with Bottom-Tab Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-6 Example of SFPs with SCM Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-7 Fiber Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-10 DS1/E1 ECM—Unprotected Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Figure 8-11 DS1/E1 ECM Drain Wire Stud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Figure 8-12 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Figure 8-13 3-Slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Figure 8-14 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Figure 8-15 2-Slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Figure 8-16 3-Slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Figure 8-17 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM Connectors . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Figure 8-19 GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX Cabling using the ECM . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Figure 8-20 Ethernet Protection ECM Drain Wire Stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Figure 8-22 10/100BaseTX Cabling using the ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
List of Tables
Table 8-1 10-port GbE Card SFP Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-2 Fiber Optic Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-3 Insert an SFP into the SCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 8-4 Remove an SFP from the SCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Table 8-5 Connect Fiber-Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Table 8-6 Plug-in DS1/E1 or E1 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Table 8-7 DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) ECM Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Table 8-8 DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Table 8-9 E1 (75 ohm) ECM Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Table 8-10 E1 (75 ohm) Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Table 8-11 Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Table 8-12 DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . 8-30
Table 8-13 DS3 and E3 Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Table 8-14 Plug-in Ethernet Protection Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . 8-39

Table 8-15 Protected GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the ECM . . . . . 8-40
Table 8-16 Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Table 8-17 Unprotected 10/100BaseTX Cabling, Electrical Connector Module8-45


SECTION 8NETWORK INTERFACE C ABLING P ROCEDURES
Chapter 1
Network Interface Cabling Overview
Introduction Traverse network interface cabling support for optical fiber and electrical (copper and
coax) cards is as follows:
Fiber Optic Cabling

The Traverse shelf uses MPX optical fiber connectors to provide high-capacity and
high-density and easy-operation fiber connection for optical interface cards:
SONET/SDH and Gigabit Ethernet.
The Traverse shelf also provides a small form-factor pluggable (SFP) connector
module (SCM) to support high-density and easy-operation fiber connection for the
10-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE-10) card. The GbE-10 card must be ordered with a
10-port SFP connector module (SCM).
See Chapter 2—“Fiber Optic Cabling Procedures,” page 8-3.
Electrical Connector Module Cabling

The Traverse shelf uses electrical connector modules (ECMs) to provide
easy-operation connection for copper and coax interface cards using industry-standard
cables and connectors.
This section includes the following electrical network interface cabling chapters:
• Chapter 3—“DS1 and E1 Cabling Procedures,” page 8-15
• Chapter 4—“DS3 and E3 Cabling Procedures,” page 8-27
• Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures,” page 8-37
For network interface specifications, refer first to Section 2—Network Interface
Specifications.
Cable Tags and Designations

Turin recommends that all cables have designation tags on each end displaying the
termination point from which they are cabled.
Installation of Fiber Paper

Turin recommends that all cables (data, voice and power) be wrapped in fiber paper
when it exits the racking and again as it enters the cabinet or the relay rack.

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 8: Network Interface Cabling Procedures
Installation of Clear Heat Shrink

Turin recommends that all compression connectors (crimp lugs) have clear heat shrink
applied. This process allows for inspection of the crimp, verification of the die code, as
well as, viewing the cable in the inspection hole.

S ECTION 8NETWORK INTERFACE CABLING PROCEDURES
Chapter 2
Fiber Optic Cabling Procedures
Introduction For Ethernet and SONET/SDH fiber optic cabling specifications, refer first to
Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 1—“Fiber Optic Interface
Cabling Specifications,” page 2-1 and Section 5—Cable Management Specifications,
Chapter 1—“Cable Management Specifications,” page 5-1.
This chapter provides the following installation procedures to complete fiber optic
cabling at the Traverse main backplane.
• MPX Fiber Optic Cabling, page 8-4
• Fiber Optic GbE-10 SCM Cabling Procedures, page 8-9
– Inserting and Removing SFPs at the SCM, page 8-9
– Install Fiber Optic Cables at the SCM, page 8-12
• Fiber Optic Transmit and Receive Testing, page 8-13
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Network Cabling
Checklist, page 12-25.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to make fiber cable connections to the
Equipment and fiber optic patch panel or Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) and the Traverse fiber
Tools optic backplane with MPX connectors:
• Fiber optic patch panel (optional)
• Fiber optic cables with MPX:
– 16-, 8-, 4- or 2-fiber (SC/FC/ST/LC) single mode ribbon cable(s) with female
MPX connectors at both ends for termination to an optional fiber optic patch
panel
or
– 16-, 8-, 4- or 2-fiber (SC/FC/ST/LC) single mode cable(s) with a female MPX
connector at one end; the other end of the fiber optic cable may have an MPX
connector or fan-out to single fiber connectors
• Large Phillips screwdriver for the fiber optic management tray cover
• Fiber optic cables with SFP connector module (SCM) for 10-port GbE (GbE-10)
cards:

MPX Fiber Optic Cabling
– 2-slot-wide, 10-port SCM for GbE-10 cards

– SFPs with duplex LC connector (per Turin’s recommendations)
Table 8-1 10-port GbE Card SFP Types
Model Number SFP Description
SFP-1000BASE-SX850 1000Base-SX SFP, MMF, 850 nm (customer installable)
SFP-1000BASE-LX1310 1000Base-LX SFP, SMF, 1310 nm (customer installable)
SFP-1000BASE-ZX1550 1000Base-ZX SFP, SMF, 1550 nm (customer installable)
SPF-1000BASE-TX 1000Base-TX SFP, Copper, RJ-45 connector (customer installable)
– 2-fiber (LC) single mode or multi-mode (as appropriate for the chosen SFP)
ribbon cable(s) with male SFP LC connectors at both ends for termination to
an optional fiber optic patch panel. For multi-mode, fiber is up to 500 m on
50/125 micro-meter MMF, 300 m on 62.5/125 micro-meter MMF
or
– 4-pair, twisted pair category 5 UTP with male RJ-45 connectors at both ends
for termination to an optional patch panel (for GbE-TX termination).
MPX Fiber Ribbon fiber cabling from the fiber optic patch panel or ODF should match the fiber
Optic Cabling position number or color code stated for the fiber optic cards for the most effective fiber
management. Refer to Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 1—“Fiber
Optic Interface Cabling Specifications,” General MPX Connector to Optical Fiber
Port Assignment, page 2-9.
WARNING! The Traverse system is a class 1 product that contains a

class IIIb laser and is intended for operation in a closed environment
transmitter with power applied. Laser output is invisible, and eye



Chapter 2 Fiber Optic Cabling Procedures
Transmit and receive fiber optic cables are connected to and run from the central office
ODF across the horizontal cable racks to the Traverse shelf or to an intermediate fiber
optic patch panel and then to the Traverse shelf.

backplane.
Important: Fiber optic cable is very fragile. Be careful when handling

Follow these steps to connect fiber optic cables from the fiber optic patch panel or ODF
to the Traverse fiber optic backplane.
Table 8-2 Fiber Optic Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Connect the fiber optic cables to the intermediate fiber optic patch panel or
the ODF.
2 Route the fiber optic cables from the patch panel or ODF across the
horizontal cable rack and down the rack rails to the Traverse shelf
following local procedures.
3 Which shelf type?
• Traverse 600. Route the cables down the rack through the top of the
fiber cable management tray.
• Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000. Route the cables to the left or right
side of the fiber cable management tray. If your local procedures
support routing fiber optic cables on either side of the rack, route
cables for:
– Traverse 1600 slots 1 through 8/Traverse 2000 slots 1 through 10,
to the right side of the tray when facing the back of the shelf.
– Traverse 1600 slots 9 through 16/Traverse 2000 slots 11 through
20, to the left side of the tray when facing the back of the shelf.

Table 8-2 Fiber Optic Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Remove the cover on the fiber cable management tray. Refer to

Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Chapter 2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers,” page 6-9 for
detailed instructions.
Captive
Fasteners
Cover
Fiber Cable Fiber optic cable

Management Tray is routed out to the
left or right side
Fiber optic cable

is routed out to the
left or right side
Figure 8-1 Fiber Cable Management Tray
5 Route the cables along the bottom (or the left side if a Traverse 600) of the
tray and bring the cable(s) to the correct Traverse fiber optic backplane slot
location.
Note: Optical cards with 8 or more ports require a receive (RX) and
transmit (TX) cable.
6 Remove the dust cap from the MPX cable connector.
Note: The MPX cable connector must be visually inspected and/or
cleaned using specific MPX cleaning supplies just before the card is
placed in the shelf and the Traverse node is powered up. Turin
recommends this inspection and cleaning procedure be done as part of card
placement. Refer to Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,

Step Procedure
7 Align the white reference marker on the MPX connector with the white
stripe on the left side of the receiving fiber optic backplane housing.
Note: For a Traverse 600 shelf type, see the graphic in the next step.
White Stripe Reference
Markers
Housing A
(upper)
Housing B
(lower)
Figure 8-2 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B
For further specifications, refer to Section 2—Network Interface

Specifications, Chapter 1—“Fiber Optic Interface Cabling Specifications,”
General MPX Connector to Optical Fiber Port Assignment, page 2-9.

Step Procedure
8 Align the white reference marker on the MPX connector with the white
stripe on the left side of the Traverse 600 fiber optic backplane housing.
White Stripe
Reference Markers
Housing A
Housing B
Figure 8-3 Traverse 600 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B
9 Gently push the MPX connector into the fiber optic backplane housing.
10 Repeat Steps 5 through 9 for each fiber optic cable.

Inserting and Removing SFPs at the SCM
Step Procedure
11 Replace the cover on the fiber cable management tray to hold the cables in
place. Refer to Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Cover
Fiber Cable Management Tray
Figure 8-4 Replace Covers
12 The Fiber Optic Cabling procedure is complete.

Do you have other network interface connections?
• Yes. Repeat ECM and cabling connections for all network interfaces.
• No. Continue to Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling
Procedures, Chapter 1—“Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling
Overview,” page 9-1.
Fiber Optic These procedure describes how to install the SFPs and fiber cables into the SCM.
GbE-10 SCM • Inserting and Removing SFPs at the SCM, page 8-9
Cabling • Install Fiber Optic Cables at the SCM, page 8-12
Procedures
Inserting and The Traverse shelf comes equipped with GbE-10 cards that support GbE SX, LX, ZX,
Removing and TX SFP transceivers at the 1-port GbE SCM.
SFPs at the
Important: Only use SFPs approved by Turin or equipment damage may
SCM
occur, thus voiding any Traverse warranty.
Each SCM has ten sockets for SFPs. The SFPs are hot swappable, i.e., they can be
removed or inserted while the system is on.
SFP latches vary, depending on the manufacturer. The procedures below show SFPs
with bale-clasp latches. Some SFPs have tabs on the bottom that click into place when

Insert an SFP into the SCM
inserted. To remove these SFPs, you grasp the SFP between thumb and forefinger,
pressing the latch to release it as you pull the SFP gently from the socket.
Figure 8-5 SFP with Bottom-Tab Latch
See the following topics for procedures on inserting and removing SFPs in the Traverse
shelf:
• Insert an SFP into the SCM, page 8-10
• Remove an SFP from the SCM, page 8-11
Insert an SFP Follow these steps to insert SFPs into the GbE-10 SCM, keeping in mind that the
into the SCM latches on your SFPs may vary slightly from the ones shown.

times while handling SFPs.
Table 8-3 Insert an SFP into the SCM
Step Procedure
1 Verify that the SFP is correct.

2 Orient the SFP into the SCM as shown in the figure below.
Note: All SFP sockets are oriented either 90 degrees counter-clockwise
(odd numbered ports) or 90 degrees clockwise (even numbered ports) with
the top facing out from the SCM housing.
Ports 1 & 2
RX TX
Top of Top of
SFP SFP
TX RX
Port 1 Port 2
Figure 8-6 Example of SFPs with SCM Orientation
3 Move the bail clasp down to unlatch it before inserting it into the slot.
4 Slide the SFP into the slot and move the bail clasp up (or, depending on the
type of SFP, move it down) to secure it.
5 The Insert an SFP into the SCM procedure is complete. Continue to the
next procedure Install Fiber Optic Cables at the SCM, page 8-12.

Remove an SFP from the SCM
Remove an Follow these steps to remove SFPs from the GbE-10 SCM, keeping in mind that the
SFP from the latches on your SFPs may vary slightly from the ones shown.
SCM
times while handling Traverse SFPs.
Table 8-4 Remove an SFP from the SCM
Step Procedure
1 Disconnect the network fiber-optic cable from the SFP transceiver module
connector, and insert the dust plugs in the SFP transceiver optical bores
and the fiber-optic cable LC connectors.
For reattachment of fiber-optic cables, note which connector plug is
transmit (TX) and which is receive (RX).
2 Pull the bale-clasp latch out and down (or up, depending on the SFP type)
to eject the SFP transceiver from the socket connector.
If the bale-clasp latch is obstructed and you cannot use your index finger to
open it, use a small, flat-blade screwdriver or other long, narrow
instrument to open the bale-clasp latch.
3 Grasp the SFP transceiver between your thumb and index finger, and
carefully remove it from the socket.
If your SFP has a bottom tab, grasp the SFP between thumb and index
finger, pressing the tab to release the catch, and carefully remove it from
the socket.
4 The Remove an SFP from the SCM procedure is complete.

Install Fiber Optic Cables at the SCM
Install Fiber The Traverse shelf also provides a small form-factor pluggable (SFP) connector
Optic Cables at module (SCM) to support high-density and easy-operation fiber connection for the
the SCM 10-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE-10) card.
Transmit and receive fiber optic cables are connected to and run from the central office
ODF across the horizontal cable racks to the Traverse shelf or to an intermediate fiber
optic patch panel and then to the Traverse shelf.
WARNING! The Traverse system is a class 1 product that contains a

class IIIb laser and is intended for operation in a closed environment
transmitter with power applied. Laser output is invisible, and eye



backplane.
Important: Fiber optic cable is very fragile, be careful when handling

Follow these steps to install the fiber optic cables into the SFP housing at the SCM.
Table 8-5 Connect Fiber-Optic Cables
Step Procedure
1 Remove the plug from the SFP module so that you can insert the cables.
Save the plug for future use.
2 Remove the plugs from the cables and save them as well.

Fiber Optic Transmit and Receive Testing
Table 8-5 Connect Fiber-Optic Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Attach the optical fiber cables directly to the SFP module, one cable for
transmit (TX) and the second for receive (RX).
Figure 8-7 Fiber Cables
4 Route the cable to the right or left, as appropriate, and over the cable
management bar for support.
5 The Connect Fiber-Optic Cables procedure is complete.
Fiber Optic Refer to the Node Operations and Maintenance Guide, Section 4—Diagnostics,
Transmit and Chapter 2—“Traverse Transmit and Receive Signal Levels” for acceptable
Receive minimum/maximum output power and receiver levels.
Testing

Fiber Optic Transmit and Receive Testing

Chapter 3
Introduction For DS1/E1 (Telco 64) and E1 (Mini-SMB) electrical connector module (ECM)
specifications, refer first to Section 2—Network Interface Specifications,
Chapter 3—“DS1 and E1 Interface Cabling Specifications,” page 2-23 and
Section 5—Cable Management Specifications, Chapter 1—“Cable Management
This chapter provides the following installation procedures to complete cabling at the
Traverse main backplane using a DS1/E1 or E1 ECM.
• Plug-in Electrical Connector Module, page 8-17
• DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Cabling at the DS1/E1 ECM, page 8-18
• DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Panel Cabling, page 8-23
• E1 (75 ohm) Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 8-24
• E1 (75 ohm) Panel Cabling, page 8-26
Required The following equipment and tools are required to make DS1 and E1 cable connections
Equipment and at the ECMs, an optional DS1 or E1 intermediate patch and/or to the central office
Tools cross-connect panel:
• DS1/E1 ECMs (Telco 64). Each ECM supports one or two working and one
protection card, or two unprotected cards.
• E1 ECMs (Mini-SMB). Each ECM supports one or two working and one
protection card, or two unprotected cards.
• Cables for each DS1/E1 ECM (Telco 64):

Important: Turin Networks manufactures a Turin Telco 64 cable assembly

for DS1 and E1 cabling with DS1/E1 EMCs. The Turin Telco 64 cable
assembly provides additional shielding and passes all requirements for
Telcordia NEBS, FCC Class B and ETSI Class B electromagnetic
interference (EMI) testing.
Industry-standard 32-pair, 24 ASG cable with a 180º Telco 64 male
connector may be used as an option to the Turin Telco 64 cable assembly;
however, these cables may not meet Telcordia, FCC and ETSI EMI test
requirements.
– 50- or 75-foot Turin Telco 64 cable assembly. One cable assembly is required
for each ECM1 for 1:1 equipment protection, two cable assemblies are required
per ECM for unprotected cabling
or
– Standard 32 pair, 24 AWG cable with 180º 64 position male Telco 64
(CHAMP) connector at one end. Two cables are required per ECM for 1:1
equipment protection, four cables are required per ECM for 1:2 equipment
protection or unprotected cabling
• Cables for each E1 ECM (Mini-SMB):
– AT&T 735A equivalent coax cable with male Mini-SMB connectors
– 84 (75 ohm Mini-SMB) cables are required per 3-slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB)
ECM for 1:2 equipment protection
• The following item is required to make 100 ohm or 120 ohm connections at an
optional intermediate patch or cross-connect panel.
– Wire wrap tool to terminate DS1 or E1 Telco 64 cabling at an optional
intermediate patch and/or central office cross-connect panel
• The following items are required to make 75 ohm connections at the patch panel
and/or cross-connect panel:
– 75 ohm Mini-SMB socket connectors
– Diagonal cutters
– Coax center crimp tool
– Coax cable stripping tool
– Coax crimp tool
• Large flat blade screwdriver for ECMs
• Small flat blade screwdriver for ECM Telco cable assemblies
1
The Turin Telco 64 cable assembly has male Telco 64 connectors at both ends. The cable assembly is cut
in half and used to connect to the two Telco 64 connectors on the ECM. The other end is wire wrapped at
the optional DS1 or E1 intermediate patch panel or at the cross-connect panel.

Chapter 3 DS1 and E1 Cabling Procedures
Plug-in Electrical Connector Module
Plug-in DS1/E1 and E1 ECMs plug into two (upper and lower) 2 mm connectors of the
Electrical corresponding odd or even slot on the Traverse main backplane.
Connector
Module
(ESD) wrist strap when making connections to the Traverse main
backplane.
Follow these steps to plug-in DS1/E1 or E1 ECMs:
Table 8-6 Plug-in DS1/E1 or E1 Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Are DS1/E1 or E1 ECMs plugged into the main backplane?

• Yes. Continue to the next appropriate procedure:
– DS1/E1 ECM (Telco 64) — DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm)
ECM Cabling
– E1 ECM (Mini-SMB) — E1 (75 ohm) ECM Cabling
• No. Continue to Step 2.
2 The Traverse shelf may have blank back covers in place over the 2 mm
connectors on main backplane. Remove the blank back covers from the
Traverse shelf as required for placement of ECMs. Refer to
3 Line up the ECM with two 2 mm connectors (upper and lower) of the
corresponding odd or even (“protecting”) slot on the main backplane.
Refer to Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 3—“DS1
and E1 Interface Cabling Specifications,” DS1 and E1 ECM Placement,
page 2-24.
4 Push straight in on the ECM until firmly in place.
5 Secure the ECM by tightening the two spring-loaded screws using a flat
blade screwdriver.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each ECM as required.
7 The Plug-in DS1/E1 or E1 Electrical Connector Module procedure is
complete. Continue to the next appropriate procedure:
• DS1/E1 ECM— DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) ECM Cabling
• E1 ECM— E1 (75 ohm) ECM Cabling

DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Cabling at the DS1/E1 ECM
DS1 (100 ohm) DS1 or E1 cables are connected to the DS1/E1 ECM and then terminated at an
and E1 intermediate DS1 or E1 patch panel and/or directly to the central office cross-connect
(120 ohm) panel.
Cabling at the Note: For cable-specific pinout information, refer to the relevant specification in
DS1/E1 ECM Section 2—Network Interface Specifications:
• Table 2-13 DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes
(VT Mapped, DS1 and E1 Cabling), page 2-31
• or Table 2-14 DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes
(DS3 Mapped—G.747, E1 Cabling Only), page 2-32 (SDH network only)
(ESD) wrist strap when making cable connections.
Important: If an intermediate DS1 or E1 patch panel is used it must be

properly grounded in a equipment rack.
Follow these steps to make DS1 and E1 cable connections at the DS1/E1 electrical
connector module:
Table 8-7 DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) ECM Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Connect the DS1 and E1 cables with male Telco 64 connectors into the
DS1/E1 ECM based on the cabling scheme:
• 1:1 protection. Go to Step 2.
• 1:2 protection. Go to Step 3.
• Unprotected. Go to Step 4.
2 • 1:1 protection.

DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+1
Top 2 (I and O)
Output (O) Connector for Connectors are used
DS1 Ports 1–28 for 1:1 Protection
or E1 Ports 1-21 Cabling
of Slot n+1
Note: Plug the

DS1/E1 ECM into
Slot n 2 mm main
backplane
connectors

Table 8-7 DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) ECM Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
3 1:2 protection.
DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+2
Output (O) Connector
for DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+2
Top and Bottom
4 (2-I and 2-O)
Connectors are used
for 1:2 Protection
Cabling
Input (I) Connector

for
DS1 Ports 1–28
E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n
Note: Plug the
DS1/E1 ECM into Output (O) Connector
Slot n+1 2 mm for DS1 Ports 1–28
main backplane E1 Ports 1-21
connectors of Slot n

4 Unprotected.
Input (I) Connector
for
DS1 Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n+1
Output (O)
Connector for DS1
Ports 1–28
or E1 Ports 1-21 Top and Bottom
of Slot n+1 4 (2-I and 2-O)
Connectors are used
for Unprotected
Cabling
Input (I) Connector
for
DS1 Ports 1–28
E1 Ports 1-21
Note: Plug the of Slot n
DS1/E1 ECM into
Slot n 2 mm main Output (O)
backplane Connector for DS1
connectors Ports 1–28
E1 Ports 1-21
of Slot n
Figure 8-10 DS1/E1 ECM—Unprotected Connectors

5 Tighten screws on Telco 64 connectors to secure cables to the ECM using
a small flat blade screwdriver.

Step Procedure
6 Important: The Turin Telco 64 cable assembly has a drain wire. Connect
each cable drain wire to a DS1/E1 ECM drain wire stud. Do not stack
ground lugs onto the same stud.
Drain Wire Studs
Figure 8-11 DS1/E1 ECM Drain Wire Stud

7 Label DS1 or E1 cables output (O) and input (I) following local
procedures.
8 Provide enough slack in the cables and bring them out the right side of the
shelf.
9 Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for cabling at each DS1/E1 ECM.

Step Procedure
10 Tie-wrap cables to the cable management bar following local procedures.
Cables to the
right or left
side
Cable
management
bars
Figure 8-12 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar(s)

11 Is an intermediate DS1 or E1 patch panel installed in an equipment rack
for termination of the DS1 or E1 cables?
• Yes. Route the cables to the intermediate patch panel located in the
same or adjacent rack per local procedures.
• No. Route the cables up the rack rails to the horizontal cable racks and
over to the central office cross-connect panel per local procedures.
12 Cut DS1 or E1 cables to the correct length using cable cutters.
13 Important: The Turin Telco 64 cable assembly is shielded. Connect a
ground wire to the shielding. Connect the ground wire to the equipment
rack following local procedures.
14 Use a wire wrap tool to terminate DS1 or E1 cables at the intermediate
patch panel or cross-connect panel.
Note: Each working 28-port DS1 card requires 28 output and 28 input
terminations at an intermediate patch panel or central office cross-connect
panel. Each working/protection 21-port E1 card requires 21 Transmit/OUT
and 21 Receive/IN terminations at an intermediate patch panel or central
office cross-connect panel.

Step Procedure
15 Where did you terminate the DS1 or E1 cables?
• Central office cross-connect panel. Go to the next step.
• Intermediate patch panel. Continue to the next procedure, DS1
(100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Panel Cabling.
16 The DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) ECM Cabling procedure is
complete.

DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Panel Cabling
DS1 (100 ohm) Follow these steps to make the connection at an intermediate DS1 or E1 patch panel
and E1 and the central office cross-connect panel:
(120 ohm)
Panel Cabling Table 8-8 DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Panel Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) DS1 or E1 cables to the intermediate
DS1 or E1 patch panel using a wire wrap tool.
Note: Each working 28-port DS1 card requires 28 output and 28 input
connections at the patch panel (for each DS1 cable terminated) and at the
cross-connect panel. Each working 21-port E1 card requires 21 output and
21 input connections at the patch panel (for each E1 cable terminated) and
at the cross-connect panel.
2 Label the cables to designate Output and Input per local procedures.
3 Route the cables from the patch panel across the horizontal cable rack to
the cross-connect panel, per local procedures.
4 Cut the cables to the correct length using cable cutters.
5 Terminate Output and Input cables on the cross-connect panel using a wire
wrap tool.
6 Repeat Step 1 through 5 for each DS1 or E1 cable terminated at an
intermediate DS1 or E1 patch panel.
7 The DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Panel Cabling is complete.

E1 (75 ohm) Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
E1 (75 ohm) E1 cables are connected to the ECM and then terminated at an intermediate patch panel
Cabling at the and/or directly to the central office cross-connect panel.
Electrical
Connector
Module
Important: If an intermediate patch panel is used, it must be properly

grounded in an equipment rack.
Follow these steps to make E1 cable connections at the E1 ECM.
Table 8-9 E1 (75 ohm) ECM Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Connect the 21-port E1 card cables with 75 ohm Mini-SMB connectors

into the ECM connector. A total of 84 (2x21 input and 2x21 output) coax
cables are required for each 3-slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM for a 1:2
protection scheme.
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Figure 8-13 3-Slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM Connectors
2 Label E1 coax cables to designate Output (1_OUT through 21_OUT) and

Input (1_IN through 21_IN) following local procedures.
shelf.

E1 (75 ohm) Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
Table 8-9 E1 (75 ohm) ECM Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Repeat Steps 1–6 for cabling at each E1 ECM.

Important: Mount a second cable management bar for strain relief with
Mini-SMB ECM cabling. Optionally, use a second cable management bar
for any copper cabling exiting the rear of the shelf.
Cable
Management
Bar
E1 Cables to
the Right Side
Figure 8-14 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar
6 Is an intermediate patch panel installed in an equipment rack for

termination of the cables?
over to the central office cross-connect panel per local procedures.
7 Cut E1 cables to the correct length using diagonal cutters.
Important: E1 coax cable length, from the Traverse shelf to the
intermediate patch panel or cross-connect panel, must not exceed 450 feet
(137 meters) to meet pulse template requirements.
8 Strip and terminate connectors on the cables using a coax stripping tool
and crimp tool.
9 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) coax cables on intermediate patch
panel or central office cross-connect panel.

E1 (75 ohm) Panel Cabling
Table 8-9 E1 (75 ohm) ECM Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
10 Where did you terminate the E1 cables?

• Central office cross-connect panel. Go to the next step.
• Intermediate patch panel. Continue to the next procedure, E1
(75 ohm) Panel Cabling.
11 The E1 (75 ohm) ECM Cabling procedure is complete.
E1 (75 ohm) Follow these steps to make cable connections from an intermediate patch panel to the
Panel Cabling central office cross-connect panel.
Table 8-10 E1 (75 ohm) Panel Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) coax cables to the intermediate E1
patch panel using 75 ohm Mini-SMB connectors.
2 Label the cables to designate Output (1_OUT through 21_OUT) and Input
(1_IN through 21_IN) per local procedures.
the central office cross-connect panel, per local procedures.
4 Cut the cables to the correct length using diagonal cutters.
and crimp tool.
6 Terminate Output and Input cables on the cross-connect panel using
75 ohm Mini-SMB connectors.
7 Repeat Step 1 through 6 for each E1 cable terminated at an
intermediate patch panel.
8 The E1 (75 ohm) Panel Cabling procedure is complete.

Chapter 4
Introduction For DS3/E3 electrical connector module (ECM) specifications, refer first to
Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 4—“DS3 and E3 Interface
Cabling Specifications,” page 2-35 and Section 5—Cable Management Specifications,
Chapter 1—“Cable Management Specifications,” page 5-1.
This chapter provides the following installation procedures to complete cabling at the
Traverse main backplane using an DS3/E3 ECM.
• Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module, page 8-29
• DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 8-30
• DS3 and E3 Panel Cabling, page 8-35

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make DS3 and E3 cable connections
Equipment and at the ECMs, an optional DS3 or E3 intermediate patch panel, and/or to the central
Tools office DSX-3 cross-connect panel:
• 2-slot and/or 3-slot ECMs:
– 2-slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM(s). Each ECM supports a pair of 12-port
DS3/E3 cards (1 working and 1 protecting) in a 1:1 protection group
– 3-slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM(s). Each ECM supports a triad of 12-port
DS3/E3/EC-1 cards (2 working and 1 protecting) in a 1:2 protection group
– 3-slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM(s). Each ECM supports a triad of
24-port DS3/E3/EC-1, UTMX-24, or UTMX-48 cards (2 working and 1
protecting) in a 1:2 protection group
• AT&T 734A or 735A equivalent coax cable with male 75 ohm BNC or Mini-SMB
connectors.
– 24 (75 ohm BNC) cables are required per 2-slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM
for 1:1 equipment protection
– 48 (75 ohm BNC) cables are required per 3-slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM
for 1:2 equipment protection
– 96 (75 ohm Mini-SMB) cables are required per 3-slot DS3/E3 (48-port
Mini-SMB) ECM for 1:2 equipment protection
• An optional DS3 or E3 intermediate patch panel.
• The following items are required to make connections at the patch panel and/or
DSX-3 cross-connect panel:
– AT&T 734A or 735A equivalent cable
– 75 ohm BNC socket connectors
– 75 ohm Mini-SMB socket connectors
– Diagonal cutters
– Coax center crimp tool
– Coax cable stripping tool
– Coax crimp tool
• Large flat blade screwdriver for electrical connector modules (ECMs)

Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module
Plug-in DS3/E3 DS3/E3 ECMs plug into the two (upper and lower) 2 mm connectors of the
Electrical corresponding odd or even slot on the Traverse main backplane.
Connector
Module
backplane.
Follow these steps to plug-in DS3/E3 ECMs.
Table 8-11 Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Are DS3/E3 ECMs plugged into the main backplane?

• Yes. Continue to the next procedure, DS3 and E3 Cabling at the
Electrical Connector Module.
3 Line up the DS3/E3 ECM with the 2 mm connectors (upper and lower) of
the corresponding odd or even (“protecting”) slot on the main backplane.
Note: The protecting slot is the right-most slot for 2-slot ECMs and the
center slot for 3-slot ECMs (when viewed from the back of the shelf).
Refer to Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 4—“DS3
and E3 Interface Cabling Specifications,” DS3/E3 ECM Placement,
page 2-36.
5 Secure the ECM by tightening the two spring-loaded screws using a flat
blade screwdriver.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each DS3/E3 ECM as required.
7 The Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module procedure is complete.
Continue to the next procedure, DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical
Connector Module.

DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
DS3 and E3 DS3 and E3 cables are connected to the ECM and then terminated at an intermediate
Cabling at the DS3 or E3 patch panel and/or directly to the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel.
Electrical
Connector
Module
Important: If an intermediate DS3 or E3 patch panel is used, it must be

properly grounded in an equipment rack.
Follow these steps to make DS3 and E3 cable connections at the DS3/E3 ECM.
Table 8-12 DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 The ECM to connect to is a:

• 2-slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC), go to Step 2.
• 3-slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC), go to Step 3.
• 3-slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB), go to Step 4.
2 Connect the 12-port DS3/E3/EC-1 card cables with 75 ohm BNC
connectors into the ECM connectors. A total of 24 (12 input and 12 output)
coax cables are required for each 2-slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM in a
1:1 protection scheme.
Input (I) Output (O)

BNC Connectors for BNC Connectors for
Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1 Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1
Figure 8-15 2-Slot DS3/E3 (12-port BNC) ECM Connectors

Table 8-12 DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Connect the 12-port DS3/E3/EC-1 card cables with 75 ohm BNC

connectors into the ECM connector. A total of 48 (2x12 input and 2x12
output) coax cables are required for each 3-slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC)
ECM in a 1:2 protection scheme.
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Figure 8-16 3-Slot DS3/E3 (24-port BNC) ECM Connectors

Step Procedure
4 Connect the 24-port DS3/E3/EC-1, UTMX-24, or UTMX-48 card cables

with 75 ohm Mini-SMB connectors into the ECM connector. A total of 96
(2x24 input and 2x24 output) coax cables are required for each 3-slot
DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM in a 1:2 protection scheme.
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Figure 8-17 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48-port Mini-SMB) ECM Connectors
5 Label DS3 or E3 coax cables to designate Output (1_OUT through 12 or

24_OUT) and Input (1_IN through 12 or 24_IN) following local
procedures.
shelf.
7 Repeat Steps 1–6 for cabling at each DS3/E3 ECM.

Step Procedure

Mount a second cable management bar for strain relief with Mini-SMB
ECM cabling. Optionally, use a second cable management bar for any
copper cabling exiting the rear of the shelf.
Cables to the
right or left
side
Cable
management
bars
9 Is an intermediate DS3 or E3 patch panel installed in an equipment rack

for termination of the DS3 or E3 cables?
over to the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel per local
procedures.
10 Cut DS3 or E3 cables to the correct length using diagonal cutters.
Important: DS3 or E3 coax cable length, from the Traverse shelf to the
intermediate patch panel or DSX-3 cross-connect panel, must not exceed
450 feet (137 meters) to meet pulse template requirements.
and crimp tool.
12 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) coax cables on intermediate patch
panel or central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel.

Step Procedure
13 Where did you terminate the DS3 or E3 cables?

• Central office DSX cross-connect panel. Go to the next step.
• Intermediate patch panel. Continue to the next procedure, DS3 and
E3 Panel Cabling.
14 The DS3 and E3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module procedure is
complete.

DS3 and E3 Panel Cabling
DS3 and E3 Follow these steps to make cable connections from an intermediate DS3 or E3 patch
Panel Cabling panel to the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel.
Table 8-13 DS3 and E3 Panel Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) coax cables to the intermediate DS3 or
E3 patch panel using 75 ohm BNC or Mini-SMB connectors.
2 Label the cables to designate Output (1_OUT through 12 or 24_OUT) and
Input (1_IN through 12 or 24_IN) per local procedures.
the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel, per local procedures.
4 Cut the cables to the correct length using diagonal cutters.
and crimp tool.
6 Terminate Output and Input cables on the DSX-3 cross-connect panel
using 75 ohm BNC or Mini-SMB connectors.
7 Repeat Step 1 through 6 for each DS3 or E3 cable terminated at an
intermediate DS3 or E3 patch panel.
8 The DS3 and E3 Panel Cabling procedure is complete.

DS3 and E3 Panel Cabling

Chapter 5
Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures
Introduction The Traverse system supports electrical interface cabling for protected and unprotected
next-generation Ethernet (NGE), NGE Plus, or EoPDH cards and Carrier Ethernet
Protection (CEP) cards (NGE Plus or EoPDH).
Important: For optical Ethernet specifications, cabling, and protection

(for NGE, NGE Plus, 10GbE, and GbE-10 cards), see Chapter 1—“Fiber
Optic Interface Cabling Specifications,” page 2-1.
Note: The NGE term is used to refer to both the NGE and NGE Plus cards in this
document, unless otherwise noted.
This chapter provides the following installation procedures to complete electrical
cabling at the Traverse main backplane using an Ethernet Protection electrical
protection module (ECM).
• Plug-in Ethernet Protection ECM, page 8-39
• Ethernet Protection Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 8-40
• Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module, page 8-43
• Unprotected 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module,
page 8-45
For Ethernet electrical connector module (ECM) specifications, refer first to
Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical)
Interface Cabling Specifications,” page 2-43 and Section 5—Cable Management
Specifications, Chapter 1—“Cable Management Specifications,” page 5-1.


Required The following equipment and tools are required to make GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX
Equipment and cable connections at the ECM and intermediate patch panel:
Tools • Ethernet Protection or unprotected 10/100BaseT electrical connector module(s)
• Two NGE, NGE Plus, or EoPDH cards per ECM. Each Ethernet Protection ECM
supports 1:1 protection, where one card protects the working card.
• Cable(s):
Important: Turin manufactures a Turin Telco 50 cable assembly for GbE

TX and 10/100BaseTX cabling with electrical connector modules
(ECMs). The Turin Telco 50 cable assembly provides additional shielding
for electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Important: Industry-standard 25-pair, category 5 cable with a 180º Telco
50 male connector may be used as an option to the Turin Telco 50 cable
assembly; however, these cables may not [meet all Telcordia, FCC and
ETSI EMI test requirements.
– Standard 25 pair, category 5 cables with 180º 50 position male Telco 50

(CHAMP) connector at one end. Two cables are required per Ethernet
Protection ECM. Four cables are required per unprotected 10/100BaseT ECM.
or
– 25, 50, or 75-foot (7.6, 15.2, or 22.8 meter) Turin Telco 50 cable assemblies.
One cable assembly per Ethernet Protection ECM1. Two cable assemblies per
unprotected 10/100BaseT ECM.
• (SDH network only) One clamp-on ferrite (Turin PN 499-0135) per
10/100BaseTX cable (1 turn)
• CAT5E intermediate patch panel (24-port)2 (Turin PN 910-0035)
• Tool(s) to terminate GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX cabling at an intermediate patch
panel:
– Wire wrap tool
or
– Punchdown tool
or
– RJ-45 crimp tool, cutter, and RJ-45 plugs
• Large flat blade screwdriver for electrical connector modules (ECMs)
• Small flat blade screwdriver for ECM Telco cable assemblies
1
The Turin Telco 50 cable assembly has male Telco 50 connectors at both ends. The cable assembly is cut
in half and used to connect to the two Telco 50 connectors on the ECM. The other end is wire wrapped at
the intermediate patch panel or terminated on RJ-45 connectors.
2
Turin provides an optional snap-in faceplate patch panel for termination of fiber optic cables (SC duplex
module) and Category 5 cables (RJ-45). This patch panel is used for the optic plus electric Combo cards.
It provides flexibility and better identification of fiber optic and copper pairs terminated at the
intermediate patch panel. Turin PN 950-0070-00 (2-port SC Duplex Adapter, 16-port 10/100 Ethernet
Category 5 Card).

Chapter 5 Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures
Plug-in Ethernet Protection ECM
Plug-in Ethernet Protection ECMs are plugged into two 2 mm connectors on the Traverse main
Ethernet backplane.
Protection
ECM
backplane.
Follow these steps to plug-in Ethernet Protection ECM.
Table 8-14 Plug-in Ethernet Protection Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Are Ethernet Protection ECMs plugged into the main backplane?

• If yes, continue to the next procedure, Protected GbE TX and
10/100BaseTX Cabling at the ECM.
3 Line up a Ethernet Protection ECM with two 2 mm connectors on the main
backplane.
Note: The ECM is placed in the right-most connectors (as viewed from
the back of the shelf). Refer to Section 2—Network Interface
Specifications, Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical) Interface Cabling
Specifications,” Ethernet Protection ECM Placement, page 2-45.
5 Secure the ECM by tightening the two spring-loaded screws using a large
flat blade screwdriver.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each ECM as required.
7 The Plug-in Ethernet Protection Electrical Connector Module procedure is
complete. Continue to the next procedure, Protected GbE TX and
10/100BaseTX Cabling at the ECM.

Ethernet Protection Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
Ethernet Ethernet Protection GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX cables are connected to the Ethernet
Protection Protection ECM and then terminated at an intermediate patch panel.
Cabling at the
Electrical
Connector
Module
Important: The patch panel must be properly grounded in a equipment

rack.
Follow these steps to make cable connections at the Ethernet Protection ECM.
Table 8-15 Protected GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the ECM
Step Procedure
1 Connect the GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX cables with male Telco 50

connectors into the ECM.
Ports 1–2 of GbE TX Ports 9-20 of 10/100BaseTX

(ECM PORT 1-2) (ECM PORT 13-24)
Ports 5-8 of 10/100BaseTX (16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo

(ECM PORT 9-12) card)
(Slot n+1) (Slot n+1)
Figure 8-19 GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX Cabling using the ECM


Table 8-15 Protected GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the ECM (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Important: The Turin Telco 50 cable assembly has a drain wire. Connect
each cable drain wire to a Ethernet Protection ECM drain wire stud. Do not
stack ground lugs onto the same stud.
Drain Wire Studs
Figure 8-20 Ethernet Protection ECM Drain Wire Stud
4 (SDH network only) Attach one clamp-on ferrite (1 turn) on each

10/100BaseTX cable 152.4 mm (6-inches) from the 50-pin connector.
Note: The ferrites may have already been pre-secured to the cables.
5 Label cables with slot number and card port numbers based on the type of
card, following local procedures:
• 4-port GbE (LX, SX, or CWDM) plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX.
• 2-port GbE SX plus 2-port GbE CWDM (40 km) plus 16-port
10/100BaseTX.
– Ports 5–8 and ports 9–20 (for 16 10/100BaseTX ports).
• 2-port GbE TX plus 2-port GbE (LX or SX) plus 16-port
10/100BaseTX.
– Ports 1–2 (for 2 GbE TX ports).
– Ports 5–8 and ports 9–20 (for 16 10/100BaseTX ports).
shelf.
7 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for cabling at each Ethernet Protection ECM.

Step Procedure
8 Tie-wrap cables to the cable management bar(s) following local

procedures.
Cables to the
right or left
side
Cable
management
bars
9 Route the cables to the intermediate patch panel located in the same or
adjacent rack per local procedures.
10 Cut the cables to the correct length using cable cutters.
12 Use a wire wrap tool to terminate the cables at the patch panel or terminate
cable/pairs onto RJ-45 connectors for termination at the patch panel.
Refer to the following tables for detailed connector pinouts and color code
information.
Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 5—“Ethernet
(Electrical) Interface Cabling Specifications”:
• Table 2-18 Ethernet Interface and Ethernet Protection ECM Telco 50
Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One), page 2-47
• Table 2-19 Ethernet Electrical Interface and Ethernet Protection ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two), page 2-48

Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
13 Use Category 5E twisted-pair patch cable between the patch panel and
Ethernet network equipment.
14 The Protected GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the ECM procedure
is complete.
Procedures, page 9-1.
Plug-in 10/100BaseT electrical connector modules are plugged into two 2 mm connectors on
10/100BaseT the Traverse main backplane.
Electrical
Connector
Module backplane.
Follow these steps to plug-in 10/100BaseT electrical connector modules.
Table 8-16 Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Are 10/100BaseT electrical connector modules plugged into the main

backplane?
• If yes, continue to the next procedure, Unprotected 10/100BaseTX
Cabling, Electrical Connector Module.
3 Line up a 10/100BaseT electrical connector module with two 2 mm
connectors on the main backplane.
Note: The ECM is placed in the right-most connectors (as viewed from
the back of the shelf). Refer to Section 2—Network Interface
Specifications, Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical) Interface Cabling
Specifications,” 10/100BaseT ECM for Unprotected NGE and EoPDH
Cards, page 2-51.

Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module
Table 8-16 Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module (continued)
Step Procedure

5 Secure the ECM by tightening the two spring-loaded screws using a large
flat blade screwdriver.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each electrical connector module as required.
7 The Plug-in Ethernet Protection Electrical Connector Module procedure is
complete. Continue to the next procedure, Unprotected 10/100BaseTX
Cabling, Electrical Connector Module.

Unprotected 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
Unprotected 10/100BaseTX cables are connected to the electrical connector module and then
10/100BaseTX terminated at an intermediate patch panel.
Cabling at the
Electrical
Connector
Module
Important: The patch panel must be properly grounded in a equipment

rack.
Follow these steps to make cable connections at the 10/100BaseT electrical connector
module.
Table 8-17 Unprotected 10/100BaseTX Cabling, Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Connect the 10/100BaseTX cables with male Telco 50 connectors into the
ECM.
Ports 1–12 Ports 13–24

(24-port 10/100BaseTX module) (24-port 10/100BaseTX module)

(16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo
module) module)
(Slot n+1) (Slot n+1)

(24-port 10/100BaseTX module) (24-port 10/100BaseTX module)

(16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo
module) module)
(Slot n) (Slot n)
Figure 8-22 10/100BaseTX Cabling using the ECM


Step Procedure
3 Important: The Turin Telco 50 cable assembly has drain wires. Connect
each cable drain wire to a 10/100BaseT ECM drain wire stud. Do not stack
ground lugs onto the same stud.
Drain Wire Studs
4 (SDH network only) Attach one clamp-on ferrite (1 turn) on each

10/100BaseTX cable 152.4 mm (6-inches) from the 50-pin connector.
5 Label 10/100BaseTX cables with slot number and port numbers based on
the type of 10/100BaseTX module, following local procedures:
• Ports 1–12 and ports 13–24 (24-port 10/100BaseTX).
• Ports 3–6 and ports 7–18 (2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Combo or 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo).
shelf.
7 Repeat Steps 1–5 for cabling at each 10/100BaseT electrical connector
module.

Step Procedure
Cables to the
right or left
side
Cable
management
bars
9 Route the 10/100BaseTX cables to the intermediate patch panel located in

the same or adjacent rack per local procedures.
10 Cut 10/100BaseTX cables to the correct length using cable cutters.
12 Use a wire wrap tool to terminate 10/100BaseTX cables at the patch panel;
or terminate cable/pairs onto RJ-45 connectors for termination at the patch
panel.1
Refer to the following tables for detailed connector pinouts and color code
information:
Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 6—“Legacy
Ethernet Interface Cabling Specifications”:
• Table 2-16 24-port 10/100BaseTX and 10/100BaseT ECM Telco 50
Connector Pinouts/ Color Code, page 2-46.
• Table 2-17 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 10/100BaseT ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One), page 2-48.
• Table 2-18 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 10/100BaseT ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two), page 2-49.

Step Procedure
13 Use category 5 twisted-pair patch cable between the patch panel and
10/100BaseT network equipment.
14 The Protected GbE TX and 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the ECM procedure
is complete.
1
Turin provides an optional snap-in faceplate patch panel for termination of fiber optic cables (SC duplex
module) and Category 5 cables (RJ-45). This patch panel is used for the Ethernet Combo module. It
provides flexibility and better identification of pairs terminated at the intermediate patch panel. Turin
part number 950-0070-00 (2-port SC Duplex Adapter, 16-port 10/100 Ethernet Category 5 Module).

S ECTION 9 A LARM , T IMING , AND M ANAGEMENT
C ABLING P ROCEDURES
S ECTION 9
Contents
Chapter 1
Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling Overview
Chapter 2
Alarm Interface Cabling
Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Optional Turin PDAP for Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
PDAP-15A Power, Fuse, and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
PDAP-15A Power Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
PDAP-15A Fuse Alarm Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
PDAP-2S (Legacy)
Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Chapter 3
Timing Interface Cabling
T1/E1 Timing Interface Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
T1/E1 Timing Interface Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
CC2M Timing Interface Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
CC2M (2MHz) Timing Interface Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Verify Preset Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Chapter 4
Management Interface Cabling
DCN Ethernet Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
RS-232 DTE Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 9 Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling
Procedures
List of Figures
Figure 9-1 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Figure 9-2 Traverse 600 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Figure 9-3 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Figure 9-4 Traverse 600 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Figure 9-5 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Figure 9-6 Traverse 600 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Figure 9-7 Traverse 2000 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Figure 9-8 Traverse 600 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Figure 9-9 PDAP-4S Power, Fuse, and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . 9-13
Figure 9-10 PDAP-4S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling . . . . . . . 9-13
Figure 9-11 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Figure 9-12 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Figure 9-13 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Figure 9-14 PDAP-15A Power, Fuse, and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . 9-18
Figure 9-15 PDAP-15A Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling . . . . . . 9-18
Figure 9-16 PDAP-15A Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Figure 9-17 PDAP-15A Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Figure 9-18 PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Figure 9-19 PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Figure 9-20 PDAP-2S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling . . . . . . . 9-22
Figure 9-21 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Figure 9-22 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Figure 9-23 T1/E1 Timing Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Figure 9-24 Standalone 75/120 ohm Balun Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Figure 9-25 T1/E1 Timing Output Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Figure 9-26 CC2M Input Timing Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Figure 9-27 2MHz Timing Output Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Figure 9-28 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Figure 9-29 RJ-45 Plug and DCN Ethernet Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Figure 9-30 Traverse Main Backplane DCN Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Figure 9-31 Clamp-on Ferrite with Two Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Figure 9-32 RJ-45 Plug and RS-232 Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Figure 9-33 Traverse Main Backplane RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
List of Tables
Table 9-1 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Table 9-2 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-3 Audible Alarm Relay Output Connections at
the First Shelf 9-8
Table 9-4 Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Procedures
Table 9-5 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Table 9-7 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Table 9-8 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Outputs (Optional) and Wire-Wrap Posts 9-14
Table 9-6 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Table 9-9 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Table 9-10 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Table 9-11 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Table 9-12 Connect PDAP-15A Power Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Table 9-13 Connect PDAP-15A Fuse Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Table 9-14 Connect PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Table 9-15 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Table 9-16 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Table 9-17 PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Table 9-18 PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections. . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Table 9-19 T1/E1 Timing Interface Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Table 9-20 T1/E1 Timing Interface Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Table 9-21 CC2M Timing Interface Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Table 9-22 2MHz Timing Interface Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Table 9-23 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Table 9-24 RS-232 DTE Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Procedures

SECTION 9 ALARM , TIMING, AND M ANAGEMENT CABLING P ROCEDURES
Chapter 1
Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling
Overview
Introduction The Traverse system provides alarm, timing, and management (Ethernet and RS-232)
interface cabling support as follows:
• Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,” page 9-3
• Chapter 3—“Timing Interface Cabling,” page 9-27
• Chapter 4—“Management Interface Cabling,” page 9-39
For specifications, refer to Section 3—Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface
Specifications.

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 9: Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling Procedures

S ECTION 9 ALARM, TIMING, AND MANAGEMENT C ABLING PROCEDURES
Chapter 2
Alarm Interface Cabling
Introduction For Traverse system alarm interface specifications, refer first to Section 3—Alarm,
Timing, and Management Interface Specifications, Chapter 1—“Alarm Interface
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to connect visual, power, and
fuse alarm cables to a fuse alarm panel (e.g., PDAP-4S or PDAP-15A) and alarm
interface cables to the Traverse main backplane.
• Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf, page 9-4
• Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf, page 9-6
• Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf, page 9-8
• Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf, page 9-10
• Optional Turin PDAP for Alarm Connections, page 9-12
The step-by-step instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in CO
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Alarm Cabling
Required The following equipment and tools are required to complete system alarm cabling for
Equipment and each Traverse shelf:
Tools • 22 or 24 AWG (0.32 mm2) copper area wire
• Flats or wire cutters
• Wire-wrap tool for .045-inch x .045-inch (1.1 mm x 1.1 mm) posts
• (SDH network only) Two clamp-on ferrites (Turin part number 499-0135) per
alarm cable bundle (1 turn)

Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Visual Alarm Follow these steps to complete visual alarm output connections at the first Traverse
Output main backplane.
Connections at
Important: Always wear a properly Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist
the First Shelf
strap when making alarm wire connections to the Traverse main
backplane.
Table 9-1 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Step Procedure
1 Are visual alarm input connections complete at the fuse alarm panel?
• If yes, continue to Step 4 of this procedure.
• If no, and visual alarm input connections are made at some other
central office visual alarm panel, go to Step 2.
or
• If no, complete one of the following procedures and then go to Step 4
of this procedure:
– PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 9-17
– PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 9-21
– PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections,
page 9-25
2 Connect CO visual (critical, major and minor) alarm wires to the CO
visual alarm panel following local procedures.
Note: Two wires are required for each visual alarm (critical, major,
minor), a normally-open (NO) and common (C) wire.
3 Route the visual alarm wires from the CO visual alarm panel across the
horizontal cable rack following local procedures.
4 Route the visual alarm wires down the rack rails to the first Traverse shelf
in the rack following local procedures.
5 Remove the back cover from the main backplane. Refer to
6 Bring the visual alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of
the first Traverse shelf.

Chapter 2 Alarm Interface Cabling
Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Table 9-1 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Bring the visual alarm wires over to the visual alarm wire-wrap posts on
the Traverse main backplane.
Figure 9-1 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Figure 9-2 Traverse 600 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Table 9-1 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Cut the visual critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
insulation by ¼ inch (7 mm).
9 Terminate the wire on the critical alarm normally-open (NO) and the
common (C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for major and minor visual alarm connections.
11 (SDH network only) Attach two clamp-on ferrites around the bundle of
alarm cables (1 turn), one 6-inches (152.4 mm) from the rack, the other 12
to 18-inches (304.8 to 457.2 mm) from the rack.
12 Is there another Traverse shelf in the rack?
• Yes. Continue to the next procedure, Visual Alarm Output
Connections at the Next Shelf.
• No. The Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf procedure
is complete. Continue to the Audible Alarm Output Connections at
the First Shelf, page 9-8.
Visual Alarm Follow these steps to complete visual alarm output connections at the next Traverse
Connections at
the Next Shelf
backplane.
Table 9-2 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Step Procedure
1 Strip back the insulation on the visual alarm and common wires by ¼ inch
(7 mm).
Note: Two wires are required for each visual alarm (critical, major,
2 Terminate visual critical, major, minor and common alarm wires to the
first Traverse main backplane.
Note: Alarm wire-wrap posts are sized to accept two sets of wires.
3 Route the visual alarm wires out through the top cable port on the left side
of the Traverse shelf and down the rack rails to the next Traverse shelf in
the rack following local procedures.
4 Remove the back cover from the Traverse main backplane.

Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Table 9-2 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Bring the visual alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of
the Traverse shelf.
6 Bring the visual alarm wires over to the visual alarm wire-wrap posts on
Figure 9-3 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Figure 9-4 Traverse 600 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
7 Cut the visual critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
insulation by .025 inch (7 mm).

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Table 9-2 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Terminate the wire on the critical visual alarm normally-open (NO) and
the common (C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for major and minor visual alarm connections.
10 (SDH network only) Attach two ferrites around the bundle of alarm cables
(1 turn), one 6-inches (152.4 mm) from the rack, the other 12 to 18-inches
(304.8 to 457.2 mm) from the rack.
• Yes. Repeat Steps 1 through 10 to make visual alarm connections for
the next shelf in the rack making alarm connections at the second and
third shelf.
• No. The Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
procedure is complete. Continue to the Audible Alarm Output
Connections at the First Shelf, page 9-8.
Audible Alarm Follow these steps to complete audible alarm connections at the Traverse main
Output backplane.
Connections at
the First Shelf
backplane.

the First Shelf
Step Procedure
1 Connect CO audible (critical, major and minor) alarm wires to the CO

alarm panel following local procedures.
Note: Two wires are required for each audible alarm (critical, major,
2 Route the audible alarm wires from the CO alarm panel across the
horizontal cable rack and down the rack rails to the first Traverse main
backplane following local procedures.
3 Remove the back cover from the main backplane. Refer to
4 Bring the audible alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf

the First Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Bring the audible alarm wires over to the audible alarm wire-wrap posts on
Figure 9-5 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Figure 9-6 Traverse 600 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf

the First Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Cut the audible critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
7 Terminate the wire on the critical alarm normally-open (NO) and common
(C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for major and minor audible alarm connections.
• Yes. Continue to the next procedure, Audible Alarm Output
Connections at the Next Shelf.
• No. The Audible Alarm Relay Output Connections at the First Shelf
procedure is complete. Continue to the Optional Turin PDAP for
Alarm Connections, page 9-12 or if there are no optional PDAP
connections, Chapter 3—“Timing Interface Cabling,” page 9-27.
Audible Alarm Follow these steps to complete audible alarm output connections at the next Traverse
Connections at
the Next Shelf
backplane.
Table 9-4 Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Step Procedure
1 Strip back the insulation on the audible alarm and common wires by ¼
inch (7 mm).
Note: Two wires are required for each audible alarm (critical, major,
2 Terminate audible critical, major, minor and common alarm wires to the
first Traverse main backplane.
Note: Alarm wire-wrap posts are sized to accept two sets of wires.
3 Route the audible alarm wires out through the top cable port on the left
side of the Traverse shelf and down the rack rails to the next Traverse shelf
in the rack following local procedures.
4 Remove the back cover from the Traverse main backplane.

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Table 9-4 Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Bring the audible alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of
the Traverse shelf.
6 Bring the audible alarm wires over to the audible alarm wire-wrap posts on

Optional Turin PDAP for Alarm Connections
Table 9-4 Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Cut the audible critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
8 Terminate the wire on the critical audible alarm normally-open (NO) and
the common (C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for major and minor audible alarm connections.
• Yes. Repeat Steps 1–9 to make audible alarm connections for the next
shelf in the rack making alarm connections at the second and third
shelf.
• No. The Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
procedure is complete. Continue to the Optional Turin PDAP for
Alarm Connections, page 9-12 or if there are no optional PDAP
connections, Chapter 3—“Timing Interface Cabling,” page 9-27.
Optional Turin Several equipment choices are available to the user in order to provide power
PDAP for distribution and alarm capabilities in a Traverse system installation. The Turin Power
Alarm Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) is one choice and is considered an optional,
Connections adjunct component of the Traverse system.
The PDAP alarm connection topics are as follows:
• PDAP-4S for Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000:
– PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts, page 9-13
– PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections, page 9-15
– PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections, page 9-16
– PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 9-17
• PDAP-15A for Traverse 600:
– PDAP-15A Power, Fuse, and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts, page 9-18
– PDAP-15A Power Alarm Connections, page 9-19
– PDAP-15A Fuse Alarm Connections, page 9-20
– PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 9-21
• PDAP-2S (legacy for Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000):
– PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts, page 9-22
– PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse Alarm Connections, page 9-24
– PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 9-25

PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
PDAP-4S Power and fuse alarm cabling is connected from the PDAP-4S to a CO alarm panel for
Power, Fuse visual reporting of power failure, visual or audible reporting of fuse A or B failure, or
and Visual to the Traverse main backplane as environmental alarm input connections. Visual alarm
Alarm cabling is connected from the Traverse main backplane to 0.045-inch (1.1 mm)
Wire-Wrap wire-wrap posts on the back of the PDAP-4S. The following graphic shows where
these wire-wrap posts are located.
Posts
Power, Fuse
and Visual
Alarm
Wire-Wrap
Figure 9-9 PDAP-4S Power, Fuse, and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides PDAP-4S power, fuse, and visual alarm labeling and
Figure 9-10 PDAP-4S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling
Table 9-5 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
Power Alarm
Visual Power
NC C NO
(Normally-Closed) (Common) (Normally-Open)

PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Table 9-6 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
Fuse Alarms
Visual Fuse
NC C NO
Audible Fuse
Table 9-7 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms
Critical Major Minor

(CRIT) Return (MAJ) Return (MIN) Return
Activate (R) Activate (R) Activate (R)
(A) (A) (A)
Post 7 Post 8 Post 15 Post 16 Post 23 Post 24
Table 9-8 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Outputs (Optional) and Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms
Critical
NC NO C
(Normally-Closed) (Normally-Open) (Common)
Major
Minor

PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections
PDAP-4S Follow these steps to complete power alarm connections at PDAP-4S.

Power Alarm
Connections
strap when making alarm wire connections to the PDAP-4S.
Table 9-9 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for Power alarms, normally-open (NO) and
common (C) or normally-closed (NC) and common (C). Strip back the
insulation on the fuse wires by ¼ inch (7 mm).
2 Power alarm wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of the
PDAP-4S. Terminate the power alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-11 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Route power alarm wires to the CO power alarm panel following local
procedures.
4 Connect power alarm wires to the CO power alarm panel following local
procedures.
Note: Two wires are required for the power alarm (normally-open and
common or normally-closed and common).
5 The PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections procedure is complete.
Continue to the next procedure, PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections.

PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections
PDAP-4S Fuse Follow these steps to complete fuse alarm connections at PDAP-4S.
Alarm
Connections
Table 9-10 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for visual and audible fuse alarms,
normally-open (NO) and common (C) or normally-closed (NC) and
common (C). Strip back the insulation on the fuse wires by ¼ inch (7 mm).
2 Fuse alarm wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of the
PDAP-4S. Terminate the visual fuse alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-12 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Repeat Step 1 for the audible fuse alarm wires.

4 Route fuse alarm wires to the CO fuse alarm panel following local
procedures.
5 Connect visual and audible fuse alarm wires to the CO fuse alarm panel
Note: Two wires are required for each fuse alarm (normally-open and
6 The PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections procedure is complete.
Continue to the next procedure, PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input
Connections.

PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections
PDAP-4S Follow these steps to complete visual alarm input connections at the back of the
Visual Alarm PDAP-4S.
Input
Connections
Table 9-11 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 Will visual alarm input connections be made at the PDAP-4S?

• If yes, go to Step 2 to complete PDAP-4S visual alarm input
connections.
• If no, and visual alarm input connections are made at a central office
visual alarm panel, go to the Visual Alarm Output Connections at
the First Shelf procedure on page 9-4.
2 Two alarm wires are required for each type of visual alarm. Strip back the
insulation on the visual critical and common wires by ¼ inch (7 mm).
3 Visual alarm input wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of
the PDAP-4S. Terminate the two alarm wires for critical (CRIT) activate
(A) and Return (R) using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-13 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for major (MAJ)/common (C) and minor

(MIN)/common (C) wires.
5 Route visual alarm cables to the left side of the PDAP-4S and down the
rack rails to the first Traverse shelf.
6 The PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections procedure is complete.
Continue to Chapter 3—“Timing Interface Cabling,” page 9-27.

PDAP-15A Power, Fuse, and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
PDAP-15A Power and fuse alarm cabling is connected from the PDAP-15A to one of the
Power, Fuse, following:
and Visual • CO alarm panel for visual reporting of power failure, visual or audible reporting of
Alarm fuse A or B failure.
Wire-Wrap • Traverse backplane as environmental alarm input connections.
Posts Visual alarm cabling is connected from the Traverse backplane to 0.045-inch (1.1 mm)
wire-wrap posts on the back of the PDAP-15A. The following graphic shows where
these wire-wrap posts are located.
Power, Fuse, and
Visual Alarm
Wire-Wrap Posts
Figure 9-14 PDAP-15A Power, Fuse, and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides PDAP-15A power, fuse, and visual alarm labeling and
Figure 9-15 PDAP-15A Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling

PDAP-15A Power Alarm Connections
PDAP-15A Follow these steps to complete power alarm connections at PDAP-15A.

Power Alarm
Connections
strap when making alarm wire connections to the PDAP-15A.
Table 9-12 Connect PDAP-15A Power Alarms
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for Power alarms, normally-open (NO) and
common (C) or normally-closed (NC) and common (C). Strip back the
insulation by 3/4 inch (19 mm) exposing enough wire to make a minimum
of five turns.
2 Power alarm wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of the
PDAP-15A. Terminate the power alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-16 PDAP-15A Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Route power alarm wires to the CO power alarm panel following local
procedures.
4 Connect power alarm wires to the external or CO power alarm panel
Note: Two wires are required for the power alarm (normally-open and
5 The Connect PDAP-15A Power Alarms procedure is complete. Continue
to the Connect PDAP-15A Fuse Alarms procedure.

PDAP-15A Fuse Alarm Connections
PDAP-15A Follow these steps to complete fuse alarm connections at PDAP-15A.

Fuse Alarm
Connections
Table 9-13 Connect PDAP-15A Fuse Alarms
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for visual and audible fuse alarms,
common (C). Strip back the insulation by 3/4 inch (7 mm) exposing
enough wire to make a minimum of five turns.
PDAP-15A. Terminate the visual fuse alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-17 PDAP-15A Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the audible fuse alarm wires.

4 Route wires to the CO fuse alarm panel following local procedures.
5 Connect visual and audible fuse alarm wires to the CO fuse alarm panel
6 The Connect PDAP-15A Fuse Alarms procedure is complete. Continue to
the Connect PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Inputs procedure.

PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Input Connections
PDAP-15A Follow these steps to complete visual alarm input connections at the back of the
Visual Alarm PDAP-15A.
Input
Connections
Table 9-14 Connect PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Inputs
Step Procedure
1 Will visual alarm input connections be made at the PDAP-15A?

• If yes, go to Step 2.
the First Shelf procedure on page 9-4.
insulation by 3/4 inch (7 mm) exposing enough wire to make a minimum
of five turns.
the PDAP-15A. Terminate the two alarm wires for critical (CRIT) activate
(A) and Return (R) using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-18 PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts


PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Table 9-14 Connect PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Inputs (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Route visual alarm cables to the left side of the PDAP-15A and down the
6 The Connect PDAP-15A Visual Alarm Inputs procedure is complete.
PDAP-2S Fuse alarm cabling is connected from the legacy PDAP-2S to a CO alarm panel for
(Legacy) visual or audible reporting of fuse A or B failure, or to the Traverse main backplane as
Fuse and an environmental alarm input connection. Visual alarm cabling is connected from the
Visual Alarm Traverse main backplane to 0.045-inch (1.1 mm) wire-wrap posts on the back of the
Wire-Wrap PDAP-2S. The following graphic shows where these wire-wrap posts are located.
Posts
Fuse and
Visual Alarm
Wire-Wrap
Posts
Figure 9-19 PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides PDAP-2S fuse and visual alarm labeling and
Figure 9-20 PDAP-2S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling

PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Table 9-15 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
Fuse Alarms
Fuse A
NC C NO
Fuse B
Table 9-16 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms
Critical Common Major Common Minor Common

(CRIT) (C) (MAJ) (C) (MIN) (C)
Post 10 Post 7 Post 11 Post 8 Post 12 Post 9

PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse Alarm Connections
PDAP-2S Follow these steps to complete fuse alarm connections at PDAP-2S.

(Legacy) Fuse
Alarm strap when making alarm wire connections to the PDAP-2S.
Connections
Table 9-17 PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse Alarm Connections
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for Fuse A and Fuse B alarms,
common (C). Strip back the insulation on the fuse wires by ¼ inch (7 mm).
PDAP-2S. Terminate the Fuse A alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-21 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for Fuse B alarm wires.

4 Route fuse alarm wires to the CO alarm panel following local procedures.
5 Connect Fuse A and Fuse B alarm wires to the CO fuse alarm panel
6 The PDAP-2S (Legacy) Fuse Alarm Connections procedure is complete.
Continue to the next procedure, PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input
Connections.

PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections
PDAP-2S Follow these steps to complete visual alarm input connections at the back of the
(Legacy) Visual PDAP-2S.
Alarm Input
Connections
Table 9-18 PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 Will visual alarm input connections be made at the PDAP-2S?

• If yes, go to Step 2 to complete PDAP-2S visual alarm input
connections.
the First Shelf at the Main Backplane procedure, page 9-4.
insulation on the visual critical and common wires by ¼ inch (7 mm).
the PDAP-2S. Terminate the two alarm wires for critical (CRIT) and
common (C) using a wire-wrap tool.
Figure 9-22 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts

5 Route visual alarm cables to the left side of the PDAP-2S and down the
6 The PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections procedure is
complete.
Continue to Chapter 3—“Timing Interface Cabling,” page 9-27.

PDAP-2S (Legacy) Visual Alarm Input Connections

Chapter 3
Timing Interface Cabling
Introduction For Traverse system timing interface specifications, refer first to Section 3—Alarm,
Timing, and Management Interface Specifications, Chapter 2—“Timing Interface
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to connect timing inputs from
the central office BITS/SASE clock timing source and timing outputs from a Traverse
shelf with wire-wrap posts to the BITS/SASE clock.
• T1/E1 Timing Interface Input, page 9-28
• T1/E1 Timing Interface Output, page 9-32
• CC2M Timing Interface Input, page 9-34
• CC2M (2MHz) Timing Interface Output, page 9-36
• Verify Preset Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3, page 9-38
For Traverse timing configuration information, refer to the Traverse Provisioning
Guide, Section 1—Configuring the Network, Chapter 4—“Configuring Network
Timing,” page 1-13.
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Timing and
Management Cabling Checklist, page 12-30.

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make timing interface connections
Equipment and to the Traverse main backplane:
Tools • 2-pair 22 AWG (0.32 mm2) copper area wire (with drain wire1)
• Flats or wire cutters
• Wire-wrap tool for .045-inch x .045-inch (1.1 mm x 1.1 mm) posts
(SDH network only) Optional equipment and tools required for SASE E1 timing source
connection with coax cables to the Traverse main backplane wire-wrap posts using a
75/120 ohm balun (twisted-pair to coax convertor):
• Coax cable and BNC connectors
• 75/120 ohm baluns (2) or Traverse backplane cover with two 75/120 ohm baluns
• Coax cable cutters
• Coax cable stripping tool
• Coax center crimp tool
• Punchdown tool for balun IDC connections
T1/E1 Timing Follow these steps to complete T1/E1 timing interface primary and secondary2 input
Interface Input connections at the main backplane.
Note: (SDH network only) You can run coax cable from the central office SASE E1
timing source to the Traverse shelf and use standalone 75/120 ohm baluns
(user-supplied) or an optional Traverse system backplane cover with 75/120 ohm
baluns (and shielded twisted-pair wire) for connection to the main backplane wire-wrap
posts.

backplane.
1
Drain wire required for shielding.
2
The secondary T1/E1 timing input connection is optional.

Chapter 3 Timing Interface Cabling
T1/E1 Timing Interface Input
Table 9-19 T1/E1 Timing Interface Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 (SDH network only) Are you using coax cable (instead of twisted-pair
wire) from the central office SASE E1 timing source to the Traverse main
backplane?
• Yes. Connect timing coax cables to the SASE E1 primary and
secondary timing source and run the cables to the Traverse shelf
following local procedures. Continue to Step 3.
• No. Go to the next step.
2 Connect 22 AWG (0.32 mm2) timing wires to the central office
BITS/SASE T1/E1 primary and secondary (optional) timing source and
run the cables to the Traverse shelf following local procedures.
Note: Two 2-pair wires are required for primary and secondary
(T1/E1_INA and T1/E1_INB) connections.
3 Route the T1/E1 primary and secondary timing wires across the horizontal
cable rack and down the rack rails to the left side of the Traverse shelf.
4 Remove the back cover from the Traverse shelf. Refer to

Table 9-19 T1/E1 Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Bring the T1/E1 primary and secondary input timing wires through the top
cable port and over to the T1/E1_INA and T1/E1_INB wire-wrap posts on
the main backplane.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
5 6 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 OUT
10 9 8 7 6 OUT
5 4 3 2 1
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 9-23 T1/E1 Timing Input Wire-Wrap Posts
6 (SDH network only) Are you using coax cables (instead of twisted-pair
wire) from the central office SASE E1 timing source to the Traverse main
backplane?
• Yes. Cut the coax cables to the correct length and terminate to the
75/120 ohm baluns (either standalone or on the optional Traverse
backplane cover with 75/120 ohm baluns) using BNC connectors.
Continue to the next step.

Table 9-19 T1/E1 Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
7 (SDH network only) Are you installing the E1 timing connection with
standalone baluns or the Traverse system backplane cover with baluns?
• Standalone Balun. Terminate twisted-pair wire to the baluns IDC
connectors.Continue to the next step.
Figure 9-24 Standalone 75/120 ohm Balun Connection
• Traverse Backplane Cover with Balun. The twisted-pair wires are

already connected to the balun IDC connectors. Continue to Step 9.
8 Cut the T1/E1 primary and secondary input timing wires to the correct
length and strip back the insulation by ¼ inch (7 mm).
9 Terminate primary and secondary wires on the timing interface posts using
a wire-wrap tool.
10 Terminate drain wire to shield wire-wrap posts using wire-wrap tool.
11 Verify that the correct pins are jumpered on header J2 (T1/E1_IN), see
Verify Preset Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3, page 9-38.
12 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack that require T1/E1
Timing?
• Yes. Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for each shelf.
• No. The T1/E1 Timing Interface Input Connections procedure is
complete. Continue to the next procedure, T1/E1 Timing Interface
Output Connections.

T1/E1 Timing Interface Output
T1/E1 Timing Follow these steps to complete T1/E1 timing interface primary and secondary3 output
Interface connections at the Traverse main backplane.
Output
backplane.
Table 9-20 T1/E1 Timing Interface Output Connections
Step Procedure

2 Strip back the insulation on the primary and secondary (optional) output
timing wires by ¼ inch (7 mm).
(T1/E1_OUTA and T1/E1_OUTB) connections.
3
The secondary T1/E1 timing output connection is optional.

T1/E1 Timing Interface Output
Table 9-20 T1/E1 Timing Interface Output Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Terminate primary and secondary output timing wires on T1/E1_OUTA

and T1/E1_OUTB wire-wrap posts using a wire-wrap tool.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
5 6 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12OUT
11 10 9 8 7OUT
6 5 4 3 2 1
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 9-25 T1/E1 Timing Output Wire-Wrap Posts
4 Route the T1/E1 primary and secondary output timing wires up the rack
rails and across the horizontal cable rack to the central office BITS/SASE
clock.
5 Terminate T1/E1 output timing wires at the central office BITS/SASE
clock.
6 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack that provide T1/E1 timing
signals to the central office BITS/SASE Clock?
• No. The T1/E1 Timing Interface Output Connections procedure is
complete. Continue to Chapter 4—“Management Interface Cabling,”
page 9-39.

CC2M Timing Interface Input
CC2M Timing Follow these steps to complete CC2M timing interface primary and secondary4 input
Interface Input connections at the main backplane.

backplane.
Note: Composite Clock—64kHz (CC) output connectors are not used.
Table 9-21 CC2M Timing Interface Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 Connect 22 AWG (0.32 mm2) timing wires to the central office

BITS/SASE CC2M primary and secondary (optional) timing source.
(CC2M_INA and CC2M_INB) connections.
2 Route the CC2M primary and secondary timing wires across the horizontal
cable rack and down the rack rails to the left side of the Traverse shelf
4
The secondary CC2M timing input connection is optional.

CC2M Timing Interface Input
Table 9-21 CC2M Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Bring the CC2M primary and secondary input timing wires through the top
cable port and over to the CC2M_IN wire-wrap posts on the main
backplane.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
5 6 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
OUT
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9 8 7 6 5 4 3
OUT 2 1
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 9-26 CC2M Input Timing Wire-Wrap Posts
5 Cut the primary and secondary input timing wires to the correct length and
strip back the insulation by ¼ inch (7 mm).
6 Terminate primary and secondary wires on the timing interface posts using
a wire-wrap tool.
7 Terminate drain wire to shield wire-wrap posts using wire-wrap tool.
8 Verify that the correct pins are jumpered on header J3 (CC2M_IN), see
Verify Preset Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3, page 9-38.

CC2M (2MHz) Timing Interface Output
Table 9-21 CC2M Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
9 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack that require CC2M
Timing?
• No. Go to the next step.
10 Are you connecting 2MHz or CC—64kHz timing?
• 2MHz. The CC2M Timing Interface Input Connections procedure is
complete. Continue to the next procedure, 2MHz Timing Interface
Output Connections.
• CC. The CC2M Timing Interface Input Connections procedure is
page 9-39.
CC2M (2MHz) Follow these steps to complete 2MHz timing interface primary and secondary5 output
Timing connections at the Traverse main backplane.
Interface
Output
backplane.
Note: Composite Clock—64kHz (CC) output connectors are not used.
Table 9-22 2MHz Timing Interface Output Connections
Step Procedure

2 Strip back the insulation on the primary and secondary (optional) output
timing wires by ¼ inch (7 mm).
(CC2M_OUTA and CC2M_OUTB) connections.
5
The secondary 2MHz timing output connection is optional.

CC2M (2MHz) Timing Interface Output
Table 9-22 2MHz Timing Interface Output Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Terminate primary and secondary output timing wires on CC2M_OUTA

and CC2M_OUTB wire-wrap posts using a wire-wrap tool.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
5 6 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
OUT OUT
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 +
13 9 B 10
12 11 10 9- +8 97 B 5 -
6 10 4 3 2 1
Figure 9-27 2MHz Timing Output Wire-Wrap Posts
4 Route the 2MHz primary and secondary output timing wires up the rack
rails and across the horizontal cable rack to the central office BITS/SASE
clock.
5 Terminate 2MHz output timing wires at the central office BITS/SASE
clock.
6 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack that provide 2MHz timing
signals to the central office BITS/SASE Clock?
• No. The 2MHz Timing Interface Output Connections procedure is
page 9-39.

Verify Preset Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3
Verify Preset For T1/E1 primary and secondary timing input signals verify jumpers are placed
Jumpers on between:
Headers J2 • T1. Pins 1 and 2 (T1/E1_INA primary), and pins 7 and 8 (T1/E1_INB secondary)
and J3 at the J2 header. These jumpers are required for 100 ohms DS1 timing signal
termination.
• E1. Pins 3 and 4 (T1/E1_INA primary), and pins 9 and 10 (T1/E1_INB secondary)
at the J2 header. These jumpers are required for 120 ohms E1 timing signal
termination.
For CC2M primary and secondary timing input signals, verify jumpers are placed
between:
• CC (64kHz). Pins 1 and 2 (CC2M_INA), and pins 7 and 8 (CC2M_INB) at the J3
header. These jumpers are required for Composite Clock—64kHz timing signal
termination.
• 2MHz. Pins 3 and 4 (CC2M_INA), and pins 9 and 10 (CC2M_INB) at the J3
header. These jumpers are required for 2MHz timing signal termination.
These 12-pin headers are located on the main backplane just below the timing interface
wire-wrap posts.
T1/E1_IN CC2M_IN
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2 J3
J2 J3
Figure 9-28 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3

Chapter 4
Management Interface Cabling
Introduction For Traverse system management interface specifications, refer first to

Section 3—Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface Specifications,
Chapter 3—“Management Interface Specifications,” page 3-13.
This chapter provides DCN Ethernet and RS-232 information and step-by-step
instructions on how to connect interface cables to the Traverse main backplane DCN
Ethernet (RJ-45) and RS-232 connectors located side-by-side.
• DCN Ethernet Interface Connection, page 9-40
• RS-232 DTE Interface Connection, page 9-42
For Traverse node configuration information, refer to the Traverse Provisioning Guide,
Section 1—Configuring the Network, Chapter 2—“Discover the Network,” page 1-3.
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Timing and
Management Cabling Checklist, page 12-30.

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make the DCN Ethernet and RS-232
Equipment and interface connections to the Traverse main backplane:
Tools • DCN Ethernet interface:
– RJ-45 plugs
– 4-pair twisted wire (Category 5 Ethernet cable)
– RJ-45 crimp tool and cutter
– (SDH network only) One clamp-on ferrite (Turin part number 499-0135) per
cable (2 turns)
• External RS-232 interface:
– RJ-45 to DB-25 adapter (RJ-45 connector on one end and DB-25 connector on
the other) for modem connection
– RJ-45 plugs
– 4-pair twisted wire (Category 5 Ethernet cable)
– Modem cable for modem connection
– RJ-45 crimp tool and cutter
– External non-Windows™ modem
DCN Ethernet Follow these steps to complete the DCN Ethernet connection at the main backplane.
Interface
Important: Always wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap
Connection
when making connections to the Traverse main backplane.
Table 9-23 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection
Step Procedure
1 Connect Ethernet cable at the LAN/WAN network device in the central

office. See Step 6 for pinouts.
2 Route the Ethernet cable along the rack rails to the left side of the Traverse
shelf following local procedures.
Chapter 2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers,” page 6-9.
4 Bring the Ethernet cable over to the (J4) RJ-45 connector on the main
backplane.
5 Cut the Ethernet cable to the correct length.

Chapter 4 Management Interface Cabling
DCN Ethernet Interface Connection
Table 9-23 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Strip the cable and terminate on a RJ-45 plug using a crimp tool. RJ-45
pinouts are provided below.
Figure 9-29 RJ-45 Plug and DCN Ethernet Pinouts
7 Insert the RJ-45 plug into the (J4) RJ-45 connector on the main backplane.
(J4) DCN
Ethernet
Interface
Figure 9-30 Traverse Main Backplane DCN Ethernet Interface

RS-232 DTE Interface Connection
Table 9-23 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection (continued)
Step Procedure
8 (SDH network only) Attach one clamp-on ferrite with 2 turns on each
cable 152.4 mm (6-inches) from the rack. One turn is defined as a single
pass through the ferrite hole.
Figure 9-31 Clamp-on Ferrite with Two Turns
9 Is there a RS-232 interface connection required?
• If yes, continue to the next procedure, RS-232 Interface Connection.
• If no, replace the back cover placing the Ethernet cable through the
cable port provided in the left side of the cover.
10 The DCN Ethernet Interface Connection procedure is complete.
Do you need to make an RS-232 connection?
• Yes. Go to the next procedure, RS-232 DTE Interface Connection.
• No. Continue to the next Section of this manual.
RS-232 DTE Follow these steps to complete the external RS-232 DTE interface connection at the
Interface main backplane for modem dial-up access.
Connection
Important: Always wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap
when making connections to the Traverse main backplane.
Table 9-24 RS-232 DTE Interface Connection
Step Procedure
1 Connect the RJ-45 to DB-25 adapter at the external modem.

2 Connect the Category 5 cable to the RJ-45 side of the RJ-45 to DB-25
adapter. See Step 7 on page 9-43 for pinouts.
3 Route the Category 5 cable from the external modem along the rack rails
to the left side of the Traverse shelf following local procedures.

Chapter 4 Management Interface Cabling
Table 9-24 RS-232 DTE Interface Connection (continued)
Step Procedure

5 Bring the Category 5 cable over to the (J5) RJ-45 connector on the main
backplane.
6 Cut the Category 5 cable to the correct length.
7 Strip the cable and terminate on a RJ-45 plug using a crimp tool. RS-232
interface pinouts along with DB-9 and DB-25 pinouts are provided below.
Figure 9-32 RJ-45 Plug and RS-232 Pinouts
8 Insert the RJ-45 plug into the (J5) RJ-45 connector on the main backplane.
(J5)
RS-232
DTE
Interface
(RJ-45)
Figure 9-33 Traverse Main Backplane RS-232 Interface

Table 9-24 RS-232 DTE Interface Connection (continued)
Step Procedure
9 Replace the back cover placing the RS-232 cable through the cable port
provided in the left side of the cover.
10 The RS-232 DTE Interface Connection procedure is completed.
Continue to the next Section of this manual.

S ECTION 10 P OWER I NSTALLATION AND C ABLING
P ROCEDURES
S ECTION 6POWER INSTALLATION AND CABLING P ROCEDURES
Contents
Chapter 1
Power System Overview
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
PDAP Installation and Cabling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Chapter 2
Power System Hardware Installation
Power System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Grounding the PDAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Chapter 3
Battery and Battery Return Distribution
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Traverse shelf only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
PDAP-4S only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
PDAP-15A only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
PDAP-2S (Legacy) only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Battery and Battery Return Distribution Cabling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Return Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Chapter 4
Battery and Battery Return Supply
General:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
PDAP-4S only:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
PDAP-15A only:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
PDAP-2S (Legacy) only: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Verify Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Verify Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 10 Power Installation and Cabling Procedures
List of Figures
Figure 10-1 Power System Keyhole Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-2 PDAP-4S Chassis Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-3 PDAP-15A Chassis Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-4 Battery Distribution Cable Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Figure 10-5 PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Figure 10-6 Battery Return Distribution Cable Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Figure 10-7 PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Power Terminals . . . . . . . . 10-15
Figure 10-8 Battery Distribution Cable Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Figure 10-9 PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Figure 10-11 PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Figure 10-12 Battery Distribution Cable Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Figure 10-13 PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Figure 10-15 PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Figure 10-16 PDAP-4S Battery Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Figure 10-17 PDAP-15A Battery Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Figure 10-18 PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Figure 10-19 PDAP-4S Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Figure 10-20 PDAP-15A Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Figure 10-21 PDAP-2S Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Figure 10-22 PDAP-4S Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Figure 10-23 PDAP-15A Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Figure 10-24 PDAP-2S Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Figure 10-25 PDAP-4S Battery and Return Supply Terminal Connections . . . . 10-37
Figure 10-26 PDAP-15A Battery and Return Supply Terminal Connections . . . 10-37
Figure 10-27 PDAP-2S Battery and Battery Return Supply Connections. . . . . . 10-38
List of Tables
Table 10-1 PDAP Installation and Cabling Process and References . . . . . . . 10-2
Table 10-2 Power System Hardware Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Table 10-3 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Table 10-4 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Table 10-5 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Table 10-6 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . 10-18
Table 10-7 Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables . . . . . . . 10-21
Table 10-8 Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Return Distribution Cables . 10-24
Table 10-9 Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Table 10-10 Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Table 10-11 Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

S ECTION 10POWER INSTALLATION AND CABLING PROCEDURES
Chapter 1
Power System Overview
Introduction Several power system equipment choices are available to the user in order to provide
power distribution and alarm capabilities in a Traverse system installation. The Turin
power distribution and alarm panel (PDAP) is one choice and is considered an optional,
adjunct component of the Traverse system.
• Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) Description, page 10-1
• PDAP Installation and Cabling Process, page 10-2
For Traverse power terminal locations, refer to any one of the Traverse rear view topics
in Traverse Product Overview Guide, Section 2—Platform Descriptions.

PDAP-4S with standard 40 amp fuses at –40 VDC provides 1600 watts.
configuration, and the power draw goes above the maximum capacity of
a loss of traffic.
For power consumption values, refer to the Traverse Product Overview Guide,
Section 5—Planning and Engineering, Chapter 1—“Traverse Specifications,” Power
Consumption, page 5-5.
Power The Traverse system is powered by the central office battery (–48 VDC). Redundant
Distribution central office (CO) battery and battery return is connected to the Power Distribution
and Alarm and Alarm Panel (PDAP).
Panel (PDAP) The PDAP provides the following:
Description • Terminates redundant –48 VDC central office battery
• Terminates central office battery return
• Distributes redundant battery and battery return
• Provides power protection for Traverse shelves and auxiliary equipment
• Visually display input power, fuse power, and critical, major, and minor bay alarms

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 10: Power Installation and Cabling Procedures
PDAP Installation and Cabling Process
PDAP The following process guides you through the procedures and gives references to meet
Installation and PDAP (optional equipment) installation requirements.
Cabling Table 10-1 PDAP Installation and Cabling Process and References
Process

2 Carefully plan your power system Traverse Product Overview Guide,

design. Section 5—Planning and Engineering,
Chapter 1—“Traverse Specifications,” Power
Consumption, page 5-5
3 Power system hardware may have • Section 7—Hardware Installation Procedures,

already been installed. Chapter 1—“Traverse System Rack Installation
Overview,” Traverse System Rack Hardware
Installation Process, page 7-4
• Chapter 2—“Power System Hardware
4 Install the Battery and Battery • Chapter 3—“Battery and Battery Return
Return Cabling Distribution,” page 10-7
5 Install the Battery and Battery • Chapter 4—“Battery and Battery Return Supply,”
Supply Cabling page 10-29
6 The PDAP Installation and Cabling Are all the Traverse system components installed and
Process is complete. Network Interface, Alarm, Ethernet, and RS-232
connections complete?
• Yes. Continue to Section 11—Node Start-up and
Commissioning Procedures, Chapter 1—“Node
Start-up and Commissioning,” page 11-1.
• No. Complete all remaining component installation
and cable connections. Once complete, then (and
only then) continue to Section 11—Node Start-up
and Commissioning Procedures, page 11-1.

Chapter 2
Power System Hardware Installation
Introduction This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to install a PDAP in a standard
7-foot (2133.6 mm) high, 19-inch or 23-inch (483 mm or 584 mm) wide telco rack.
This chapter provides the following topics to complete power system installation.
• Power System Installation, page 10-4
• Grounding the PDAP, page 10-6
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Power System
Hardware Installation Checklist, page 12-22.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the power system hardware:
Equipment and • Standard 7-foot (2133.6 mm) high, 19-inch or 23-inch (483 mm or 584 mm) wide
Tools telco rack
• Standard conductive plated rack adapters with tread-forming screws required for
rack installation, where applicable
• Power system (e.g., PDAP-4S, PDAP-15A, or legacy PDAP-2S)
• Four appropriate-sized (e.g., 12-24) thread-forming screws for securing and
grounding the equipment
• A 5/16-inch socket for thread-forming screws
• Green (#10 AWG or 6 mm2 yellow-green) copper ground wire for grounding:
– Up to #4 AWG (25 mm2) for the PDAP-4S (depending on the input interrupt
device)
– Up to #6 AWG (15 mm2) for the PDAP-15A (depending on the input interrupt
device)
– Up to #10 AWG (6 mm2) for the legacy PDAP-2S (for optional grounding)
• 1 – double-hole copper barrel cable lug for ground terminal connection:
– 1 – 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) (clearance hole with .625-inch spacing) for the
PDAP-4S
– 1 – M5 (0.19-inch or 5 mm) (clearance hole with .625-inch spacing) for the
PDAP-15A
• Stepladder (optional)

Power System Installation
Power System Install the power system hardware (e.g., PDAP-4S or PDAP-15A) in the central office
Installation bay and rack designated by your engineering work order. Install the power system at
the top (using the first set of mounting holes) of a rack above the first Traverse shelf.
WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to the

PDAP or central office battery source before beginning this procedure
to avoid personal injury.

(ESD) wrist strap when making cable connections to the PDAP and
Traverse backplane.
Important: Complete battery and battery return distribution cabling

before bringing central office battery and battery return supply to the
PDAP.
refer to Section 7—Hardware Installation Procedures, Chapter 2—“Traverse System
Hardware Installation,” Install the Rack Adapters, page 7-8.
Table 10-2 Power System Hardware Installation
Step Procedure
1 Power systems have a flange with a keyhole slot. Partially tighten a

thread-forming screw in the correct position on each side of the rack, leave
about 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) of space between the rack and the screw head.
Keyhole
Slots
Figure 10-1 Power System Keyhole Slots
2 Position and lower the power system so the keyhole slots rest on the
partially tightened screws.
3 Tighten screws.
4 Place two additional screws and tighten to secure the power system to the
rack.

Chapter 2 Power System Hardware Installation
Power System Installation
Table 10-2 Power System Hardware Installation
Step Procedure
5 Connect the grounding wire to the PDAP and to a confirmed source of

Earth ground.
Chassis Ground
Figure 10-2 PDAP-4S Chassis Ground
Chassis Ground
Figure 10-3 PDAP-15A Chassis Ground
Note: The PDAP-2S is grounded to the rack using thread-forming screws

and conductive plated rack adapters—as required for 23-inch (584 mm)
rack installation. No additional grounding procedures are required when
installed in a properly grounded telco rack.
6 The Power System Hardware Installation procedure is complete.
Continue on to Chapter 3—“Battery and Battery Return Distribution,”
page 10-7.

Grounding the PDAP
Grounding the There is a chassis ground location on the PDAP-4S and PDAP-15A for connecting a
PDAP grounding wire. Connect the grounding wire to the PDAP and to a confirmed source of
earth ground. For PDAP chassis ground locations, refer to Section 4—Power Interface
Specifications, Chapter 1—“Power Interface Specifications,” Power Distribution and
Alarm Panel (PDAP) Description, page 4-2.
The PDAP-2S is grounded to the rack using thread-forming screws and conductive
plated rack adapters—as required for 23-inch (584 mm) rack installation. No
additional grounding procedures are required when installed in a properly grounded
telco rack. Isolate DC power returns from frame ground (DC-I).
Important: For NEBS compliance, remove paint and any other

non-conductive coatings on the surfaces between the mounting hardware
and the rack framework. Clean all surfaces and apply anti-oxidant before
joining.
Coat all bare conductors with an appropriate anti-oxidant compound before
crimp connections are made. Bring all connectors to a bright finish and coat
with an anti-oxidant before making the connection.

Chapter 3
Battery and Battery Return Distribution
Introduction For power system installation overview and guidelines, refer first to
Chapter 1—“Power System Overview,” page 10-1.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to connect battery and battery
return distribution cables from each Traverse shelf in a single-rack configuration to the
PDAP.
• Battery and Battery Return Distribution Cabling Procedures, page 10-10
The instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in CO installations. In this
case, scan the topic labels in the left margin for tasks to review or refer to Appendix
B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Power Cabling Checklist,
page 12-32.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to make central office battery and
Equipment and battery return distribution connections to each Traverse shelf and the PDAP.
Tools
Important: Read through Section 6—Precautions and Common
Procedures, Chapter 1—“Precautions,” Electrical Precautions, page 6-3
before you begin.
General
• Diagonal cutters
• Crimping tool
• Volt Ohm Meter (VOM)
Note: Power (-48VDC and RETURN) copper area wire colors are dependent on your
local cable requirements.
Traverse shelf only

• 4 – #10 (clearance hole with .625-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable
lugs to connect battery distribution (-48VDC) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 for
PDAP-4S or -2S, #12 AWG or 3.3 mm2 for PDAP-15A red or gray copper area

wire) and battery return distribution (RETURN) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 for
PDAP-4S or -2S, #12 AWG or 3.3 mm2 for PDAP-15A black or blue copper area
wire) to the Traverse backplane
• 8 – #8-32 SEMS screws to connect battery distribution (-48VDC) and battery
return distribution (RETURN) cables to the Traverse backplane
• A common power return jumper plate to prevent faulty wiring short circuit. This
item comes pre-installed at the common return (RETURN_A RETURN_B) power
terminals on the bottom-center of the Traverse backplane
• A 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver) for Traverse shelf backplane power terminal
connections
PDAP-4S only
• 2 – battery distribution (-48VDC) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 red or gray
copper area wire)
• 2 – battery return distribution (RETURN) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 black or
blue copper area wire)
• 4 – #10 single-hole copper barrel cable lugs to connect battery distribution
(-48VDC) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 red or gray copper area wire) and battery
return distribution (RETURN) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 black or blue copper
area wire) to the PDAP-4S
• 4 – #10-32 KEP nuts to connect battery distribution (-48VDC) and battery return
distribution (RETURN) cables to the PDAP-4S
• A 5/16-inch (8 mm) socket
• For further information, refer to the Telect website at www.telect.com and request
publication number #009-8005-1404.
PDAP-15A only
• 2 – battery distribution (-48VDC) cables (e.g., #12 AWG or 3.3 mm2 red or gray
copper area wire)
• 2 – battery return distribution (RETURN) cables (e.g., #12 AWG or 3.3 mm2 black
or blue copper area wire)
(-48VDC) cables (e.g., #12 AWG or 3.3 mm2 red or gray copper area wire) and
battery return distribution (RETURN) cables (e.g., #12 AWG or 3.3 mm2 black or
blue copper area wire) to the PDAP-15A
• 4 – SEMS screws to connect battery distribution (-48VDC) and battery return
distribution (RETURN) cables to the PDAP-15A
• A Phillips screwdriver
• For further information, refer to the Telect website at www.telect.com and request
the specification sheet for publication number #T009-92222112711
PDAP-2S (Legacy) only

• 2 – battery distribution (-48VDC) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 red or gray
copper area wire)
• 2 – battery return distribution (RETURN) cables (e.g., #8 AWG or 9 mm2 black or
blue copper area wire)

Chapter 3 Battery and Battery Return Distribution

(-48VDC) cables (e.g., 8 AWG or 9 mm2 red or gray copper area wire) to the
PDAP-2S
• 2 – #10 (clearance hole with .625-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable
lugs to connect battery return distribution (RETURN) cables (#8 AWG or 9 mm2
black wire) to the PDAP-2S
• 2 – #10-32 KEP nuts to connect battery distribution (-48VDC) cables to the
PDAP-2S
• 4 – #10-32 KEP nuts to connect the battery return distribution (RETURN) cable to
the PDAP-2S

Battery and Battery Return Distribution Cabling Procedures
Battery and Battery and battery return distribution cabling procedures are written for each PDAP
Battery Return type. Refer to the correct procedures based on the type of PDAP installed in the rack:
Distribution • Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables, page 10-10
Cabling • Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables, page 10-13
Procedures • Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables, page 10-16
• Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables, page 10-18
• Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables, page 10-21
• Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Return Distribution Cables, page 10-24
Connect The PDAP-4S distributes central office battery (-48VDC) to up to four Traverse 1600
PDAP-4S or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack.
Battery
Distribution WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to the
Cables PDAP or central office battery source before beginning this procedure
to avoid personal injury.

Traverse main backplane.

PDAP-4S.
Follow these steps to connect battery distribution cables (-48VDC) from a Traverse
shelf to the PDAP-4S.
Note: Traverse 2000 main backplane graphics are used in the following procedure.
Battery (-48VDC_A and -48VDC_B) terminals are located in the same place on the
Traverse 1600 backplane.
Table 10-3 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables
Step Procedure
1 Remove the protective cover from the back of the PDAP-4S. Refer to
Chapter 2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers,” Remove the PDAP
Protective Back Cover, page 6-13 for details.
2 Remove the back cover from the [first] Traverse shelf in the rack. Refer to
Chapter 2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers,” page 6-9 for details.

Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables
Table 10-3 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Use the supplied -48VDC cable or use a crimping tool to attach a

double-hole copper barrel cable lug to one end of the battery distribution
(-48VDC) wire for the battery distribution cable connection to the
Traverse shelf.
4 Remove the SEMS screws from the Traverse shelf –48VDC_A power
terminals using a 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver).
5 Place the battery distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug over the
–48VDC_A power terminals on the Traverse main backplane. Replace and
tighten the SEMS screws using a 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver).
6 Route the battery "A" distribution cable (-48VDC) from the Traverse
–48VDC_A power terminals through the bottom cable port of the shelf, up
the rack rails, and over to the PDAP-4S –48VDC power terminals to
determine the length of the cable.
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
-48VDC_A -48VDC_B
Figure 10-4 Battery Distribution Cable Connections
7 Use diagonal cutters to cut the battery distribution (-48VDC) cable to the
correct length.
8 Use a crimping tool to attach a single-hole copper barrel cable lug to the
end of the battery distribution (-48VDC) cable.

Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables
Table 10-3 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
9 Remove the KEP nut from the PDAP-4S battery "A" distribution power
terminal, position A1 (shelf 1).
Battery “B” Distribution Battery “A” Distribution
Figure 10-5 PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Power Terminals
Note: Battery "A" distribution power terminal positions on the PDAP-4S

are: position A1 (shelf 1), A2 (shelf 2), A3 (shelf 3), and position A4 (shelf
4). Battery "B" distribution power terminal positions on the PDAP-4S are:
position B1 (shelf 1), B2 (shelf 2), B3 (shelf 3), and position B4 (shelf 4).
10 Place the single-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery "A"
distribution power terminal (position A1). Replace and tighten the nut.
11 Repeat Steps 1 through 10 for the battery "B" distribution cable
(i.e., connect the battery cable from the Traverse –48VDC_B power
terminals to position B1 of the PDAP-4S battery distribution terminals).
12 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack?
• Yes. Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for each Traverse shelf.
13 The Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables procedure is complete.
Continue to the next procedure, Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return
Distribution Cables.

Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables
Connect The PDAP-4S distributes central office battery return (RETURN) to up to four
PDAP-4S Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. Follow these steps to connect battery
Battery Return return distribution (RETURN) cables from a Traverse shelf to the PDAP-4S.
Distribution Note: Traverse 2000 main backplane graphics are used in the following procedure.
Cables Battery return distribution (RETURN_A, common RETURN_A RETURN_B, and
RETURN_B) terminals are located in the same place on the Traverse 1600 backplane.
Table 10-4 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables
Step Procedure
1 Did you first complete the Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution

Cables?
• Yes. Continue to the next step.
• No. Go to Table 10-3 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables,
page 10-10 to complete this cabling first.
2 Use the supplied RETURN cable or use a crimping tool to attach a
double-hole copper barrel cable lug to one end of the battery return
distribution (RETURN) wire for the battery return distribution cable
connection to the Traverse shelf.
3 Remove SEMS screws from the Traverse shelf RETURN_A power
4 Place the battery return distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug
over the RETURN_A power terminals. Replace and tighten the SEMS
screws using a 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver).

Table 10-4 Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Bring the battery return distribution (RETURN) cable from the Traverse
RETURN_A power terminals through the bottom cable port of the shelf,
up the rack rails, and over to the PDAP-4S battery return distribution
terminals on the PDAP-4S to determine the length of the cable.
Battery Return
Distribution Cables
B A
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Common Return
RETURN_A Jumper Plate RETURN_B
[RETURN_A RETURN_B]
Figure 10-6 Battery Return Distribution Cable Connection
6 Use diagonal cutters to cut the battery return distribution (RETURN) cable
to the correct length.
end of the battery return distribution (RETURN) cable.

Step Procedure
8 Remove the KEP nut from the PDAP-4S battery return "A" distribution
power terminal, position A1 (shelf 1).
Battery Return “B” Distribution Battery Return “A” Distribution
Figure 10-7 PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Power Terminals
Note: Battery return "A" distribution power terminal positions on the

PDAP-4S are: position A1 (shelf 1), A2 (shelf 2), A3 (shelf 3), and
position A4 (shelf 4). Battery return "B" distribution power terminal
positions on the PDAP-2S are: position B1 (shelf 1), B2 (shelf 2), B3
(shelf 3), and position B4 (shelf 4).
10 Repeat Steps 1 through 10 to connect battery return “B” distribution
(RETURN) cable (i.e., connect the battery return cable from the Traverse
RETURN_B power terminals to position B1 on the PDAP-4S battery
return distribution terminals).
11 Do you want to maintain the common return configuration using the
pre-installed common return jumper plate?
• No. For a separate return configuration, remove the SEMS screws and
common return jumper plate from the common return (RETURN_A
RETURN_B) power terminals at the bottom-center of the Traverse
main backplane. Replace and tighten the SEMS screws using a
1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver).
WARNING! For the separate return configuration, remember to
verify equivalent polarity (-48VDC) of the cable connections at the
A and B side battery (-48VDC) power terminals. Verify equivalent
polarity (RETURN) of the cable connections at the A and B side
battery return (RETURN) power terminals.

Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables
Step Procedure

• Yes. Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for the second shelf.
13 The Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables procedure is
complete.
Continue to Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling Procedures,
Chapter 4—“Battery and Battery Return Supply,” page 10-29.
Connect The PDAP-15A distributes central office battery (-48VDC) to the Traverse 600 shelf.
PDAP-15A
Battery WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to the
Distribution PDAP or central office battery source before beginning this procedure
Cables to avoid personal injury.


PDAP-15A.
Follow these steps to connect battery distribution (-48VDC) cables from a Traverse 600
shelf to the PDAP-15A.
Table 10-5 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables
Step Procedure
1 Remove the protective cover from the back of the PDAP-15A. Refer to
Protective Back Cover, page 6-13 for details.
Chapter 2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers,” Main Backplane
Covers, page 6-9 for details.

Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables
Table 10-5 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure

single-hole copper barrel cable lug to one end of the battery distribution
(-48VDC) wire for the battery distribution cable connection at the Traverse
shelf.
4 Remove the SEMS screw from the Traverse –48VDC_A power terminal.
5 Place the battery distribution copper barrel cable lug over the –48VDC A
power terminal on the backplane. Replace and tighten the screw.
6 Route the battery "A" distribution (-48VDC) cable from the –48VDC_A
power terminal through the side cable port of the Traverse shelf, up the
rack rails, and over to the PDAP-15A power terminal to determine the
length of the cable.
-48VDC_A
Power Terminals
-48VDC_B
Figure 10-8 Battery Distribution Cable Connection
correct length.
9 Remove the SEMS screw from the battery "A" distribution power
Figure 10-9 PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Power Terminals

Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables
Table 10-5 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
distribution power terminal. Replace and tighten the screw.
11 Repeat Steps 1 through 10 for the battery "B" distribution cable
(i.e., connect the battery distribution (-48VDC) cable from the Traverse
shelf –48VDC_B power terminals to the position "B" distribution power
terminal on the PDAP-15A).
12 The Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables procedure is
complete. Continue to the next procedure, Connect PDAP-15A Battery
Return Distribution Cables.
Connect The PDAP-15A distributes central office battery return (RETURN) to the Traverse 600
PDAP-15A shelf.
Battery Return Follow these steps to connect battery return distribution (RETURN) cables from a
Distribution Traverse shelf to the PDAP-15A.
Cables
Table 10-6 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables
Step Procedure
1 Did you first complete the Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution

Cables?
• No. Go to Table 10-5 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution
Cables, page 10-16 to complete this cabling first.
single-hole copper barrel cable lug to one end of an the battery return
distribution (RETURN) wire for the battery return distribution cable
connection at the Traverse shelf.
3 Remove the SEMS screw from the RETURN_A power terminal.
4 Place the single-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery return
distribution (RETURN) terminal. Replace and tighten the screw.

Table 10-6 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Route the battery return distribution (RETURN) cable from the

RETURN_A power terminal through the side cable port of the Traverse
shelf, up the rack rails, and over to the PDAP-15A power terminals to
determine the length of the cable.
Return_A
Return_B Power Terminals
8 The PDAP-15A provides battery return A and B distribution terminal lugs.
Remove the SEMS screw from the battery return terminal lug.
Battery “B” Return Distribution Battery “A” Return Distribution
Figure 10-11 PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Terminals
9 Place the battery return distribution cable lug over the RETURN A power
terminal. Replace and tighten the screw.
10 Repeat Steps 2 through 9 to connect battery return “B” distribution cable
(i.e., connect the battery return (RETURN) cable from the Traverse
RETURN_B power terminals to the position B1 battery return distribution
terminal on the PDAP-15A).

Table 10-6 Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure

main backplane. Replace and tighten the SEMS screws.
12 The Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables procedure is
complete.

Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables
Connect The legacy PDAP-2S distributes central office battery (-48VDC) to up to two Traverse
PDAP-2S 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack.
(Legacy)
Battery WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to the
Distribution PDAP or central office battery source before beginning this procedure
Cables to avoid personal injury.


PDAP-2S.
Follow these steps to connect battery distribution (-48VDC) cables from a Traverse
shelf to the PDAP-2S.
Battery distribution (-48VDC_A and -48VDC_B) terminals are located on the same
place on the Traverse 1600 backplane.
Table 10-7 Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables
Step Procedure
1 Remove the protective cover from the back of the PDAP-2S. Refer to
Protective Back Cover, page 6-13 for detailed instructions.
Chapter 2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers,” Main Backplane
Covers, page 6-9 for detailed instructions.
double-hole copper barrel cable lug to one end of the battery distribution
(-48VDC) wire for the battery distribution cable connection to the
Traverse.
4 Remove the SEMS screws from the Traverse shelf –48VDC_A power
5 Place the battery distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug over the
–48VDC_A power terminals on the Traverse backplane. Replace and
tighten the SEMS screws using a 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver).

Table 10-7 Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Route the battery "A" distribution (-48VDC) cable from the Traverse
–48VDC_A power terminals through the bottom cable port of the shelf, up
the rack rails, and over to the PDAP-2S power terminals to determine the
length of the cable.
-48VDC_A -48VDC_B
Figure 10-12 Battery Distribution Cable Connections
correct length.

Table 10-7 Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables (continued)
Step Procedure
9 Remove the KEP nut from the PDAP-2S battery "A" distribution power
Figure 10-13 PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Power Terminals
Note: Battery "A" distribution power terminal positions on the PDAP-2S

are position A1 (shelf 1) and position A2 (shelf 2). Battery "B" distribution
power terminal positions on the PDAP-2S are position B1 (shelf 1) and
position B2 (shelf 2).
11 Repeat Steps 1 through 10 for the battery "B" distribution cable (i.e.,
connect the battery distribution cable from the Traverse –48VDC_B power
terminal to the position B1 battery terminal on the PDAP-2S).
• Yes. Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for each Traverse shelf.
13 The Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables procedure is
complete.
Continue to the next procedure, Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery
Return Distribution Cables.

Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Return Distribution Cables
Connect The legacy PDAP-2S distributes central office battery return (RETURN) to up to two
PDAP-2S Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack.
(Legacy) Follow these steps to connect battery return distribution (RETURN) cables from a
Battery Return Traverse shelf to the PDAP-2S.
Distribution
Cables
Battery return distribution (RETURN_A and RETURN_B) terminals are located in the
same place on the Traverse 1600 backplane.
Table 10-8 Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Return Distribution Cables
Step Procedure
1 Did you first complete the Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery

Distribution Cables?
• No. Go to Table 10-7 Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery
Distribution Cables, page 10-21 to complete this procedure first.
double-hole copper barrel cable lug to one end of the battery return
distribution (RETURN) wire for the battery return distribution (RETURN)
cable connection to the Traverse shelf.
3 Remove SEMS screws from the Traverse RETURN_A power terminals
using a 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver).
4 Place the battery return distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug
over the RETURN_A power terminals. Replace and tighten the SEMS
screws using a 1/4-inch socket (or nutdriver).

Step Procedure
5 Route the battery return distribution (RETURN) cable from the Traverse
RETURN_A power terminals through the bottom cable port of the shelf,
up the rack rails, and over to the PDAP-2S power terminals to determine
the length of the cable.
Battery Return
Distribution Bus Bars
B A
RETURN_A Common Return RETURN_B

Jumper Plate
[RETURN_A RETURN_B]
7 Use a crimping tool to attach a double-hole copper barrel cable lug to the

Step Procedure
8 The PDAP-2S provides battery return A and B distribution terminal

lugs.1 2 Remove the KEP nuts from the battery return terminal lug, position
A1 (shelf 1).
Battery Return Bus Bars
B A
Battery Return "A" 2 1 Battery Return "A"

Supply Terminal Distribution Terminal
2 1
Lugs Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (right side view)
1 2 Battery Return "B"

Battery Return "B"
Supply Terminal
Distribution Terminal 1 2
Lugs
Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (left side side view)
Figure 10-15 PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Bus Bar
Note: PDAP-2S battery return distribution terminal lug positions on the

bus bar are position A1 (shelf 1), position A2 (shelf 2).
9 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery return bus bar
lugs (position A1). Replace and tighten the KEP nuts.
10 Repeat Steps 1 through 9 to connect battery return “B” distribution
(RETURN) cable (i.e., connect the battery return cable from the Traverse
RETURN_B power terminals to the position B1 battery return terminals
on the PDAP-2S).
main backplane. Replace and tighten the SEMS screws using a
1/4-inch socket (nutdriver).

Step Procedure

• Yes. Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for the second shelf.
13 The Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Return Distribution Cables
procedure is complete.
1
The PDAP-2S has four sets of battery return A and battery return B distribution terminal lugs; only two
sets are used to distribute separate battery return A and B to shelves 1 and 2.
2
An optional method of battery return distribution cabling is to share common distribution power terminals
at the PDAP-2S and at the Traverse main backplane.


Chapter 4
Battery and Battery Return Supply
Introduction For power system installation overview and guidelines, refer first to
Chapter 1—“Power System Overview,” page 10-1.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to connect:
• Battery cables from the central office power supply to the PDAP.
• Battery return cables from the central office battery return supply to the PDAP.
The topics are as follows:
• Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP, page 10-31
• Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP, page 10-32
• Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source, page 10-35
• Verify Polarity, page 10-37
• Verify Voltage, page 10-38
The instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in CO installations. In this
case, scan the topic labels in the left margin for tasks to review or refer to Appendix
B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Power Cabling Checklist,
page 12-32.

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make central office battery and
Equipment and battery return supply connections to the PDAP.
Tools
Important: Read through Section 6—Precautions and Common
Procedures, Chapter 1—“Precautions,” Electrical Precautions, page 6-3
before you begin.
General:
• 2 – (customer-supplied) battery supply cables
• 2 – (customer-supplied) battery return supply cables
• 4 – (customer-supplied) copper cable lugs for connection at the central office
battery source
Important: The customer-supplied battery and battery return supply

cables and lugs are required for power distribution to the current feed size.
Refer to your local electrical code for cable and lug requirements based on
input feed size.

• Crimping tool
• Diagonal cutters
• Volt Ohm Meter (VOM)
PDAP-4S only:
• 4 – 1/4-inch (clearance hole with 3/4-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable
lugs for battery and battery return supply cable connection to the PDAP-4S
• 8 – 1/4-20 nuts to connect battery and battery return supply cables to the PDAP-4S
• 8 – 1/4-inch lock washers to connect battery and battery return supply cables to the
PDAP-4S
• 8 – 1/4-inch flat washers to connect battery and battery return supply cables to the
PDAP-4S
• For further information, refer to the Telect website at www.telect.com. and request
the publication for Model #009-8005-1404.
PDAP-15A only:
• 4 – #10 (clearance hole with 5/8-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable lugs
for battery and battery return supply cable connection to the PDAP-15A
• 4 – M5 (0.19-inch or 5 mm) nuts to connect battery and battery return supply
cables at the PDAP-15A
• 4 – M5 (0.19-inch or 5 mm) lock washers to connect battery and battery return
supply cables at the PDAP-15A
• For further information, refer to the Telect website at www.telect.com.and request
the publication for Model #0HPGMT05BR.

Chapter 4 Battery and Battery Return Supply
Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP
PDAP-2S (Legacy) only:

• 4 – 3/8-inch (clearance hole with 1-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable
lugs for battery and battery return supply cable connection to the PDAP-2S
• 8 – 3/8-16 nuts to connect battery and battery return supply cables to the PDAP-2S
• 8 – 3/8-inch lock washers to connect battery and battery return supply cables to the
PDAP-2S
Connect Battery "A" and "B" supply cables (customer-supplied) are run from the central office
Battery Supply battery distribution fuse bay (BDFB), or other central office battery source, to the
Cables to the PDAP. Complete battery and battery return distribution cabling before bringing central
PDAP office battery and battery return supply cables to the PDAP.
Follow these steps to connect battery supply cables to the PDAP.
WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to central

office battery source before beginning this procedure to avoid
personal injury.


Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP
Table 10-9 Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP
Step Procedure
1 Run battery "A" and "B" supply cables from the BDFB across the
horizontal cable rack and down the rack rails to the PDAP following local
procedures.
2 Remove the protective cover from the back of the PDAP. Refer to
Protective Back Cover, page 6-13 for detailed instructions.
3 Bring the cables to the battery "A" and "B" supply PDAP-4S or
PDAP-15A terminal studs or PDAP-2S bus bars.
Battery “B” Supply Terminals Battery “A” Supply Terminals
Figure 10-16 PDAP-4S Battery Supply Terminal Lugs
Battery “B” Supply Battery “A” Supply

Terminals Terminals
Figure 10-17 PDAP-15A Battery Supply Terminal Lugs
Battery "B" Supply Bus Bar Battery "A" Supply Bus Bar
NEG VDC Input NEG VDC Input
Battery "B" NEG VDC Battery "A" NEG VDC

Input Terminal Lugs Input Terminal Lugs
(left side view) (right side view)
Figure 10-18 PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Supply Terminal Lugs

Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP
Table 10-9 Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Cut the battery supply cables to the correct length.

5 Use a crimping tool to attach double-hole copper barrel cable lugs to the
ends of the battery supply cables for connection to the PDAP.
6 Remove the nuts and lock washers from the PDAP battery "A" and "B"
NEG VDC input terminal lugs.
7 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery "A" NEG
VDC input terminal lugs. Replace the lock washers and tighten nuts.
8 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery "B" NEG
VDC input lugs. Replace the lock washers and tighten the nuts.
9 The Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP procedure is complete.
Continue to the next procedure, Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to
the PDAP.
Connect Battery return supply cables (customer-supplied) are run from the central office battery
Battery Return return bus bar, or other central office battery return source, to the PDAP.
Supply Cables
to the PDAP WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to central
office battery source before beginning this procedure to avoid
personal injury.

Follow these steps to connect battery return supply cables to the PDAP.
Table 10-10 Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP
Step Procedure
1 Did you first complete the Connect Battery Supply Cables to the
PDAP?
• Yes. Continue to the next step.
• No. Go to Table 10-9 Connect Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP,
page 10-32 to complete this cabling first.

Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP
Table 10-10 Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP (continued)
Step Procedure
2 Run battery return “A” and “B” supply cables from the battery return
supply across the horizontal cable rack and down the rails to the battery
return supply PDAP-4S or PDAP-15A terminal studs or PDAP-2S bus
bars following local procedures.
Battery “B” Return Supply Terminals Battery “A” Return Supply Terminals
Figure 10-19 PDAP-4S Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs
Battery “B” Return Battery “A” Return

Supply Terminals Supply Terminals
Figure 10-20 PDAP-15A Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bars
B A
Battery Return "A" 2 1 Battery Return "A"

Supply Terminal Distribution Terminal
2 1
Lugs Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (right side view)
1 2 Battery Return "B"

Battery Return "B"
Supply Terminal
Distribution Terminal 1 2
Lugs
Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (left side side view)
Figure 10-21 PDAP-2S Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs
3 Cut the battery return supply cables to the correct length.

4 Use a crimping tool to attach double-hole copper barrel cable lugs to the
end of the battery return supply cables for connection to the PDAP.
5 Remove the lock washers, flat washers (PDAP-4S only), and nuts from the
PDAP battery return “A” and “B” RETURN bus bars.

Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source
Table 10-10 Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery return “A”
RETURN terminal lugs. Replace the lock washers, flat washers (PDAP-4S
only), and tighten the nuts.
7 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery return “B”
RETURN terminal lugs. Replace the lock washers, flat washers (PDAP-4S
only), and tighten the nuts.
8 WARNING! Use a Volt Ohm Meter (VOM) to verify continuity of
battery and battery return supply cables.
9 Replace the protective cover on the back of the PDAP. Refer to
10 The Connect Battery Return Supply Cables to the PDAP procedure is
complete.
Continue to the next procedure, Connect Supply Cables to the Central
Office Source.
Connect Follow these steps to connect battery and battery return supply cables and lugs
Supply Cables (customer-supplied) to the central office source.
to the Central
Office Source WARNING! Use extreme caution when working with battery and
battery return supply cables. Remove all metal jewelry when working
with power circuits.
WARNING! Complete continuity testing before connecting battery

and battery return cables to the central office source.

Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source
Table 10-11 Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source
Step Procedure
1 WARNING! Before connecting the supply cables, go to the front of the

PDAP and verify that all circuit breakers are in the OFF position,
TPA fuse holders are empty, and that GMT fuse positions are empty
or contain dummy fuses.
Make sure TPA fuse holders are empty
Make sure GMT fuses are empty or contain dummy fuses
Figure 10-23 PDAP-15A Front View
Circuit Breakers—OFF Circuit Breakers—OFF

A1 B1
A2 B2

Verify Polarity
Table 10-11 Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source (continued)
Step Procedure
2 Connect battery and battery return supply cables (at the BDFB and battery
return source) following local procedures or arrange for a local central
office technician to make these connections.
3 The Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source procedure is
complete.
Are all the Traverse system components installed and Network Interface,
Alarm, Ethernet, and RS-232 connections complete?
• Yes. Continue to Section 11—Node Start-up and Commissioning
Procedures, Chapter 1—“Node Start-up and Commissioning,”
page 11-1.
• No. Complete all remaining component installation and cable
connections. Once complete, then (and only then) continue to
Section 11—Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures,
page 11-1.
Verify Polarity Confirm polarity between the battery and battery return supply PDAP connections.
WARNING! Go to the front of the PDAP and verify that all circuit
breakers are in the OFF position and fuse holders are empty before
verifying polarity or voltage.
Battery and Battery Return “B” Supply Terminals Battery and Battery Return “A” Supply Terminals
Figure 10-25 PDAP-4S Battery and Return Supply Terminal Connections
Battery and Return “B” Battery and Return “A”

Supply Terminals Supply Terminals
Figure 10-26 PDAP-15A Battery and Return Supply Terminal Connections

Verify Voltage
NEG VDC Input NEG VDC Input
Battery "B"
NEG VDC Battery "A"
Input Lugs NEG VDC
Input Lugs
Battery "B" Supply Bus Bar
(Left Side View)
Battery Return
4 3
"B" Supply Lugs 2 1
4 3 Battery Return 2 1
Battery Return "B" Bus Bar "A" Supply Lugs Battery Return Bus Bar
(Left Side View) (Right Side View)
Figure 10-27 PDAP-2S Battery and Battery Return Supply Connections
Verify Voltage Use a VOM to measure the voltage present at the NEG VDC "A" and "B" input lugs on
the PDAP. Voltage reading must be between –48 and –60 VDC.

S ECTION 11 N ODE S TART - UP AND C OMMISSIONING
P ROCEDURES
S ECTION 7START-UP AND MODULE PLACEMENT
Contents
Chapter 1
Node Start-up and Commissioning
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
CLI Commands and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Required Node Commissioning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Conditional Node Commissioning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Commissioning Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Insert the Active GCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Commission the Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Insert the Standby GCM and All Cards in the Traverse Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Visual Status During and After Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Flashing red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Solid green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Power and Active/Standby LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
List of Tables
Table 11-1 Node Start-up Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Table 11-2 CLI Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Table 11-3 Required Node Commissioning Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Table 11-4 Conditional Node Commissioning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Table 11-5 Commissioning Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Table 11-6 Commission the Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Table 11-7 Insert the Standby GCM and All Other Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Table 11-8 Power and Active/Standby—GCM Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Table 11-9 Power and Active/Standby—All Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 11 Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures

S ECTION 11NODE START- UP AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
Chapter 1
Node Start-up and Commissioning
Introduction The Traverse node is ready for power-up after all the hardware is installed: shelf, fan
tray, and air ramp, cabling (network, alarm, timing, Ethernet, power), and polarity and
voltage testing is complete. This chapter provides instructions to start-up and
commission of a Traverse shelf:
• Before You Begin, page 11-1
• CLI Commands and Conventions, page 11-3
• Required Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-3
• Conditional Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-5
• Commissioning Process, page 11-6
• Visual Status During and After Start-up, page 11-11
• Power and Active/Standby LED Indicators, page 11-12
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Commissioning Checklists,” Node Start-up
and Commissioning Checklist, page 12-35.
Before You Review this information before you begin.

Begin
Table 11-1 Node Start-up Requirements
Requirement Reference
Read through the entire chapter and Chapter 1—“Node Start-up and Commissioning”
gather together reference material
first.
All hardware is installed. Section 7—Hardware Installation Procedures,

Chapter 1—“Traverse System Rack Installation Overview,”
page 7-1

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 11: Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures
Before You Begin
Table 11-1 Node Start-up Requirements (continued)
Requirement Reference
All cabling is installed. • Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling

Procedures, page 9-3
• Section 8—Network Interface Cabling Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Network Interface Cabling Overview,” page 8-1
• Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Power System Overview,” page 10-1
Polarity and voltage testing is Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling Procedures,
complete. Chapter 4—“Battery and Battery Return Supply”
Note: Once testing is complete, plug fuses into the fuse panel.
Power is turned on to the Traverse. Important: Switch on power to the Traverse shelves and fan
trays at the power system before placing any cards in the shelf.
A PC or laptop with hyperterminal n/a

or other VT-100 terminal emulation
software.
A standard, straight-through serial Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling

port cable with: Procedures, Chapter 4—“Management Interface Cabling,”
• 9-pin RS-232-C (DB-9) male RS-232 DTE Interface Connection, page 9-42
connector on one end (to connect
to the General Control Module
card)
• A 9-pin or 25-pin RS-232-C
(DB9 or DB-25) connector to
match the connector on your PC
CLI command reference TransNav Management System CLI Guide
Required node commissioning • Network administrator

parameters. • Required Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-3
Note: IP address information is • TransNav Management System Product Overview Guide,
typically provided by your local Section 2—Management System Planning, Chapter 3—“IP
network administrator and is Address Planning,” page 2-9
required for management purposes.
Traverse node IP addresses should
be allocated from the same domain.
Conditional node commissioning Conditional Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-5

parameters.

Chapter 1 Node Start-up and Commissioning
Required Node Commissioning Parameters
CLI Commands Refer to the TransNav Management System CLI Guide for a complete explanation of
and commands and usage. The following conventions are used in these procedure tables
Conventions and are the same as listed in the TransNav Management System CLI Guide.
Table 11-2 CLI Command Descriptions
Command Description
Boldface Boldface indicates commands and keywords that are
entered literally as shown.
Italics Italics indicate arguments; you supply these values.
Required Node Required node commissioning parameters are provided by your local network
Commissioning administrator and are listed in the following table.
Parameters
Table 11-3 Required Node Commissioning Parameters
Parameter Description
Node ID The Node ID is the node name used to access CLI node-level
(node-id) commands after commissioning. It is also the node name displayed in
the TransNav GUI at the bottom of the Shelf View window.
Important: Enter the name of the node (node-id) using a
recommended maximum of 15 characters. Use alphanumeric characters
only. Do not use punctuation, spaces, or special characters in this field.
Additionally, the node name (node-id) is case-sensitive. Ensure that this
node name (node-id) is identical to the Node Name GUI parameter that
may have been configured during any node preprovisioning.
Node IP The Node IP address; this is also known as the Router IP in a data
(node-ip) network environment.
The node IP address is provided by your local network administrator
and is based on the network topology.
See the TransNav Management System Product Overview Guide,
Section 2—Management System Planning, Chapter 3—“IP Address
Planning,” page 2-9 for details on assigning IP addresses to network
nodes.

Required Node Commissioning Parameters
Table 11-3 Required Node Commissioning Parameters (continued)
Standard Standard is required to set the default technology standard for

(standard) multi-standard (SONET/SDH) cards found during discovery. For
example, the 12-port DS3/E3/EC-1 is a multi-standard card. The
Standard parameter values are:
• ANSI_only. An ANSI-only node. A user can only see ANSI options.
• ANSI_default. A gateway node with the ANSI mode as default.
Default settings are ANSI but can be switched to SDH for dual mode
optical/electrical cards.
• ITU_default. A gateway node with the ITU mode as default.
Default settings are SDH but can be switched to SONET for dual
mode optical/electrical cards.
Operation Mode Operation Mode is required to set either an ADM or DCS mode for the
(oper-mode) node. This command generates a node restart. The Operation Mode
parameter values are:
• ADM: Add-drop multiplexer
• DCS-96: Single-shelf DCS application
• DCS-384: Matrix shelf in a DCS application
• DCS-IO: Input/output shelf in a DCS application
Important: If the Operation Mode parameter is set to one of the DCS
modes, then it is mandatory to also set the Matrix STS Access ID
(MS AID) Format. For more information, see Conditional Node
Commissioning Parameters, page 11-5.

Conditional Node Commissioning Parameters
Conditional Depending on where the node is located in the network, you may need to commission
Node the parameters described in the following table.
Commissioning Table 11-4 Conditional Node Commissioning Parameters
Parameters
MSAID format If this node is part of a DCS application, choose the MSAID format:
(msaid-format) • MSAid-VT-Seq
• MSAid-VT-GR253
• MSAid-VTG-VT
See the TransNav Management System GUI Guide, Section 7—DCS
Applications, Chapter 1—“DCS-384 Matrix Shelf,” MSAID Formats,
page 7-3 for explanations of MSAID formats.
Backplane DCN IP Required on each node that is connected or routed to the management
server or on any node with a subtended device.
(bp-dcn-ip)
The backplane DCN Ethernet interface IP address is provided by your
local network administrator and is based on the network topology.
Enter an IP address if this node is connected to the management server
(either directly or through a router) or to a TransAccess product.
See the Traverse Product Overview Guide, Section 2—Management
System Planning, Chapter 3—“IP Address Planning,” page 2-9 for
details on assigning IP addresses to network nodes.
Backplane DCN Mask Required for each bp-dcn-ip. This value depends on site practices.
(bp-dcn-mask) Enter the appropriate address mask of the bp-dcn-ip address.
Backplane DCN Gateway Required for each bp-dcn-ip. This value depends on site practices.
(bp-dcn-gw-ip) If the node is connected directly to the management server, this address
is the IP gateway of the management server.
If there is a router between the management server and this node, this
address is the IP address of the port on the router connected to the
Ethernet interface on the back of the Traverse node.
EMS IP Required if there is a router between this node and the management
server.
(ems-ip)
This address is the IP address of the TransNav management server. This
address is provided by your local network administrator and is based on
the network topology.
See the Traverse Product Overview Guide, Section 2—Management
System Planning, Chapter 3—“IP Address Planning,” page 2-9 for
details on assigning IP addresses to network nodes.
EMS Mask Required for each ems-ip. This value depends on site practices.
(ems-mask) This address is the address mask of the IP address on the management
server (ems-ip).
EMS Gateway Required for each ems-ip. This value depends on site practices.
(ems-gw-ip) This address is the IP address of the port on the router connected to the
Ethernet interface on the back of the Traverse shelf. This address is the
same address as bp-dcn-gw-ip.

Commissioning Process
Commissioning Complete the following procedures in the commissioning process.

Process
Important: Refer to Visual Status During and After Start-up,
page 11-11 and Power and Active/Standby LED Indicators, page 11-12
as necessary.
Table 11-5 Commissioning Process
Step Procedure
1 Power up the node. See Section 6—Power Installation and Cabling

Procedures.
2 Insert the Active GCM, page 11-6.
3 Commission the Node, page 11-7. For examples of network timing, see
Traverse Provisioning Guide, Chapter 4—“Configuring Network Timing,”
Network Timing Example, page 1-15.
4 Insert the Standby GCM and All Cards in the Traverse Node,
page 11-10.
5 The Commissioning Process is complete.
Insert the Insert a GCM in Traverse slot GCMA or GCMB; this becomes the active GCM.
Active GCM
Important: Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when
working with Traverse cards.
For detailed information, refer to these procedures in Section 6—Precautions and

Common Procedures, Chapter 3—“Inserting and Removing Cards”:
• Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors, page 6-16 if you are placing a GCM
with integrated optics (GCM OC-12/STM-4 or GCM OC-48/STM-16)
Important: The GCM power LED is solid green indicating that the
GCM has power. The solid green Active/Standby LED indicates the active
GCM card. Use the CLI to commission and configure the active GCM.

Commission the Node
Commission
the Node Important: TransNav CLI commands are used in the following
procedures. TransNav system software is backward compatible with the
previous major release.
WARNING! Do not change the Node ID or Node IP Address once

these are set during commissioning. Changing the Node ID or Node IP
Address will affect services.
Follow these steps to commission the node.
Table 11-6 Commission the Node
Step Procedure
1 Is the active GCM card inserted into the Traverse shelf?

• Yes. Connect a serial port cable to the active GCM RS-232 interface
(DB-9 connector) and to your PC or laptop. Refer to the Traverse
Product Overview Guide, Section 2—Platform Descriptions for the
location of the RS-232 interface on the faceplate of the GCM.
• No. First, Insert the Active GCM, page 11-6, then connect the serial
cable as stated above.
2 Power up your PC or laptop.
3 Start VT-100 emulation software.
4 Open your terminal emulation session.
5 Enter the correct parameters settings for the communications port (COM1 or
COM2):
Baud Rate: 9600
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1
Flow Control: None
6 Important: You may have to press the Enter button several times to
establish the session and to receive the Turin logo and session prompt.
Your terminal responds with the Turin logo.
Please type CLI to start a new session...
7 To log on to the CLI:
Type: CLI

Commission the Node
Table 11-6 Commission the Node (continued)
Step Procedure
8 The CLI responds:

Login:
Type: admin
Password:
Type: admin
9 At the command line, type the following command sequence:
exec node commission node-id nodeName node-ip
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd standard technologyStandard
oper-mode operationMode
See Required Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-3 for the
descriptions of these parameters.
10 At the command prompt:
Changing node commissioning will result in a
reinitialization of the Database. Are you sure?
[yes|no]:
Type y to reinitialize the database on the GCM.
11 If the value in the Operation Mode (oper-mode) parameter is DCS-IO,
DCS-96, or DCS-384, enter the following command:
set node general msaid-format msaidFormat
See Conditional Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-5 for the
descriptions of this parameter.
12 Is this node connected to a DCN or a subtended device?
• No. Go to Step 14.
• Yes. Enter the backplane DCN IP address information.
Type: set node ip bp-dcn-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
bp-dcn-mask aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd bp-dcn-gw-ip
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd is the correct IP address from your network
administrator.

Commission the Node
Table 11-6 Commission the Node (continued)
Step Procedure
13 Is this node is connected or routed to the management server?

• No. Go to Step 14.
• Yes. Enter the EMS IP information:
Type: set node ip ems-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ems-mask
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ems-gw aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd is the correct IP address from your network
administrator.
14 Restart the node:
Type: exec node restart
CLI responds: Are you sure you want to execute this
command? [yes|no]:
Type: yes
The node begins the restart sequence.
15 Exit your terminal emulation session.
16 The Commission the Node procedure is complete.
Continue to Insert the Standby GCM and All Cards in the Traverse Node,
page 11-10.

Insert the Standby GCM and All Cards in the Traverse Node
Insert the Insert the standby GCM and all other cards in the node after commissioning is
Standby GCM complete on the active GCM. Follow these steps to continue inserting cards in the
and All Cards shelf.
in the Traverse Refer to Section 12—Appendices, Appendix A—“Card Placement Planning and
Node Guidelines,” page 12-1 and the following procedures in Section 6—Precautions and
Common Procedures, Chapter 3—“Inserting and Removing Cards,” page 6-15 for
detailed information:
• Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors, page 6-16 if inserting optical cards

working with Traverse cards.
Table 11-7 Insert the Standby GCM and All Other Cards
Step Procedure
1 Insert the standby GCM in the remaining GCM slot, GCMA or GCMB.
The Active/Standby LED on the standby GCM flashes amber while it is
synchronizing with the active GCM.
2 Wait for synchronization to complete on the standby GCM. The
Active/Standby LED flashes green indicating that it is the standby GCM
and that synchronization is complete.
3 Insert the remaining cards in the Traverse node based on your engineering
work order and the physical cabling at the main and fiber optic backplanes.
Refer to Section 12—Appendices, Appendix A—“Card Placement Plan-
ning and Guidelines,” page 12-1 for more information.
Note: All cards and ports come up “locked” and the port LEDs remain
“off”. Cards and ports are “unlocked” or enabled as part of equipment
configuration. Refer to Traverse Provisioning Guide for more information.
4 The Insert the Standby GCM and All Other Cards procedure is complete.
The Traverse system installation, start-up, and commissioning are
complete.

Visual Status During and After Start-up
Visual Status The GCM power LED indicates the status of start-up and initialization. The GCM
During and power LED will go through the following sequence:
After Start-up
Flashing red
Power On Self Test (POST) is started 1.
Solid green
Initialization complete and successful.
Table 11-8 Power and Active/Standby—GCM Cards
RED Amber GREEN OFF

LED
Flashing Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Solid
Initializing; Hardware N/A N/A Node is in Passed No power

POST is failure commissioning initialization
Power started. detected; mode and is
replace the operational
card.
N/A N/A Standby Card type Standby mode; Active and Initializing;
mode; does not synchroniza- operational POST is
synchroniza- match the tion with the started.
Active/ tion with the provisioned active card is
Standby Active card card type or complete.
is not the card is
complete. placed in an
invalid slot.1
1
Please refer to Appendix A—“Card Placement Planning and Guidelines,” page 12-1 for valid card placement guidelines.
Important: The solid green Active/Standby LED indicates the active

GCM card. Use the CLI to commission and configure the active GCM.
1
The POST takes approximately one minute to run and it invokes the LED activity for initialization.

Power and Active/Standby LED Indicators
Power and The LEDs in the following tables apply to all cards.
Active/Standby
LED Indicators
Table 11-9 Power and Active/Standby—All Cards
RED Amber GREEN OFF

LED
Flashing Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Solid
Initialization Hardware Initialization is No power

and diagnosis failure complete and
Power is underway detected; N/A N/A N/A the card is
but not replace the operational.
complete card
The card is The card is The card is The Active The card is
unlocked and in unlocked. The unlocked and in card is locked or
Standby mode.1 card type does not Standby mode. unlocked and initialization
Active/ Synchronization match the Synchronization operational. is not
N/A N/A
Standby with the Active provisioned card with the Active complete.
card is not type or the card is card is complete.
complete. placed in an
invalid slot.2
1
Does not apply to GbE or OC-N cards.
2
For the Traverse platform, refer to Appendix A—“Card Placement Planning and Guidelines,” page 12-1 for valid card placement
guidelines.

S ECTION 12 A PPENDICES
S ECTION 12
Contents
Appendix A
Card Placement Planning and Guidelines
Card Placement Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Traverse 1600 Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Traverse 2000 Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Traverse 600 Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Appendix B
Installation and Commissioning Checklists
Power System Hardware Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Network Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Alarm Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Timing and Management Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
Power Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
Node Start-up and Commissioning Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
Appendix C
TransAccess Mux Interface Specification
List of Figures
Figure 12-1 TransAccess Muxes Connected to an Ethernet Network . . . . . . . 12-39
List of Tables
Table 12-1 Card Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Table 12-2 Redundancy Rules for GCM Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Table 12-3 Traverse 1600 Card Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Table 12-4 Traverse 2000 Card Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Table 12-5 Traverse 600 Card Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Table 12-6 Power System Hardware Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Table 12-7 Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Table 12-8 Network Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Table 12-9 Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible, Environmental and
Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Table 12-10 Timing and Management Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
Table 12-11 Power Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
Table 12-12 Node Start-up and Commissioning Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 12 Appendices

S ECTION 12APPENDICES
Appendix A
Card Placement Planning and Guidelines
Introduction It is important to plan for card placement during installation, cabling, and start-up
activities for the Traverse system. The following tables provide card placement
guidelines for the Traverse shelf, including:
• Valid slot placement for GCM, optical, electrical, and VT/VC switching cards
• Equipment protection (1:N, where N=1, 2), working, and protection card
placement
• Unprotected card placement
Important: The Traverse system allows the network operator an

in-service upgrade capability (protection switching) to replace older cards
with newer cards with minimal traffic interruption for each card in any
1:N protection group.
• NGE
• NGE Plus
• EoPDH
• Legacy Ethernet

This appendix contains information on the following topics:

• Card Placement Guidelines, page 12-2
• Traverse 1600 Card Placement, page 12-8

Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 12: Appendices
Card Placement Guidelines
Card The following table provides guidelines for placement of cards in a Traverse shelf.
Placement
Guidelines
Table 12-1 Card Placement Guidelines
Traverse Traverse Traverse

Comments
Card Type 1600 2000 600
Slot #s Slot #s Slot #s
GCM
• GCM GCMA GCMA GCMA Redundant GCMs are recommended for

• GCM Enhanced and and and equipment protection. However, if only one
• GCM with OC-12/STM-4 GCMB GCMB GCMB GCM is used, it can be placed in either slot
• GCM with OC-48/STM-16 (slots 15 (slots 19 (slots 5 GCMA or GCMB.
• GCM with VTX and 16) and 20) and 6)
Redundant GCMs can be different types. See
• GCM with OC-12/STM-4 plus
Table 12-2 Redundancy Rules for GCM
VTX/VCX
Types for a list of control cards.
• GCM with OC-48/STM-16 plus
VTX/VCX
Electrical
• DS1 1–12 1–16 1–4 Important: Do not place an electrical card

• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC (12-port) (of another type) to the left of any
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC (24-port) 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card.
• DS3/EC-1 Transmux
• E1
In a 1:1 equipment protection scheme with a
• Universal Transmux (24-port or
2-slot electrical connector card (ECM), either
48-port) (UTMX-24 or UTMX-48)
the left- or right-adjacent card from the
protection card is the working card.
In a 1:2 equipment protection scheme, the

center card protects the left- and right-adjacent
working cards.
In an unprotected scheme, place cards in any

valid slot; the 2-slot DS3/E3 ECM provides
access to only the right-most card, so place an
optical card in the left-most slot. The 3-slot
DS3/E3 and 3-slot E1 ECM provides access to
only the center and right-most cards, so place
an optical card in the left-most slot.
For Optical Transmux card placement, see

Optical Transmux in this table.
Optical Transmux

Appendix A Card Placement Planning and Guidelines
Table 12-1 Card Placement Guidelines (continued)

Comments
Card Type 1600 2000 600
• DS3/EC-1 Transmux 1–12 1–16 1–4 Important: Do not place an electrical card (of
another type) to the left of any
10/100BaseTX-inclusive card.
(SONET network only) The DS3 Transmux

card supports 1:N equipment protection for
high-density optical transmux applications,
where N=1 to 12 in a Traverse 2000. This
application has no DS3/E3 ECM requirement.
One card protects all remaining adjacent cards.
• UTMX-24 or UTMX-48 1–12 1–16 1–4 Important: Do not place an electrical card (of
another type) to the left of any
10/100BaseTX-inclusive card.
(SONET network only) The UTMX cards

support 1:N equipment protection for
high-density optical transmux applications,
where N=1 to 4 in a Traverse 2000. This
application has no DS3/E3 ECM requirement.
One card protects all remaining adjacent cards.


Comments
Card Type 1600 2000 600
Ethernet (Next Generation)
NGE or NGE Plus: 1–12 1–16 1–4 Important: Do not place an electrical card (of
• GbE [LX, SX] plus 10/100BaseTX another type) to the left of any
Combo [CEP] 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card.
• GbE TX plus GbE [LX or SX] plus
10/100BaseTX Combo [CEP] In a 1:1 equipment protection scheme with a
NGE only: 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM, either the
• GbE CWDM plus 10/100BaseTX left- or right-adjacent card from the protection
Combo card is the working card.
• GbE SX plus GbE CWDM plus
10/100BaseTX Combo In an unprotected scheme, place cards in any
valid slot. The 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM
provides access to only the right-most card, so
place an optical card in the left-most slot.
Use the following options when placing any

10/100BaseTX-inclusive cards in a Traverse
shelf with DS1, DS3/E3/EC-1 CC, DS3/EC-1
Transmux, or E1 cards:
• Place 10/100BaseTX-inclusive cards
directly to the left of DS1, DS3/E3/EC-1
CC, DS3/EC-1 Transmux, or E1 cards. An
OC-N/STM-N card or 1-slot wide blank
faceplate is not required if the
10/100BaseTX-inclusive cards are placed
to the left of electrical interface cards.
or
• Place an OC-N/STM-N card or a 1-slot
wide blank faceplate between the
10/100BaseTX and an electrical interface
card if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is
placed to the right of the electrical interface
card.
Ethernet (Dual Slot GbE)
• 10GBASE-LR 1–14 1–18 n/a None
• 10-port 1GbE card, no optics 1–12 1–16 Requires an SFP connector card. See the
Traverse Installation and Commissioning
Guide, Section 2—Network Interface
Specifications, Chapter 1—“Fiber Optic
Interface Cabling Specifications,” GbE-10
SCM, Fiber Assignments, and SFPs,
page 2-4.
Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH)


Comments
Card Type 1600 2000 600
• GbE [LX, SX] plus 10/100BaseTX 1–12 1–16 1–4 Important: Do not place an electrical card (of
Combo [CEP/EoPDH] another type) to the left of any
• GbE TX plus GbE [LX or SX] plus 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card.
10/100BaseTX Combo
[CEP/EoPDH] In a 1:1 equipment protection scheme with a
2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM, either the
left- or right-adjacent card from the protection
card is the working card.
In an unprotected scheme, place cards in any

valid slot. The 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM
provides access to only the right-most card, so
place an optical card in the left-most slot.
Use the following options when placing any

10/100BaseTX-inclusive cards in a Traverse
shelf with DS1, DS3/E3/EC-1 CC, DS3/EC-1
Transmux, or E1 cards:
• Place 10/100BaseTX-inclusive cards
directly to the left of DS1, DS3/E3/EC-1
CC, DS3/EC-1 Transmux, or E1 cards. An
OC-N/STM-N card or 1-slot wide blank
faceplate is not required if the
10/100BaseTX-inclusive cards are placed
to the left of electrical interface cards.
or
• Place an OC-N/STM-N card or a 1-slot
wide blank faceplate between the
10/100BaseTX and an electrical interface
card if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is
placed to the right of the electrical interface
card.
SONET/SDH
• OC-3/STM-1 1–14 1–18 1-4 None

• OC-12/STM-4
• OC-48/STM-16
• OC-48/STM-16 with VTX/VCX
(legacy)
• OC-192/STM-64 1/2, 3/4, 1/2, 3/4, n/a The OC-192/STM-64 cards require two slots
5/6, 7/8, 5/6, 7/8, for placement. The left side of the
9/10, 9/10, OC-192/STM-64 card is placed in an odd
11/12, and 11/12, numbered slot.
13/14 13/14,
15/16,
and 17/18


Comments
Card Type 1600 2000 600
VT/TU Switching
VT/TU 5G Switch 1–14 1–18 1-4 The VT/TU 5G Switch card supports 1:N
equipment protection where:
• N=1 to 9 in a Traverse 2000
(SONET network only)
• N=1 (SDH network only)
This card has no ECM requirement. One card
protects all adjacent cards.
Important: For electrical port usage only, place an OC-N/STM-N or 1-slot

blank faceplate between any 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card and an electrical
card (of another type), if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed to the
right of an electrical interface card. A blank faceplate or OC-N/STM-N card
is not required if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed to the left of an
electrical card.
If the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card also contains optical ports, and if the
user intends to ONLY use the optical ports, this electrical port usage
restriction does not apply.

Turin recommends the following card placement scheme:

• Place DS1, DS3, E3, EC-1 CC, DS3/EC-1 Transmux, or E1, and 10/100BaseTX
(see Important note above for 10/100BaseTX placement) cards in the left-most
slots beginning with slots 1 and 2. Work towards the center of the shelf as required
(up to Traverse 1600 slot 12 or Traverse 2000 slot 16).
• Place VT/TU 5G Switch cards next to the GCM cards. Place additional cards
toward the center of the shelf as required.
• Place OC-N/STM-N and GbE cards (optical cards) beginning in the right-most
available slot (starting at Traverse 1600 slot 14 or Traverse 2000 slot 18). Place
additional cards towards the center of the shelf as required.
The following table shows the redundancy rules for all GCM types:
Table 12-2 Redundancy Rules for GCM Types
Active GCM Standby GCM
GCM GCM
GCM GCM Enhanced | Universal1

Table 12-2 Redundancy Rules for GCM Types (continued)
Active GCM Standby GCM
GCM Enhanced | Universal1 GCM

GCM Enhanced | Universal GCM Enhanced | Universal
GCM with OC-N/STM-N GCM with OC-N/STM-N
1
GCM Enhanced or Universal environmental alarm function should not be used in this combination.

Traverse 1600 The following table provides card placement guidelines for the Traverse 1600 shelf. Legend: Gray Fill=valid slot for card, No
Card Fill=invalid card slot, Standby or Active (S/A), Protecting (P), Working (W), Open (O).
Placement
Page 12-8
Traverse 1600 Card Placement

Important: For standard electrical connector card (ECM) placement, the 2-slot ECMs plug into slot n of an n and n+1 slot
combination. The 3-slot ECMs plug into slot n+1 of an n, n+1, and n+2 slot combination. For example, in a Traverse 1600 slot
11 and 12 combination, the 2-slot ECM plugs into the slot 11 backplane connectors. Some ECMs require specific placement,
see the Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 2—“ECM
Interface Specifications,” page 2-15 for ECM slot placement details.
Important: For standard 10-port GbE card SFP connector card (SCM) placement, the 2-slot SCMs plug into slot n+1 of an
n and n+1 slot combination. For example, in a Traverse 1600 slot 11 and 12 combination, the 2-slot SCM plugs into the slot 12
backplane connectors.
Table 12-3 Traverse 1600 Card Placement Guidelines
Traverse 1600 Slot Numbers

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Turin Networks
GCM S/A S/A
• GCM
• Enhanced GCM1
• GCM OC-12/STM-41
OPTICAL (Note: Optical cards are protected at the port level. There are no slot or card placement restrictions for optical working/protection.)
• OC-3/STM-1 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
• OC-12/STM-4
• OC-48/STM-16
• OC-192/STM-64 Slots 1/2 Slots 3/4 Slots 5/6 Slots 7/8 Slots 9/10 Slots 11/12 Slots 13/14
ETHERNET (Dual slot)

Release TR3.0.x
• 1-port 10GbE Slots 1/2 Slots 3/4 Slots 5/6 Slots 7/8 Slots 9/10 Slots 11/12 Slots 13/14
P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W
• 10-port GbE P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W
ETHERNET (Single slot) 1:1 equipment protection with a 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM
(Note: The Ethernet Combo cards have optical ports and electrical ports. The card placement restriction is due to the electrical ports.)
Table 12-3 Traverse 1600 Card Placement Guidelines (continued)
Release TR3.0.x

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W
• GbE [LX, SX] plus
10/100BaseTX Combo
[CEP\[EoPDH]]
• GbE TX plus GbE [LX or
SX] plus 10/100BaseTX
Combo [CEP\[EoPDH]]
NGE only:
• GbE CWDM plus
10/100BaseTX Combo
• GbE SX plus GbE CWDM
Turin Networks
plus 10/100BaseTX Combo
ETHERNET (Single slot) unprotected with a 2-slot 10/100BaseT ECM
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: W W W W W W W W W W W W


10/100BaseTX Combo
[CEP\[EoPDH]]
Combo [CEP\[EoPDH]]
NGE only:
• GbE CWDM plus

10/100BaseTX Combo
Page 12-9
Page 12-10

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ETHERNET (Single slot) unprotected with a 2-slot Ethernet (Protection) ECM
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W
10/100BaseTX Combo
[CEP\[EoPDH]]
Combo [CEP\[EoPDH]]
NGE only:
• GbE CWDM plus
10/100BaseTX Combo
Turin Networks
TDM 1:2 equipment protection with the corresponding ECM
• DS1 W W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC
• E1
TDM 1:1 equipment protection with a 2-slot ECM
• DS1 W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC
• E1
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O
Release TR3.0.x
• E1
TDM unprotected with the corresponding ECM
• DS1, W W W W W W W W W W W W
• E1
TDM unprotected with a 2-slot DS3/E3 ECM (Note: The card placement restriction is due to the electrical connector card.)
Release TR3.0.x

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W W
VT/VC Switching 1:N equipment protection (Note: No ECM requirement with VT/VC switching cards.)
VT/TU 5G Switch W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P
2
GCM with optics plus VTX W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P
Turin Networks
VT/VC Switching unprotected
VT/TU 5G Switch W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
2
GCM with optics plus VTX W W W W W W W W W W W W W W

1
Redundant GCMs can be different types; e.g., a GCM with integrated optics (OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16) placed with an Enhanced GCM for GCM redundancy.
2
While the VTX can be in a 1:1 or unprotected group, the related OC-N/STM-N facilities can be unprotected or in a 1+1 APS/MSP, UPSR/SNCP, or BLSR/MS-SPRing protection group.
Important: For electrical port usage only, place an OC-N/STM-N or 1-slot blank faceplate between any 10/100BaseTX-inclusive
card and an electrical card (of another type), if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed to the right of an electrical interface card.

A blank faceplate or OC-N/STM-N card is not required if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed to the left of an electrical card.
If the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card also contains optical ports, and if the user intends to ONLY use the optical ports, this electrical
port usage restriction does not apply.
Important: Place 1-slot wide blank faceplates in empty slots to ensure EMI protection and proper cooling.
Page 12-11
Traverse 2000 The following table provides card placement guidelines for the Traverse 2000 shelf.
Page 12-12

Card Legend: Gray Fill=valid slot for card, No Fill=invalid card slot, Standby or Active (S/A), Protecting (P), Working (W), Open
Placement (O).
Important: For standard electrical connector card (ECM) placement, the 2-slot ECMs plug into slot n of an n and n+1 slot
11 and 12 combination, the 2-slot ECM plugs into the slot 11 backplane connectors. Some ECMs require specific placement,
see the Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 2—“ECM
Interface Specifications,” page 2-15 for ECM slot placement details.
Important: For standard 10-port GbE card SFP connector card (SCM) placement, the 2-slot SCMs plug into slot n+1 of an
n and n+1 slot combination. For example, in a Traverse 1600 slot 11 and 12 combination, the 2-slot SCM plugs into the slot 12
backplane connectors.

Turin Networks
Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
GCM S/A S/A
GCM
Enhanced GCM1
GCM OC-12/STM-41
GCM OC-48/STM-161
OPTICAL (Note: Optical cards are protected at the port level. There are no slot or card placement restrictions for optical working/protection.)
• OC-3/STM-1 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
• OC-12/STM-4
• OC-48/STM-16
Release TR3.0.x
OC-192/STM-64 Slots 1/2 Slots 3/4 Slots 5/6 Slots 7/8 Slots 9/10 Slots 11/12 Slots 13/14 Slots 15/16 Slots 17/18
ETHERNET (Dual slot)

Release TR3.0.x

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
• 1-port 10GbE Slots 1/2 Slots 3/4 Slots 5/6 Slots 7/8 Slots 9/10 Slots 11/12 Slots 13/14 Slots 15/16 Slots 17/18
P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W
• 10-port GbE P W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W W/ W/ W/ W
P P P P P P P P P P P P P
ETHERNET unprotected with a 2-slot 10/100BaseT ECM
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W

10/100BaseTX Combo
[CEP\[EoPDH]]
Turin Networks

Combo [CEP\[EoPDH]]
NGE only:
• GbE CWDM plus

10/100BaseTX Combo
ETHERNET unprotected with a 2-slot Ethernet (Protection) ECM
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: O W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W

• GbE [LX, SX] plus O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
10/100BaseTX Combo

[CEP\[EoPDH]]
Combo [CEP\[EoPDH]]
NGE only:
• GbE CWDM plus
10/100BaseTX Combo
Page 12-13

TDM 1:2 equipment protection with corresponding ECM

Page 12-14

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
• DS1 W W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
• E1
• DS1 W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
• E1

Turin Networks
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/
• DS3/EC-1 Transmux P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O
• E1
• DS1 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
• E1
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC O W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W
• DS3/EC-1 Transmux O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC O W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W W
• DS3/EC-1 Transmux O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Release TR3.0.x
VT/VC Switching with 1:N equipment protection (Note: No ECM requirement with VT/VC switching cards.)
Release TR3.0.x

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
VT/TU 5G Switch with 1:1 W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/

Equipment Protection P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
GCM with optics plus VTX2 W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/

P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
VT/VC Switching unprotected
VT/TU 5G Switch without W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W

Equipment Protection
GCM with optics plus VTX2 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W

Turin Networks
1
Redundant GCMs can be different types; e.g., a GCM with integrated optics (OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16) placed with an Enhanced GCM for GCM redundancy.
2
While the VTX can be in a 1:1 or unprotected protection group, the related OC-48/STM-16 facilities can be unprotected or in a 1+1 APS/MSP, UPSR/SNCP, or BLSR/MS-SPRing
protection group.

Important: For electrical port usage only, place an OC-N/STM-N or 1-slot blank faceplate between any 10/100BaseTX-inclusive
card and an electrical card (of another type), if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed to the right of an electrical interface card.
A blank faceplate or OC-N/STM-N card is not required if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed to the left of an electrical card.
If the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card also contains optical ports, and if the user intends to ONLY use the optical ports, this electrical
port usage restriction does not apply.

Important: Place 1-slot wide blank faceplates in empty slots to ensure EMI protection and proper cooling.
Page 12-15
Traverse 600 The following table provides card placement guidelines for the Traverse 600 shelf.
Page 12-16

Card Legend: Gray Fill=valid slot for card, No Fill=invalid card slot, Standby or Active (S/A), Protecting (P), Working (W), Open
Placement (O).
Important: For standard electrical connector card (ECM) placement, 2-slot ECMs plug into slot n of an n and n+1 slot
3 and 4 combination, the 2-slot ECM plugs into the slot 3 backplane connectors. Some ECMs require specific placement, see
the Traverse Installation and Commissioning Guide, Section 2—Network Interface Specifications for ECM slot placement
details.

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6
GCM S/A S/A

Turin Networks
• GCM
• Enhanced GCM1
OPTICAL (Note: Optical cards are protected at the port level. There are no slot or card placement restrictions for optical
working/protection.)
• OC-3/STM-1 W W W W
• OC-12/STM-4
• OC-48/STM-16
• OC-192/STM-64 (Note: Not available on the Traverse 600.)
ETHERNET (Dual slot) (Note: Not available on the Traverse 600.)

Release TR3.0.x
ETHERNET (Single slot) 1:1 equipment protection with a 2-slot Ethernet Protection ECM
Release TR3.0.x

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: P W/P W/P W

• GbE [LX, SX] plus 10/100BaseTX Combo
[CEP\[EoPDH]]
• GbE TX plus GbE [LX or SX] plus 10/100BaseTX Combo
[CEP\[EoPDH]]
NGE only:
• GbE CWDM plus 10/100BaseTX Combo
• GbE SX plus GbE CWDM plus 10/100BaseTX Combo
ETHERNET (Single slot) unprotected with a 2-slot 10/100BaseT ECM
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: W W W W

Turin Networks

[CEP\[EoPDH]]
[CEP\[EoPDH]]

NGE only:
ETHERNET (Single slot) unprotected with a 2-slot Ethernet (Protection) ECM
NGE, NGE Plus, EoPDH: O W/O W/O W

[CEP\[EoPDH]]

[CEP\[EoPDH]]
NGE only:
Page 12-17
Page 12-18

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6
TDM 1:2 equipment protection with the corresponding ECM
• DS1 W W/P W/P W

• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC
• E1
• DS1 W/P W/P W/P W/P

• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC
• E1
Turin Networks
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O

• DS1 W W W W
• E1
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC O W/O W/O W

TDM unprotected with a 3-slot DS3/E3 ECM (Note: the card placement restriction is due to the electrical connector card.)
• DS3/E3/EC-1 CC O W/O W W
Release TR3.0.x
VT/VC Switching with 1:N Equipment Protection (Note: No ECM requirement with VT/VC switching cards.)
VT/TU 5G Switch W/P W/P W/P W/P
OC-48/STM-16 with VTX2 W/P W/P W/P W/P

Release TR3.0.x

Card Type
1 2 3 4 5 6
VT/VC Switching without Equipment Protection
VT/TU 5G Switch W W W W
OC-48/STM-16 with VTX W W W W
1
Redundant GCMs can be different types; e.g., a GCM with integrated optics (OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16) placed with an Enhanced
GCM for GCM redundancy.
2
While the VTX Switch can be in a 1:1 or unprotected protection group, the related OC-48/STM-16 facilities can be unprotected or in a 1+1
APS/MSP, UPSR/SNCP, or BLSR/MS-SPRing protection group.
Turin Networks
Important: For electrical port usage only, place an OC-N/STM-N or 1-slot blank faceplate
between any 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card and an electrical card (of another type), if the
10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed to the right of an electrical interface card. A blank

faceplate or OC-N/STM-N card is not required if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card is placed
to the left of an electrical card.
If the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive card also contains optical ports, and if the user intends to
ONLY use the optical ports, this electrical port usage restriction does not apply.
Important: Place 1-slot wide blank faceplates in empty slots to ensure EMI protection and

proper cooling.
Page 12-19
Appendix B
Installation and Commissioning Checklists
Introduction This chapter includes checklists to provide the basic steps necessary to complete
Traverse system hardware installation, cabling and initial configuration steps. Each
step references the related detail-level procedure for additional information.
• Power System Hardware Installation Checklist, page 12-22
• Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist, page 12-23
• Network Cabling Checklist, page 12-25
• Alarm Cabling Checklist, page 12-27
• Timing and Management Cabling Checklist, page 12-30
• Power Cabling Checklist, page 12-32
• Node Start-up and Commissioning Checklist, page 12-35

Power System Hardware Installation Checklist
Power System Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection, electrical and fiber optic
Hardware cabling are provided in Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Installation Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1.
Checklist All power system hardware installation detail-level procedure references are to
Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling Procedures, Chapter 2—“Power System
Hardware Installation,” page 10-3. Required equipment and tools are also provided as
part of this chapter.
Table 12-6 Power System Hardware Installation Checklist
Step Description and Procedure Reference D

1 Install the power system hardware (e.g., PDAP-4S, PDAP-15A,
or PDAP-2S) in the central office bay and rack indicated on your
engineering work order using thread-forming screws. Ground the
hardware to a properly grounded telco rack.
Note: Installation of power system hardware in a 23-inch
(584 mm or other ETSI) rack requires standard conductive plated
rack adapters. Refer to Section 7—Hardware Installation
Procedures, Chapter 2—“Traverse System Hardware
Installation,” Install the Rack Adapters, page 7-8.
Power System (PDAP). Install the power system at the top of
the equipment rack. The detail-level installation procedure is in
Section 10—Power Installation and Cabling Procedures,
Chapter 2—“Power System Hardware Installation,” page 10-3.
2 All Power System Hardware Installation Checklist steps are
complete.

Appendix B Installation and Commissioning Checklists
Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist
Traverse Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection, electrical and fiber optic
System cabling are provided in Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Hardware Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1.
Installation All network cabling detail-level procedure references are to Section 7—Hardware
Checklist Installation Procedures. Required equipment and tools are also provided as part of each
installation chapter.
Table 12-7 Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist

1 Is power system hardware installation complete?
Yes. Go to Step 2.
No. Refer to the Power System Hardware Installation
2 Install Rack Adapters.
Install rack adapters as necessary for:
• Traverse 1600 system installation in a 23-inch (584 mm) rack.
Refer to Chapter 2—“Traverse System Hardware
Installation,” Install the Rack Adapters, page 7-8 and repeat
for each Traverse system component.
• Traverse 2000 system installation in a 19-inch (483 mm) rack.
Refer to Chapter 3—“Traverse 2000 Installation into a
19-inch Rack,” Install the Horizontal Rack Adapter
Brackets, page 7-19 and repeat for each Traverse 2000
system component
3 Traverse System.
Are you installing a Traverse 2000 system in a 19-inch (483 mm)
rack?
• Yes. Install the fan first, then the shelf. Refer to Chapter
3—“Traverse 2000 Installation into a 19-inch Rack”:
– Install the Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a 19-inch
Rack, page 7-20
– Install a Traverse 2000 in a 19-inch Rack, page 7-22
– Go to Step 5
• No. Install the shelf first, then the fan. Remember to install
the first Traverse shelf below the power system with a
3/8-inch (9.5 mm) space (for non-vertical installations only)
to allow for proper air flow. Refer to Chapter 2—“Traverse
System Hardware Installation”:
– Install the Traverse Shelf, page 7-9
– Go to the next step

Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist
Table 12-7 Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist (continued)

4 Fan Tray Holder (and Air Ramp). A fan tray holder with air
ramp is required for each Traverse shelf to ensure proper cooling.
Connect the fan tray holder power cable to the J1 FAN TRAY
INTERFACE connector on the Traverse main backplane. Install
the fan tray holder directly below the Traverse shelf in the rack.
Select one of the detail-level installation procedures in
Chapter 2—“Traverse System Hardware Installation,” page 7-7
depending on the fan tray holder type:
• Install the Fan Tray Holder with Separate Air Ramp,
page 7-12
5 Fan Tray Module (and Air Filter). Install the fan tray module
into the fan tray holder. Place the foam air filter in the gap
between the fan module and the top of the fan tray holder.
Select one group of detail-level installation procedures in
Chapter 4—“Insert Fan Module and Air Filters” depending on the
fan tray type:
• Front Inlet:
– Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan
Assembly, page 6-26
– Insert a Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Fan Air
Filter, page 6-27
• With Separate Air Ramp:
– Insert a Fan Tray Module (Legacy), page 6-31
– Insert a Fan Tray Air Filter (Legacy), page 6-33
6 All Traverse System Hardware Installation Checklist steps are
complete.

Network Cabling Checklist
Network Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection, electrical and fiber optic
Cabling cabling are provided in Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Checklist Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1. Cable management is provided in
All network cabling detail-level procedure references are to Section 8—Network
Interface Cabling Procedures. Required equipment and tools are also provided as part
of each cabling chapter.

making connections at the Traverse main backplane or fiber optic
backplane. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the air
ramp or other confirmed source of earth ground.
WARNING! Follow all directions and warning labels when working

with optical fibers. Always wear eye protection when working with
optical fibers. Never look directly into the end of a terminated or
unterminated fiber or connector as it may cause eye damage.
.
Table 12-8 Network Cabling Checklist

1 Plug-in Electrical Connector Modules (ECM). Plug-in
ECM(s) into the main backplane as required for DS1, DS3, E1, E3
Ethernet (10/100BaseTX and/or GbE TX) cabling.
Detail-level cabling procedures are in:
• Chapter 3—“DS1 and E1 Cabling Procedures,” Plug-in
Electrical Connector Module, page 8-17
• Chapter 4—“DS3 and E3 Cabling Procedures,” Plug-in
DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module, page 8-29
• Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures,”
Plug-in Ethernet Protection ECM, page 8-39

Network Cabling Checklist
Table 12-8 Network Cabling Checklist (continued)

2 Complete Cabling. Complete network cabling based on the
type of ECM installed.
Detail-level cabling procedures are in:
• Chapter 3—“DS1 and E1 Cabling Procedures”:
– DS1 (100 ohm) and E1 (120 ohm) Cabling at the
DS1/E1 ECM, page 8-18
– E1 (75 ohm) Cabling at the Electrical Connector
Module, page 8-24
• Chapter 4—“DS3 and E3 Cabling Procedures,” DS3 and E3
Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 8-30
• Chapter 5—“Ethernet (Electrical) Cabling Procedures,”
Ethernet Protection Cabling at the Electrical Connector
Module, page 8-40
3 (SDH network only) Attach clamp-on ferrites around
10/100BaseTX cables. Attach one clamp-on ferrite (1 turn) on
each 10/100BaseTX cable 152.4 mm (6-inches) from the 50-pin
connector.
4 Connect Fiber Optic Cables. Connect fiber optic cables from
the central office optical distribution frame (ODF) or fiber optic
patch panel to the Traverse fiber optic backplane. Refer to
Section 2—Network Interface Specifications, Chapter 1—“Fiber
Optic Interface Cabling Specifications,” page 2-9 for
specifications.
The detail-level fiber optic cabling procedure is in
Chapter 2—“Fiber Optic Cabling Procedures,” MPX Fiber Optic
Cabling, page 8-4.
For information on acceptable minimum/maximum output power
and receiver levels refer to the Node Operations and Maintenance
Guide, Section 4—Diagnostics, Chapter 2—“Traverse Transmit
and Receive Signal Levels,” page 4-3.
5 All Network Cabling Checklist steps are complete.

Alarm Cabling Checklist
Alarm Cabling Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection, electrical and fiber optic
Checklist cabling are provided in Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1. Cable management is provided in
All alarm cabling detail-level procedure references are to Section 9—Alarm, Timing,
and Management Cabling Procedures. Required equipment and tools are also provided
as part of each cabling chapter.

making connections at the fuse alarm panel (e.g., PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S)
and Traverse main backplane. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack
provided on the air ramp or other confirmed source of earth ground.
.

Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist

1 Connect Fuse Alarm Panel (Optional PDAP-4S or
PDAP-15A only) Power Alarm Wires. Connect power alarm
wires at the back of the fuse alarm panel and to a central office
power alarm panel as required.
Select the appropriate detail-level alarm cabling procedure in
Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling”:
• PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections, page 9-15
• PDAP-15A Power Alarm Connections, page 9-19
2 Connect Fuse Alarm Panel (Optional PDAP) Fuse Alarm
Wires. Connect fuse A and B alarm wires at the back of the fuse
alarm panel and to a central office fuse alarm panel as required.
The detail-level alarm cabling procedure is in Chapter 2—“Alarm
Interface Cabling”:
• Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,” PDAP-4S Fuse
Alarm Connections, page 9-16
• Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,” PDAP-15A Fuse
Alarm Connections, page 9-20
• Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,” PDAP-2S (Legacy)
Fuse Alarm Connections, page 9-24


Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist (continued)

3 Connect Fuse Alarm Panel (Optional PDAP) Visual
Alarm Input Wires. Connect visual alarm input wires at the
back of the fuse alarm panel as required.
The detail-level alarm cabling procedure is located in
Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling”:
• Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,” PDAP-4S Visual
Alarm Input Connections, page 9-17
• Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,” PDAP-15A Visual
Alarm Input Connections, page 9-21
• Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling,” PDAP-2S (Legacy)
Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 9-25
4 Connect Visual Alarm Output Wires at each Shelf in the
Rack. Terminate visual alarm output wires at the CRITVIS,
MAJVIS, MINVIS wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and at
the central office visual alarm panel, if not connected to a PDAP.
Detail-level alarm cabling procedures are located in
Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling”::
• Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf,
page 9-4
• Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf,
page 9-6
5 Connect Audible Alarm Output Wires at each Shelf in
the Rack. Terminate audible alarm output wires at the
CRITAUD, MAJAUD, MINAUD wire-wrap posts on the main
backplane and to the central office audible alarm panel.
Detail-level alarm cabling procedures are located in
Chapter 2—“Alarm Interface Cabling”::
• Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf,
page 9-8
• Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf,
page 9-10


Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist (continued)

6 Connect Remote Visual and Audible Alarm Output
Wires at each Shelf in the Rack. Terminate remote visual
and audible alarm output wires at the REMVIS and REMAUD
wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and the central office
remote alarm cross-connect panel.
The location of these wire-wrap posts on the main backplane are
provided in Section 3—Alarm, Timing, and Management
Interface Specifications, Chapter 1—“Alarm Interface
Specifications,” Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts, page 3-2.
7 Connect Environmental Alarm Input Wires at each Shelf
in the Rack. Terminate environmental alarm input wires at the
ENV IN and RTN wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and at
the equipment being monitored.
Specifications,” Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and
EAM, page 3-5
8 Connect Visual or Audible Fail-safe Alarm Wires at each
Shelf in the Rack. Terminate fail-safe alarm wires at the
FAILSAFE wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and the
central office visual or audible alarm panel.
Specifications,” Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts, page 3-2.
9 (SDH network only) Attach clamp-on ferrites around
alarm cable bundles. Two ferrites around the cable bundle
(1 turn), one 152.4 mm (6-inches) from the rack, the other 304.8
to 457.2 mm (12 to 18-inches) from the rack.
10 All Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible, Environmental and Fail-safe
Alarm Cabling Checklist steps are complete.

Timing and Management Cabling Checklist
Timing and Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection, electrical and fiber optic
Management cabling are provided in Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Cabling Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1. Cable management is provided in
Checklist Section 5—Cable Management Specifications, Chapter 1—“Cable Management
All timing and management cabling detail-level procedure references are to
Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling Procedures. Required equipment
and tools are also provided as part of each cabling chapter.

making connections at the Traverse main backplane. Plug the ESD wrist
strap into the ESD jack provided on the air ramp or other confirmed source
of earth ground.
.
Table 12-10 Timing and Management Cabling Checklist

1 Connect T1/E1 or CC2M Timing Wires. Connect input and
output timing wires from the central office BITS/SASE T1/E1 or
CC2M timing source to the Traverse main backplane T1/E1 or
CC2M wire-wrap posts.
Detail-level timing procedures are located in Chapter 3—“Timing
Interface Cabling”:
• T1/E1 Timing Interface Input, page 9-28
• T1/E1 Timing Interface Output, page 9-32
• CC2M Timing Interface Input, page 9-34
• CC2M (2MHz) Timing Interface Output, page 9-36
2 Verify Jumpers on Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3.
The location of these jumpers is provided in Chapter 3—“Timing
Interface Cabling,” Verify Preset Jumpers on Headers J2 and
J3, page 9-38.
3 Connect DCN Ethernet (Management) Cabling. Connect
DCN Ethernet cabling from the LAN/WAN network device to the
Traverse main backplane J4 (ETHERNET) RJ-45 connector.
The detail-level DCN Ethernet interface connection procedure is
located in Chapter 4—“Management Interface Cabling,” DCN
Ethernet Interface Connection, page 9-40.

Timing and Management Cabling Checklist
Table 12-10 Timing and Management Cabling Checklist (continued)

4 (SDH network only) Attach clamp-on ferrite to Ethernet
cable. One ferrite (2 turns) on each DCN Ethernet cable
152.4 mm (6-inches) from the rack. One turn is defined as a single
pass through the ferrite hole.
Refer to Section 5—Cable Management Specifications,
Chapter 1—“Cable Management Specifications,” Ferrite
Requirements, page 5-6.
5 Connect RS-232 Interface (Management) Cabling.
Connect RS-232 interface cabling from an external modem to the
Traverse main backplane J5 (RS-232) RJ-45 connector using an
RJ-45 to DB-25 adaptor.
The detail-level RS-232 interface connection procedure is located
in Chapter 4—“Management Interface Cabling,” RS-232 DTE
Interface Connection, page 9-42.
6 All Timing and Management Cabling Checklist steps are
complete.

Power Cabling Checklist
Power Cabling Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection, electrical and fiber optic
Checklist cabling are provided in Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1. Cable management is provided in
All power cabling detail-level procedure references are to Section 10—Power
Installation and Cabling Procedures. Required equipment and tools are also provided
as part of each chapter.
WARNING! Use extreme caution when working with battery and

battery return supply cables. Remove all metal jewelry when working
with power circuits.

making connections at the PDAP and Traverse main backplane. Plug the
ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the air ramp or other
confirmed source of earth ground.
.
Table 12-11 Power Cabling Checklist

1 Connect Battery and Battery Return Distribution
Cabling. Connect battery and battery return distribution cabling
from the Traverse main backplane power terminals to the back of
the PDAP.
Detail-level battery distribution cabling procedures are located in
Chapter 3—“Battery and Battery Return Distribution”:
• Connect PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cables,
page 10-10
• Connect PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cables,
page 10-13
• Connect PDAP-15A Battery Distribution Cables,
page 10-16
• Connect PDAP-15A Battery Return Distribution Cables,
page 10-18
• Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Distribution Cables,
page 10-21
• Connect PDAP-2S (Legacy) Battery Return Distribution
Cables, page 10-24

Table 12-11 Power Cabling Checklist (continued)

2 Connect Central Office Battery “A” and “B” Supply
Cabling. Connect central office battery “A” and “B” supply
cabling from the battery distribution fuse bay (BDFB)—or other
central office battery source—to PDAP battery supply terminal
lugs.
WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected
to central office battery source before beginning this
procedure to avoid personal injury.
The detail-level battery supply cabling procedure is located in
Chapter 4—“Battery and Battery Return Supply,” Connect
Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP, page 10-31.
3 Connect Central Office Battery Return “A” and “B”
Supply Cabling. Connect central office battery return “A” and
“B” supply cabling from the battery return bus bar (or other
central office battery return source) to PDAP battery return supply
terminal lugs.
WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected
to central office battery source before beginning this
procedure to avoid personal injury.
The detail-level battery return supply cabling procedure is located
in Chapter 4—“Battery and Battery Return Supply,” Connect
Battery Supply Cables to the PDAP, page 10-32.
4 Connect Battery and Battery Return Supply Cables to
the Central Office Source. Connect battery and battery return
supply cables to the central office source following local
procedures or arrange for a local central office technician to make
these connections.
WARNING! Complete continuity testing before connecting
battery and battery return cables to the central office source.
WARNING! Before connecting the supply cables, go to the
front of the PDAP and verify that all circuit breakers are in
the OFF position, TPA fuse holders are empty, and that GMT
fuse positions are empty or contain dummy fuses
The detail-level supply cabling to the central office source
procedure is located in Chapter 4—“Battery and Battery Return
Supply,” Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source,
page 10-35.

Table 12-11 Power Cabling Checklist (continued)

5 Verify Polarity and Voltage. Confirm polarity between the
battery and battery return supply connections at the PDAP-2S or
PDAP-4S. Measure the voltage present at the NEG VDC “A” and
“B” input lugs on the PDAP.
WARNING! Go to the front of the PDAP and verify that all
circuit breakers are in the OFF position and fuse holders are
empty before verifying polarity or voltage.
Procedures are provided in Chapter 4—“Battery and Battery
Return Supply”:
6 All Power Cabling Checklist steps are complete.

Node Start-up and Commissioning Checklist
Node Start-up Basic precautions and procedures for handling cards and electrostatic discharge
and protection are provided in Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,
Commissioning Chapter 1—“Precautions,” page 6-1 and Chapter 3—“Inserting and Removing Cards,”
Checklist page 6-15.
All Traverse node start-up and commissioning detail-level procedure references are to
Section 11—Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures. Required equipment and
tools are also provided as part of start-up and card placement chapters.

handling and placing cards into the Traverse shelf. Plug the ESD wrist
strap into the ESD jack provided on the air ramp or other confirmed source
of earth ground.
WARNING! Follow all directions and warning labels when working

with optical fibers. Always wear eye protection when working with
optical fibers. Never look directly into the end of a terminated or
unterminated fiber or connector as it may cause eye damage.
Table 12-12 Node Start-up and Commissioning Checklist

1 Switch on Power to the Traverse Shelves (nodes).
Battery “A” and “B” PDAP-2S circuit breakers, PDAP-4S TPA
fuse holders, and PDAP-15A GMT fuse holders are located on the
front of the PDAP. Switch the PDAP-2S circuit breakers to the
ON position or install an operable PDAP-4S TPA or PDAP-15A
GMT fuse for each installed shelf beginning with A1 and B1.
Leave the other PDAP-2S circuit breakers in the OFF position or
PDAP-4S TPA or PDAP-15A GMT fuse holders empty.
Important: The input power and critical alarm LEDs display on
the PDAP indicating no cards are place in the Traverse shelf. The
fan tray holder power LED is green.
Refer to Chapter 1—“Node Start-up and Commissioning,”
Commissioning Process, page 11-6.
2 Insert the Active GCM in Slot GCMA or GCMB.
Important: The GCM power LED is solid green indicating that
the GCM has power. The solid green Active/Standby LEd
indicates that it is the active GCM card. Initial configuration is
done through the active GCM via the CLI.

Table 12-12 Node Start-up and Commissioning Checklist (continued)

3 Connect your Laptop to the Active GCM RS-232
Interface.
Connect your laptop to the active GCM RS-232 interface (DB-9)
connector using a standard straight-through serial port cable.
Open up VT100 emulation software on your laptop and create
your terminal emulation session.
The detail-level commissioning procedure for the following steps
is provided in Chapter 1—“Node Start-up and Commissioning,”
Commission the Node, page 11-7.
4 Logon to the TransNav Management System Command
Line Interface (CLI).
Enter a login (admin) and password (admin) to access the node
for initial configuration.
5 Begin Commissioning Command Sequence.
At the command line, type the following command sequence:
exec node commission node-id nodeName
node-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd standard
technologyStandard oper-mode operationMode
<Enter>
See Section 11—Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Node Start-up and Commissioning,” Required
Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-3 for the
6 Reinitialize the GCM Database.
At the command prompt, type Y to reinitialize the database on the
GCM.


7 Configure Node Conditional Parameters.
Configure the conditional parameters for the node:
set node general msaid-format msaidFormat
<Enter>
set node ip bp-dcn-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
bp-dcn-mask aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd bp-dcn-gw-ip
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd <Enter>
set node ip ems-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ems-mask
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ems-gw aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd <Enter>
See Section 11—Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures,
Chapter 1—“Node Start-up and Commissioning,” Conditional
Node Commissioning Parameters, page 11-5 for the
8 Restart the Node.
At the command prompt, type the following sequence:
exec node restart<Enter>
CLI responds: Are you sure you want to execute
this command? [yes|no]:
Type: yes<Enter>
The node begins the restart sequence.
9 Exit the CLI.
Exit your terminal emulation session.
10 Place the Standby GCM in the Remaining GCM slot.
Important: The Active/Standby LED on the standby GCM
flashes amber while it is synchronizing with the active GCM.
Important: Wait for synchronization to complete. The
Active/Standby LED flashes green indicating that it is the standby
GCM and that synchronization is complete.


11 Place the Remaining Cards.
Plan card placement for the Traverse shelf based on completed
network interface cabling and card placement recommendations
provided in Appendix A—“Card Placement Planning and
Guidelines,” page 12-1. Also refer to the following procedures in
Chapter 3—“Inserting and Removing Cards” for detailed
instructions:
• Clean Cable and Card MPX Connectors, page 6-16 if you
are placing optical cards
12 Place 1-slot Wide Blank Faceplates.
Place 1-slot wide blank faceplates in any empty Traverse card
cage slots to ensure EMI protection and proper cooling.
13 All Node Start-up and Commissioning Checklist steps are
complete.

Appendix C
TransAccess Mux Interface Specification
TransAccess Figure 12-1 diagrams an Ethernet network with TransAccess Muxes connected to a
Mux Network data communications network (DCN) for remote management via the TransNav
Diagram Management System.
Subnet
Node
Mux
T3/STS-1/OC-3
Hub Mux
T3/STS-1/OC-3
Network
Mux
T3/STS-1/OC-3
Server
Network Operations Center (NOC)

Management Management
System Server System Client
IP Network
Workstation Workstation
Gateway
Management
Workstation Management
Workstation
System Client System Client
Figure 12-1 TransAccess Muxes Connected to an Ethernet Network


INDEX
Numerics back cover, 9-28

back cover with baluns, 3-11
1 for 1 equipment protection
standalone balun, 3-11, 9-28
module placement, 12-1
Battery
1 for 2 equipment protection
return distribution cabling
PDAP-15A, 10-18
1 for N equipment protection
PDAP-4S, 10-13
10/100BaseT
C
ECM
2-slot, 2-16 Cabling
module placement 10⁄100BaseT ECM, 8-45
precaution statement, 6-6, 6-19 alarm
10/100BaseTX interface, 9-3
module placement battery
precaution statement, 12-1 return supply, 10-33
10⁄100BaseT supply cabling, 10-31
cabling, 8-45 battery distribution
ECM PDAP-15A, 10-16
NGE and EoPDH support, 2-51 PDAP-2S, 10-21
2MHz clock timing, see Timing PDAP-4S, 10-10
battery return distribution
A PDAP-15A, 10-18
PDAP-2S, 10-24
Air
PDAP-4S, 10-13
ramp
checklist
installation, 7-14
alarm, 12-27
Alarms
network, 12-25
cabling interface, 9-3
power, 12-32
connections
timing, Ethernet, RS-232, 12-30
audible output, 9-8
DS1, 8-23
fuse alarm, 9-24
DS1 options, 2-24, 2-26, 2-28
fuse alarm, PDAP, 9-20
DS1⁄ECM, 8-18
PDAP-4S fuse, 9-16
DS3, 8-26
PDAP-4S visual input, 9-17
DS3 ECM, 8-24, 8-30
power, 9-15
E1, 8-23
power alarm, 9-19
E1 options, 2-24, 2-26, 2-28
visual input, PDAP, 9-21
E3, 8-26
visual input, PDAP-2S, 9-25
E3 ECM, 8-24, 8-30
visual output, 9-4, 9-6
Ethernet Protection ECM, 8-40
fail-safe and ACO wire-wrap posts, 3-4
ferrite requirements, 5-6
power, fuse and visual alarm
fiber optic, 8-4, 8-9
PDAP-4S wire-wrap posts, 9-13
routing management, 5-1
Card
B
electrical
Backplane protection, 12-2, 12-3
environmental alarm module, 3-2 GCM list, 12-6
shelf, fiber optic, 2-3 insert, 6-19
TBOS interface, 3-2 insert and remove, 6-15
Balun timing connection LEDs
Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Index-1

Index
power and standby, 11-12 DS1

optic, 12-5 cabling options, 2-24, 2-26, 2-28
remove, 6-23 ECM Telco 64 connector pinouts, 2-31
Carrier Ethernet Protection Pair panel cabling, 8-23
card DS1/E1
protection, 2-44 ECM
CC2M timing, see Timing 2-slot 28/21-port Telco 64 ECM, 2-16
Central office Telco 64 connector pinouts, 2-32
power supply, 10-35 electrical connector
Checklist module, 2-24, 8-15
cabling placement, 2-24
alarm, 12-27 DS1⁄E1
network, 12-25 ECM cabling, 8-18
timing, Ethernet, RS-232, 12-30 DS3
initial configuration, 12-35 cabling, 8-24, 8-30
installation cabling schemes
power system hardware, 12-22 16-slot shelf, 2-38
system hardware, 12-23 20-slot shelf, 2-36
power 6-slot shelf, 2-39
cabling, 12-32 panel cabling, 8-26
CLI DS3 mapped
commands electrical connector module
conventions, 11-3 E1/DS1, 2-32
initial configuration, 11-8, 12-36 DS3/E3
Commissioning ECM
node, 11-1 2-slot, 12-port BNC ECM, 2-16
node-id, 11-3 3-slot, 24-port BNC ECM, 2-16
node-ip, 11-3 3-slot, 48-port Mini-SMB ECM, 2-16
oper-mode, 11-4 electrical connector module
process, 11-6 placement, 2-36
standard, 11-4 DS3/E3/EC-1
Complementary Mux 12-port, 12-2
interface specification, 12-39 24-port, 12-2
Configuration card placement, 12-2
CLI commands, 11-8, 12-36 DS3/EC-1
Connections Transmux, 12-2
alarm
audible output, 9-8 E
audible relay output, 9-10
E1
fuse, 9-24
cabling options, 2-24, 2-26, 2-28
fuse, PDAP, 9-20
ECM
fuse, PDAP-4S, 9-16
2-slot, 42-port Mini-SMB ECM, 2-16
PDAP visual relay input, 9-21
electrical connector module, 8-15
PDAP-2S visual relay input, 9-25
Telco 64 connector pinouts, 2-31
PDAP-4S visual relay input, 9-17
panel cabling, 8-23
power, 9-15, 9-19
timing, see Timing
visual output, 9-4, 9-6
E1/DS1
ECM Telco 64 connector pinouts
D DS3 mapped, 2-32
DCN E3
Ethernet interface, 3-15 cabling, 8-24, 8-30
connection, 9-40 cabling schemes
pinouts, 3-15 16-slot shelf, 2-38
Index-2 Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Index
20-slot shelf, 2-36 F

6-slot shelf, 2-39
Fail-safe
panel cabling, 8-26
ACO wire-wrap posts, 3-4
ECM, see Electrical connector module
Fan
Electrical
power interface specification, 4-5
connector module, 2-31
tray holder
cabling
installation, 7-12
DS1/E1, 2-24
Ferrite
DS1/E1,Telco 64, 8-15
cabling requirements, 5-6
DS3/E3, 2-36
Fiber optic
E1 Mini-SMB, 8-15
cabling, 6-17, 6-18, 8-4, 8-8, 8-9
placement, 2-18
clean MPX connectors, 6-16
planning guidelines, 2-20
DCS application MPX port assignment, 2-13
Telco 64 connector pinouts, 2-31, 2-32
patch panel, 2-3
Telco 64 connector pinouts, DS3 mapped, 2-32
port assignment, 2-7, 2-9, 4-5
types, 2-16
shelf backplane, 2-3
precautions, 6-3
testing, 8-13
Electrostatic discharge
Front
jack location, 6-7
inlet fan tray holder
precautions, 6-6
air filter installation, 6-27
Environmental
power cabling, 7-11
alarm module, 3-2, 3-5
rack installation, 7-11, 7-20
alarms, 3-2
Fuse
precautions, 6-2
visual alarm
Equipment protection
PDAP-2S wire-wrap posts, 9-22
module placement
1 for 1, 12-1
G
1 for 2, 12-1
1 for N, 12-1 GbE
UTMX-24, 2-35 laser control, 2-6
UTMX-48, 2-35 GCM
ESD, see Electrostatic discharge Ethernet interface pinouts, 3-14
Ethernet list, 12-6
10⁄100BaseT ECM (legacy) support, 2-50 module placement, 12-8
10⁄100BaseT ECM support, 2-51 redundancy rules, 12-6
cabling procedures, 8-37 RS-232 interface pinouts, 3-14
combination cards, 2-44 with VTX/VCX, 12-2
dual-slot, 12-8, 12-12, 12-16 Grounding
module placement, 12-8 front inlet fan tray holder, 7-3
protection, 2-44 PDAP and the shelf, 10-6
protection ECM, 12-8 shelf, 7-3
2-slot, 2-16
cabling procedures, 8-37 H
mapping, 2-45 Hardware
mapping scheme, 2-45 checklist
placement, 2-45 installation, power system, 12-22
port mapping, 2-46 installation checklist, 12-23
Telco 50 pinouts, 2-46 precautions, 6-2
unprotected with 10⁄100BaseT ECM, 12-9, 12-13, Housing
12-17 MPX connectors, 2-7, 2-9
unprotected with Ethernet (protection) ECM, 12-10,
12-13, 12-17 I
Ethernet protection
cabling, 8-40 Install
air ramp, 7-14

Index
fan tray holder, 7-12 Nutdriver, 1/4-inch

front inlet fan tray air filter, 6-27 shelf power connections, 7-2
front inlet fan tray holder, 7-11, 7-20
rack adaptation, 7-8 O
shelf, 7-9, 7-22 Operation mode
Installation commissioning, 11-4
checklist Optic
power system hardware, 12-22 cards, 12-5
system hardware, 12-23 module placement, 12-8
L P
Laser control
PDAP, 4-3
GbE, 2-6
15A specification, 4-3
LEDs
19-inch rack installation, 10-4
power and standby all modules, 11-12
4S specification, 4-2
visual status
connections
GCM start-up, 11-11
15A alarm, 9-12
4S alarm, 9-12
M legacy 2S alarm, 9-12
Module ETSI rack installation, 10-4
GCM list, 12-6 legacy 2S specification, 4-4
insert, 6-19 power system, 4-2
placement protective back cover
equipment protection, 12-1 remove, 6-13
planning guidelines, 12-1 replace, 6-13
see also card wire-wrap posts
Modules power, fuse and visual alarm, 9-18
placement PDAP-2S
guidelines, 12-2 wire-wrap posts
MPX connectors fuse and visual alarm, 9-22
backplane housing, 2-7, 2-9 PDAP-4S
cleaning, 6-16 wire-wrap posts
cleaning material, 6-15 power, fuse and visual alarm, 9-13
fiber position, 2-2 Pinouts
inspection, 6-16 DCN Ethernet, 3-15
white stripe reference marker, 2-9, 2-13 DS1 ECM, 2-31
Mux DS1/E1 ECM, 2-32
complementary electrical connector module
interface specification, 12-39 E1, 2-31
E1/DS1, DS3 mapped, 2-32
N GCM Ethernet interface, 3-14
GCM RS-232 interface, 3-14
Network cabling
RS-232, 3-15
fiber optic, 8-9
Polarity
NGE
verify, 10-37
2-slot Telco 50 ECM, 2-16
Power
Node
battery distribution cabling
commissioning, 11-6
PDAP-15A, 10-16
start-up and commissioning, 11-1
PDAP-2S, 10-21
Node ID
PDAP-4S, 10-10
commissioning, 11-3
battery return distribution
Node IP
PDAP-15A, 10-18
commissioning, 11-3

Index
PDAP-4S, 10-13 Start-up

battery return distribution cabling initial configuration
PDAP-2S, 10-24 checklist, 12-35
battery return supply cabling, 10-33 LED
battery supply cabling, 10-31 GCM visual status, 11-11
optional PDAP description, 4-3 node, 11-1
wire-wrap posts System
fuse and visual alarm, PDAP, 9-18 configuration
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel, see PDAP example, 1-4
Power supply management gateway node, 3-15
central office, 10-35 timing interface wire-wrap posts, 3-9
Power-up
node, 11-1 T
Precaution statements, 6-1 T1/E1
electrical, 6-3 timing, see Timing
electrostatic discharge, 6-6 TBOS
environmental, 6-2 see Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial
hardware, 6-2 Telco 64 connector pinouts, 2-31
module, 6-5 Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial
Precaution statments protocol interface, 3-2
10/100BaseT Timing
module placement, 6-6 2MHz output connections
Procedures balun connection (optional), 3-11, 9-28
10⁄100BaseT cabling at the ECM, 8-45 CC2M input connections, 9-34
connect fiber-optic cables, 8-12 E1 input connections, 9-28
insert and remove SFP, 8-9 E1 output connections, 9-32
Protection interface
electrical cards, 12-2, 12-3 connections, 9-27
Ethernet, 12-4, 12-5 interface wire-wrap posts, 3-9
T1/E1 input connections, 9-28
R T1/E1 output connections, 9-32
RS-232 interface Transmux
connection, 9-42 DS3/EC-1, 12-2
pinouts, 3-15 UTMX-24, 12-2
DB-25, 3-16, 9-43 UTMX-48, 12-2
DB-9, 3-16, 9-43
U
S UTMX
SFPs Transmux, 12-2
insert and remove, 8-9 UTMX-24
latches, 8-9 equipment protection, 2-35
Shelf UTMX-48
back covers equipment protection, 2-35
removing, 6-9, 6-11
replacing, 6-9 V
cable ports left side, 5-1
Verify
flush mounting, 7-10
polarity, 10-37
rack installation, 7-9, 7-22
voltage, 10-38
adaptation, 7-8
Voltage
start-up and commissioning, 11-1
verify, 10-38
Standard
VT/TU Switch
commissioning, 11-4
card placement, 12-6

Index
W
Warning statements, see Precaution statements
White stripe
reference marker, 2-9, 2-13
Wire-wrap posts
timing interface, 3-9

Visit our website at:
www.turinnetworks.com
Release TR3.2.x
Traverse System
Documentation
800-0002-TR32

800-0002-TR32 Traverse Install and Config

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

800-0002-TR32 Traverse Install and Config

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turin Networks Inc.

Installation and Commissioning

International Declaration of Conformity

Section 1 Installation Overview

Section 2 Network Interface Specifications

Section 3 Alarm, Timing, and Management Interface Specifications

Section 4 Power Interface Specifications

Section 5 Cable Management Specifications

Section 6 Precautions and Common Procedures

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page i

Section 7 Hardware Installation Procedures

Section 8 Network Interface Cabling Procedures

Section 9 Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling Procedures

Section 10 Power Installation and Cabling Procedures

Section 11 Node Start-up and Commissioning Procedures

Page ii Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page iii

Page iv Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

About this Document

Introduction This description contains the following documentation topics:

Traverse This document provides step-by-step procedures for Network engineers,

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page v

Configuring This section provides step-by-step procedures for Network engineers,

Page vi Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

This document describes every menu, window, and

TransNav This document includes a quick reference to the

TransNav This document describes the syntax of the TL1

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page vii

Table 4 Operations Documentation

Document Description Target Audience

Page viii Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

When shipping equipment for repair, follow these steps:

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page ix

Page x Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page xv

Page xvi Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Introduction This chapter includes the following topics:

Table 1-1 Installation Process and References

Step Procedure Reference

1 Read the precautions before Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,

2 Familiarize yourself with common Section 6—Precautions and Common Procedures,

3 Install the hardware, e.g., the Section 7—Hardware Installation Procedures,

4 Install network cabling. Section 8—Network Interface Cabling Procedures,

5 Install alarm cabling. Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling

6 Install timing cabling. Section 9—Alarm, Timing, and Management Cabling

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page 1-1

Table 1-1 Installation Process and References (continued)

Step Procedure Reference

Page 1-2 Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Introduction This chapter includes the following topics:

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page 1-3

Fan Tray with

Fan Tray with

Fan Tray with

Fan Tray with

Figure 1-1 Traverse 1600 Rack Configuration

Page 1-4 Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Figure 1-2 Example Traverse 1600 Shelf Card Layout

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page 1-5

Page 1-6 Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Release TR3.2.x Turin Networks Page i

DS1/E1 ECM Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Page ii Turin Networks Release TR3.2.x

Figure 2-13 3-Slot E1 (42-port Mini-SMB) ECM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33